0% found this document useful (0 votes)

200 views

Modul - Test Huawei 2016

Modul_test Huawei 2016

Uploaded by

Gakapu GLK

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

200 views

Modul - Test Huawei 2016

Modul_test Huawei 2016

Uploaded by

Gakapu GLK

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 1254

WCDMA RAN

Fundamental

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Objectives
z Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Describe the development of 3G

Outline the advantage of CDMA principle

Characterize code sequence

Outline the fundamentals of RAN

Describe feature of wireless propagation

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
Different Service, Different Technology
1G 1980s 2G 1990s 3G
Analog Digital IMT-2000

AMPS GSM
GSM
UMTS
UMTS
CDMA
CDMA WCDMA
WCDMA
TACS Technologies IS-95
IS-95 Demands
drive drive cdma
cdma
NMT TDMA
TDMA 2000
2000
IS-136
IS-136
Others TD-
TD-
PDC
PDC SCDMA
SCDMA

3G provides compositive services for both operators and subscribers

z The first generation is the analog cellular mobile communication network in the time
period from the middle of 1970s to the middle of 1980s. The most important
breakthrough in this period is the concept of cellular networks put forward by the Bell
Labs in the 1970s, as compared to the former mobile communication systems. The
cellular network system is based on cells to implement frequency reuse and thus
greatly enhances the system capacity.
z The typical examples of the first generation mobile communication systems are the
AMPS system and the later enhanced TACS of USA, the NMT and the others. The
AMPS (Advanced Mobile Phone System) uses the 800 MHz band of the analog
cellular transmission system and it is widely applied in North America, South America
and some Circum-Pacific countries. The TACS (Total Access Communication System)
uses the 900 MHz band. It is widely applied in Britain, Japan and some Asian
countries.
z The main feature of the first generation mobile communication systems is that they
use the frequency reuse technology, adopt analog modulation for voice signals and
provide an analog subscriber channel every other 30 kHz/25 kHz.

z However, their defects are also obvious:

Low utilization of the frequency spectrum
Limited types of services
No high-speed data services
Poor confidentiality and high vulnerability to interception and number
embezzlement
High equipment cost
z To solve these fundamental technical defects of the analog systems, the digital
mobile communication technologies emerged and the second generation mobile
communication systems represented by GSM and IS-95 came into being in the
middle of 1980s. The typical examples of the second generation cellular mobile
communication systems are the DAMPS of USA, the IS-95 and the European GSM
system.
z The GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications) is originated from Europe.
Designed as the TDMA standard for mobile digital cellular communications, it
supports the 64 kbps data rate and can interconnect with the ISDN. It uses the 900
MHz band while the DCS1800 system uses the 1800 MHz band. The GSM system
uses the FDD and TDMA modes and each carrier supports eight channels with the
signal bandwidth of 200 kHz.
z The DAMPS (Digital Advanced Mobile Phone System) is also called the IS-54 (North
America Digital Cellular System). Using the 800 MHz bandwidth, it is the earlier of the
two North America digital cellular standards and specifies the use of the TDMA mode.
z The IS-95 standard is another digital cellular standard of North America. Using the
800 MHz or 1900 MHz band, it specifies the use of the CDMA mode and has already
become the first choice among the technologies of American PCS (Personal
Communication System) networks.
z Since the 2G mobile communication systems focus on the transmission of voice and
low-speed data services, the 2.5G mobile communication systems emerged in 1996
to address the medium-rate data transmission needs. These systems include GPRS
and IS-95B.
z The CDMA system has a very large capacity that is equivalent to ten or even twenty
times that of the analog systems. But the narrowband CDMA technologies come into
maturity at a time later than the GSM technologies, their application far lags behind
the GSM ones and currently they have only found large-scale commercial
applications in North America, Korea and China. The major services of mobile
communications are currently still voice services and low-speed data services.
z With the development of networks, data and multimedia communications have also
witnessed rapid development; therefore, the target of the 3G mobile communication is
to implement broadband multimedia communication.
z The 3G mobile communication systems are a kind of communication system that can
provide multiple kinds of high quality multimedia services and implement global
seamless coverage and global roaming. They are compatible with the fixed networks
and can implement any kind of communication at any time and any place with
portable terminals.
3G Evolution
z Proposal of 3G
IMT-2000: the general name of third generation mobile
communication system

The third generation mobile communication was first proposed

in 1985and was renamed as IMT-2000 in the year of 1996
Commercialization: around the year of 2000

Work band : around 2000MHz

The highest service rate :up to 2000Kbps

z Put forward in 1985 by the ITU (International Telecommunication Union), the 3G

mobile communication system was called the FPLMTS (Future Public Land Mobile
Telecommunication System) and was later renamed as IMT-2000 (International
Mobile Telecommunication-2000). The major systems include WCDMA, cdma2000
and UWC-136. On November 5, 1999, the 18th conference of ITU-R TG8/1 passed
the Recommended Specification of Radio Interfaces of IMT-2000 and the TD-SCDMA
technologies put forward by China were incorporated into the IMT-2000 CDMA TDD
part of the technical specification. This showed that the work of the TG8/1 in
formulating the technical specifications of radio interfaces in 3G mobile
communication systems had basically come into an end and the development and
application of the 3G mobile communication systems would enter a new and essential
phase.
z The 3GPP is an organization that develops specifications for a 3G system based on
the UTRA radio interface and on the enhanced GSM core network.
z The 3GPP2 initiative is the other major 3G standardization organization. It promotes
the CDMA2000 system, which is also based on a form of WCDMA technology. In the
world of IMT-2000, this proposal is known as IMT-MC. The major difference between
the 3GPP and the 3GPP2 approaches into the air interface specification development
is that 3GPP has specified a completely new air interface without any constraints from
the past, whereas 3GPP2 has specified a system that is backward compatible with IS-
95 systems.
3G Spectrum Allocation

z ITU has allocated 230 MHz frequency for the 3G mobile communication system IMT-
2000: 1885 ~ 2025MHz in the uplink and 2110~ 2200 MHz in the downlink. Of them,
the frequency range of 1980 MHz ~ 2010 MHz (uplink) and that of 2170 MHz ~ 2200
MHz (downlink) are used for mobile satellite services. As the uplink and the downlink
bands are asymmetrical, the use of dual-frequency FDD mode or the single-frequency
TDD mode may be considered. This plan was passed in WRC92 and new additional
bands were approved on the basis of the WRC-92 in the WRC2000 conference in the
year 2000: 806 MHz ~ 960 MHz, 1710 MHz ~ 1885 MHz and 2500 MHz ~ 2690 MHz.
Bands WCDMA Used
z Main bands
1920 ~ 1980MHz / 2110 ~ 2170MHz
z Supplementary bands: different country maybe different
1850 ~ 1910 MHz / 1930 MHz ~ 1990 MHz (USA)
1710 ~ 1785MHz / 1805 ~ 1880MHz (Japan)
890 ~ 915MHz / 935 ~ 960MHz (Australia)
...
z Frequency channel numbercentral frequency5, for main
band:
UL frequency channel number 96129888
DL frequency channel number : 1056210838

z The WCDMA system uses the following frequency spectrum (bands other than those
specified by 3GPP may also be used): Uplink 1920 MHz ~ 1980 MHz and downlink
2110 MHz ~ 2170 MHz. Each carrier frequency has the 5M band and the duplex
spacing is 190 MHz. In America, the used frequency spectrum is 1850 MHz ~ 1910
MHz in the uplink and 1930 MHz ~ 1990 MHz in the downlink and the duplex spacing
is 80 MHz.
3G Application Service
Error
Ratio

conversational

streaming

interactive

background

Time Delay

z Compatible with abundant services and applications of 2G, 3G system has an open
integrated service platform to provide a wide prospect for various 3G services.

z Features of 3G Services

z 3G services are inherited from 2G services. In a new architecture, new service

capabilities are generated, and more service types are available. Service
characteristics vary greatly, so each service features differently. Generally, there are
several features as follows:

Compatible backward with all the services provided by GSM.

The real-time services (conversational) such as voice service
generally have the QoS requirement.
The concept of multimedia service (streaming, interactive,
background) is introduced.
The Core technology of 3G: CDMA

WCDMA
WCDMA
CN: based on MAP and GPRS
RTT: WCDMA

cdma2000 TD-SCDMA
CN: based on ANSI 41 and MIP CDMA CN: based on MAP and GPRS
RTT: cdma2000 RTT: TD-SCDMA

z Formulated by the European standardization organization 3GPP, the core network

evolves on the basis of GSM/GPRS and can thus be compatible with the existing
GSM/GPRS networks. It can be based on the TDM, ATM and IP technologies to
evolve towards the all-IP network architecture. Based on the ATM technology, the
UTRAN uniformly processes voice and packet services and evolves towards the IP
network architecture.

z The cdma2000 system is a 3G standard put forward on the basis of the IS-95
standard. Its standardization work is currently undertaken by 3GPP2. Circuit Switched
(CS) domain is adapted from the 2G IS95 CDMA network, Packet Switched (PS)
domain is A packet network based on the Mobile IP technology. Radio Access
Network (RAN) is based on the ATM switch platform, it provides abundant adaptation
layer interfaces.

z The TD-SCDMA standard is put forward by the Chinese Wireless Telecommunication

Standard (CWTS) Group and now it has been merged into the specifications related
to the WCDMA-TDD of 3GPP. The core network evolves on the basis of GSM/GPRS.
The air interface adopts the TD-SCDMA mode.
Contents
1. 3G Overview

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
Multiple Access and Duplex Technology
z Multiple Access Technology
Frequency division multiple access (FDMA)

Time division multiple access (TDMA)

Code division multiple access (CDMA)

z In mobile communication systems, GSM adopts TDMA; WCDMA, cdma2000 and TD-
SCDMA adopt CDMA.
Multiple Access Technology

FDMA TDMA

Power

Power
y
nc
ue
Tim eq
e Fr
cy
Tim en
e qu
CDMA Fre

Power

Time ncy
Freque
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13

z Frequency Division Multiple Access means dividing the whole available spectrum into
many single radio channels (transmit/receive carrier pair). Each channel can transmit
one-way voice or control information. Analog cellular system is a typical example of
FDMA structure.

z Time Division Multiple Access means that the wireless carrier of one bandwidth is
divided into multiple time division channels in terms of time (or called timeslot). Each
user occupies a timeslot and receives/transmits signals within this specified timeslot.
Therefore, it is called time division multiple access. This multiple access mode is
adopted in both digital cellular system and GSM.

z CDMA is a multiple access mode implemented by Spreading Modulation. Unlike

FDMA and TDMA, both of which separate the user information in terms of time and
frequency, CDMA can transmit the information of multiple users on a channel at the
same time. The key is that every information before transmission should be
modulated by different Spreading Code to broadband signal, then all the signals
should be mixed and send. The mixed signal would be demodulated by different
Spreading Code at the different receiver. Because all the Spreading Code is
orthogonal, only the information that was be demodulated by same Spreading Code
can be reverted in mixed signal.
Multiple Access and Duplex
Technology
z Duplex Technology
Frequency division duplex (FDD)

Time division duplex (TDD)

z In third generation mobile communication systems, WCDMA and cdma2000 adopt

frequency division duplex (FDD), TD-SCDMA adopts time division duplex (TDD).
Duplex Technology

Power Time

USER 2

FDD USER 1
UL DL
Frequency

Power
Time
DL
USER 2
UL
DL
TDD DL
USER 1

Frequency

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page16
WCDMA Network Architecture
Core Network
CN CS PS CS PS
Iu-CS Iu-PS Iu-CS Iu-PS
RNS RNS
Iur
RNC RNC
UTRAN
Iub Iub Iub Iub

Node B Node B Node B Node B

Uu
UE
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17

z WCDMA including the RAN (Radio Access Network) and the CN (Core Network). The
RAN is used to process all the radio-related functions, while the CN is used to
process all voice calls and data connections within the UMTS system, and
implements the function of external network switching and routing.

z Logically, the CN is divided into the CS (Circuit Switched) Domain and the PS (Packet
Switched) Domain. UTRAN, CN and UE (User Equipment) together constitute the
whole UMTS system

z A RNS is composed of one RNC and one or several Node Bs. The Iu interface is
used between RNC and CN while the Iub interface is adopted between RNC and
Node B. Within UTRAN, RNCs connect with one another through the Iur interface.
The Iur interface can connect RNCs via the direct physical connections among them
or connect them through the transport network. RNC is used to allocate and control
the radio resources of the connected or related Node B. However, Node B serves to
convert the data flows between the Iub interface and the Uu interface, and at the
same time, it also participates in part of radio resource management.
WCDMA Network Version Evolution

MBMS
HSUPA
IMS
CS domain change to HSDPA 3GPP Rel6
GSM/GPRS CN NGN
WCDMA RTT WCDMA RTT 3GPP Rel5
3GPP Rel4
3GPP Rel99

2000 2001 2002 2005

z The overall structure of the WCDMA network is defined in 3GPP TS 23.002. Now,
there are the following three versions: R99, R4, R5.

z 3GPP began to formulate 3G specifications at the end of 1998 and beginning of 1999.
As scheduled, the R99 version would be completed at the end of 1999, but in fact it
was not completed until March, 2000. To guarantee the investment benefits of
operators, the CS domain of R99 version do not fundamentally change., so as to
support the smooth transition of GSM/GPRS/3G.

z After R99, the version was no longer named by the year. At the same time, the
functions of R2000 are implemented by the following two phases: R4 and R5. In the
R4 network, MSC as the CS domain of the CN is divided into the MSC Server and the
MGW, at the same time, a SGW is added, and HLR can be replaced by HSS (not
explicitly specified in the specification).

z In the R5 network, the end-to-end VOIP is supported and the core network adopts
plentiful new function entities, which have thus changed the original call procedures.
With IMS (IP Multimedia Subsystem), the network can use HSS instead of HLR. In
the R5 network, HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) is also supported, it
can support high speed data service.

z In the R6 network, the HSUPA is supported which can provide UL service rate up to
5.76Mbps. And MBMS (MultiMedia Broadcast Multicast Service) is also supported.
WCDMA Network Version Evolution
z Features of R6
MBMS is introduced
HSUPA is introduced to achieve the service rate up to 5.76Mbps

z Features of R7
HSPA+ is introduced, which adopts higher order modulation and MIMO
Max DL rate: 28Mbps, Max UL rate:11Mbps

z Features of R8
WCDMA LTE (Long term evolution) is introduced
OFDMA is adopted instead of CDMA
Max DL rate: 50Mbps, Max UL rate: 100Mbps (with 20MHz bandwidth)

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

symbol modulated
bit chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Signal Decoding Despreading Demodulation
& Deinterleaving

Receiver

z Source coding can increase the transmitting efficiency.

z Channel coding can make the transmission more reliable.

z Spreading can increase the capability of overcoming interference.

z Through the modulation, the signals will transfer to radio signals from digital signals.

z Bit, Symbol, Chip

Bit : data after source coding

Symbol: data after channel coding and interleaving

Chip: data after spreading

WCDMA Source Coding
z AMR (Adaptive Multi-Rate)
CODEC Bit Rate (kbps)
Speech
AMR_12.20 12.2 (GSM EFR)
A integrated speech codec with 8
AMR_10.20 10.2
source rates
AMR_7.95 7.95
The AMR bit rates can be controlled
AMR_7.40 7.4 (TDMA EFR)
by the RAN depending on the system
load and quality of the speech AMR_6.70 6.7 (PDC EFR)

connections AMR_5.90 5.9

z Video Phone Service AMR_5.15 5.15

AMR_4.75 4.75
H.324 is used for VP Service in CS
domain
Includes: video codec, speech codec,
data protocols, multiplexing and etc.
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22

z AMR is compatible with current mobile communication system (GSM, IS-95, PDC and
so on), thus, it will make multi-mode terminal design easier.

z The AMR codec offers the possibility to adapt the coding scheme to the radio channel
conditions. The most robust codec mode is selected in bad propagation conditions.
The codec mode providing the highest source rate is selected in good propagation
conditions.

z During an AMR communication, the receiver measures the radio link quality and must
return to the transmitter either the quality measurements or the actual codec mode the
transmitter should use during the next frame. That exchange has to be done as fast
as possible in order to better follow the evolution of the channels quality.
Processing Procedure of WCDMA System
Transmitter

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

symbol modulated
bit chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Signal Decoding Despreading Demodulation
& Deinterleaving

Receiver

z Source coding can increase the transmitting efficiency.

z Channel coding can make the transmission more reliable.

z Spreading can increase the capability of overcoming interference.

z Scrambling can make transmission in security.

z Through the modulation, the signals will transfer to radio signals from digital signals.

z Bit, Symbol, Chip

Bit : data after source coding

Symbol: data after channel coding and interleaving

Chip: data after spreading

WCDMA Block Coding - CRC
z Block coding is used to detect if there are any uncorrected
errors left after error correction.

z The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is a common method of

block coding.

z Adding the CRC bits is done before the channel encoding

and they are checked after the channel decoding.

z During the transmission, there are many interferences and fading. To guarantee
reliable transmission, system should overcome these influence through the channel
coding which includes block coding, channel coding and interleaving.

z Block coding: The encoder adds some redundant bits to the block of bits and the
decoder uses them to determine whether an error has occurred during the
transmission. This is used to calculate Block Error Ratio (BLER) used in the outer
loop power control.

z The CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used for error checking of the transport
blocks at the receiving end. The CRC length that can be inserted has four different
values: 0, 8, 12, 16 and 24 bits. The more bits the CRC contains, the lower is the
probability of an undetected error in the transport block in the receiver.

z Note that certain types of block codes can also be used for error correction, although
these are not used in WCDMA.
WCDMA Channel Coding
z Effect
Enhance the correlation among symbols so as to recover the signal when
interference occurs
Provides better error correction at receiver, but brings increment of the delay

z Types
No Coding
Convolutional Coding (1/2, 1/3)
Turbo Coding (1/3)
No Coding Uncoded N bits

1/2 Convolutional
Coded 2N+16 bits
Coding
Code Block
of N Bits 1/3 Convolutional Coded 3N+24 bits
Coding

1/3 Turbo Coding Coded 3N+12 bits

z UTRAN employs two FEC schemes: convolutional codes and turbo codes. The idea
is to add redundancy to the transmitted bit stream, sO that occasional bit errors can
be corrected in the receiving entity.
z The first is convolution that is used for anti-interference. Through the technology,
many redundant bits will be inserted in original information. When error code is
caused by interference, the redundant bits can be used to recover the original
information. Convolutional codes are typically used when the timing constraints are
tight. The coded data must contain enough redundant information to make it possible
to correct some of the detected errors without asking for repeats.
z Turbo codes are found to be very efficient because they can perform close to the
theoretical limit set by the Shannons Law. Their efficiency is best with high data rate
services, but poor on low rate services. At higher bit rates, turbo coding is more
efficient than convolutional coding.
z In WCDMA network, both Convolution code and Turbo code are used. Convolution
code applies to voice service while Turbo code applies to high rate data service.
z Note that both block codes and channel codes are used in the UTRAN. The idea
behind this arrangement is that the channel decoder (either a convolutional or turbo
decoder) tries to correct as many errors as possible, and then the block decoder
(CRC check) offers its judgment on whether the resulting information is good enough
to be used in the higher layers.
WCDMA Interleaving
z Effect
Interleaving is used to reduce the probability of consecutive bits error

Longer interleaving periods have better data protection with more delay
Input bits
0010000 ... 10111

0 0 1 0
0 0 0 ... Interleaving periods:

... ... ... ... 20, 40, or 80 ms

... ... ... 1
0 1 1 1

0 1 0 0
0 0 0 ...
000101001011 Output bits
Inter-column
permutation ... ... ... ...

... ... ... 1
0 1 1 1

z Channel coding works well against random errors, but it is quite vulnerable to bursts
of errors, which are typical in mobile radio systems. The especially fast moving UE in
CDMA systems can cause consecutive errors if the power control is not fast enough
to manage the interference. Most coding schemes perform better on random data
errors than on blocks of errors. This problem can be eased with interleaving, which
spreads the erroneous bits over a longer period of time. By interleaving, no two
adjacent bits are transmitted near to each other, and the data errors are randomized.

z The longer the interleaving period, the better the protection provided by the time
diversity. However, longer interleaving increases transmission delays and a balance
must be found between the error resistance capabilities and the delay introduced.
Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

symbol modulated
bit chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Signal Decoding Despreading Demodulation
& Deinterleaving

Receiver

z Source coding can increase the transmitting efficiency.

z Channel coding can make the transmission more reliable.

z Spreading can increase the capability of overcoming interference.

z Scrambling can make transmission in security.

z Through the modulation, the signals will transfer to radio signals from digital signals.

z Bit, Symbol, Chip

Bit : data after source coding

Symbol: data after channel coding and interleaving

Chip: data after spreading

Correlation
z Correlation measures similarity between any two arbitrary signals.

z Identical and Orthogonal signals:

+1
C1 -1 1 -1 1
-1
Correlation = 1
+1
C2 -1 1 -1 1
Identical signals
-1
+1 1 1 1 1

+1
C1 -1 1 -1 1
-1 Correlation = 0
+1 1 1 1 1
C2 Orthogonal signals
+1
-1 1 -1 1
-1

z Correlation is used to measure similarity of any two arbitrary signals. It is computed

by multiplying the two signals and then summing (integrating) the result over a
defined time windows. The two signals of figure (a) are identical and therefore their
correlation is 1 or 100 percent. In figure (b) , however, the two signals are
uncorrelated, and therefore knowing one of them does not provide any information on
the other.
Orthogonal Code Usage - Coding

UE1:
UE1:
11
11

UE2:
UE2: 1
1 1
1

CC11::
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
CC22:: 1
11
11
11
1 1
11
11
11
1

UE1c1
UE1 c1

11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
UE2c2
UE2c2 1
11
11
11
1 1
11
11
11
1

UE1c1
UE1 c1 UE2c2
UE2 c2

22 00
22 00
22 00
22 00

z By spreading, each symbol is multiplied with all the chips in the orthogonal sequence
assigned to the user. The resulting sequence is processed and is then transmitted
over the physical channel along with other spread symbols. In this figure, 4-digit
codes are used. The product of the user symbols and the spreading code is a
sequence of digits that must be transmitted at 4 times the rate of the original encoded
binary signal.
Orthogonal Code Usage - Decoding

UE1CC11
UE1 UE2CC22::
UE2
22 00
22 00
22 00
22 00

UE1
UE1Dispreading
Dispreadingby
byc1:
c1:
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
11
Dispreading
Dispreadingresult:
result:
22 00
22 00
22 00
22 00
Integral
Integraljudgment:
judgment: (means
44(means 1)
1) (means
44(means 1)
1)

UE2
UE2Dispreading
Dispreadingby
byc2:
c2: 1
11
1 1
11
1 1
11
1 1
11
1
Dispreading
Dispreadingresult:
result: 2
2 00 2
2 00 2
2 00 2
2 00
Integral
Integraljudgment:
judgment: 4 (means1) 4
4(means1) 4(means1)
(means1)

z The receiver dispreads the chips by using the same code used in the transmitter.
Notice that under no-noise conditions, the symbols or digits are completely recovered
without any error. In reality, the channel is not noise-free, but CDMA system employ
Forward Error Correction techniques to combat the effects of noise and enhance the
performance of the system.

z When the wrong code is used for dispreading, the resulting correlation yields an
average of zero. This is a clear demonstration of the advantage of the orthogonal
property of the codes. Whether the wrong code is mistakenly used by the target user
or other users attempting to decode the received signal, the resulting correlation is
always zero because of the orthogonal property of codes.
Spectrum Analysis of Spreading & Dispreading
P(f) Spreading code

P(f)

f f
P(f)
Narrowband signal Broadband signal

Noise & Other Signal

Recovered signal Noise+Broadband signal

Signal
P(f) Combination P(f)

f Spreading code f

z Traditional radio communication systems transmit data using the minimum bandwidth
required to carry it as a narrowband signal. CDMA system mix their input data with a
fast spreading sequence and transmit a wideband signal. The spreading sequence is
independently regenerated at the receiver and mixed with the incoming wideband
signal to recover the original data. The dispreading gives substantial gain proportional
to the bandwidth of the spread-spectrum signal. The gain can be used to increase
system performance and range, or allow multiple coded users, or both. A digital bit
stream sent over a radio link requires a definite bandwidth to be successfully
transmitted and received.
Spectrum Analysis of Spreading & Dispreading

Eb / No = Ec / No PG

Power

Ebit
Eb/No
Requiremen
t
Max allowed interference

Processing Gain Max interference caused

by UE and others

Interference from
other UE
Echip

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page32
Process Gain
z Process Gain
chip rate
Pr ocess Gain = 10 log( )
bit rate

Process gain differs for each service.

If the service bit rate is greater, the process gain is smaller, UE
needs more power for this service, then the coverage of this
service will be smaller, vice versa.

z For common services, the bit rate of voice call is 12.2kbps, the bit rate of video phone
is 64kbps, and the highest packet service bit rate is 384kbps(R99). After the
spreading, the chip rate of different service all become 3.84Mcps.
Spreading Technology
z Spreading consists of 2 steps:
Channelization operation, which transforms data symbols into chips

Scrambling operation is applied to the spreading signal

Data Chips after

symbol spreading

channelization scrambling

z Spreading means increasing the bandwidth of the signal beyond the bandwidth
normally required to accommodate the information. The spreading process in UTRAN
consists of two separate operations: channelization and scrambling.

z The first operation is the channelization operation, which transforms every data
symbol into a number of chips, thus increasing the bandwidth of the signal. The
number of chips per data symbol is called the Spreading Factor (SF). Channelization
codes are orthogonal codes, meaning that in ideal environment they do not interfere
each other.

z The second operation is the scrambling operation. Scrambling is used on top of

spreading, so it does not change the signal bandwidth but only makes the signals
from different sources separable from each other. As the chip rate is already achieved
in channelization by the channelization codes, the chip rate is not affected by the
scrambling.
WCDMA Channelization Code
z OVSF Code (Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor) is used as
channelization code

Cch,8,0 = (1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1)
Cch,4,0 = (1,1,1,1)
Cch,8,1 = (1,1,1,1,-1,-1,-1,-1)
Cch,2,0 = (1,1)
Cch,8,2 = (1,1,-1,-1,1,1,-1,-1)
Cch,4,1 = (1,1,-1,-1)

Cch,1,0 = (1) Cch,8,3 = (1,1,-1,-1,-1,-1,1,1)

Cch,8,4 = (1,-1,1,-1,1,-1,1,-1)
Cch,4,2 = (1,-1,1,-1)

Cch,2,1 = (1, -1) Cch,8,5 = (1,-1,1,-1,-1,1,-1,1)

Cch,4,3 = (1,-1,-1,1) Cch,8,6 = (1,-1,-1,1,1,-1,-1,1)

Cch,8,7 = (1,-1,-1,1,-1,1,1,-1)
SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4 SF = 8

z Orthogonal codes are easily generated by starting with a seed of 1, repeating the 1
horizontally and vertically, and then complementing the -1 diagonally. This process is
to be continued with the newly generated block until the desired codes with the proper
length are generated. Sequences created in this way are referred as Walsh code.

z Channelization uses OVSF code, for keeping the orthogonality of different subscriber
physical channels. OVSF can be defined as the code tree illustrated in the following
diagram.

z Channelization code is defined as Cch SF, k,, where, SF is the spreading factor of the
code, and k is the sequence of code, 0kSF-1. Each level definition length of code
tree is SF channelization code, and the left most value of each spreading code
character is corresponding to the chip which is transmitted earliest.
WCDMA Channelization Code
z SF = chip rate / symbol rate
High data rates low SF code

Low data rates high SF code

Radio bearer SF Radio bearer SF

Speech 12.2 UL 64 Speech 12.2 DL 128

Data 64 kbps UL 16 Data 64 kbps DL 32

Data 128 kbps UL 8 Data 128 kbps DL 16

Data 144 kbps UL 8 Data 144 kbps DL 16

Data 384 kbps UL 4 Data 384 kbps DL 8

z The channelization codes are Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF)

codes. They are used to preserve orthogonality between different physical channels.
They also increase the clock rate to 3.84 Mcps. The OVSF codes are defined using a
code tree.
z In the code tree, the channelization codes are individually described by Cch,SF,k, where
SF is the Spreading Factor of the code and k the code number, 0 k SF-1.
z A channelization sequence modulates one users bit. Because the chip rate is
constant, the different lengths of codes enable to have different user data rates. Low
SFs are reserved for high rate services while high SFs are for low rate services.
z The length of an OVSF code is an even number of chips and the number of codes (for
one SF) is equal to the number of chips and to the SF value.
z The generated codes within the same layer constitute a set of orthogonal codes.
Furthermore, any two codes of different layers are orthogonal except when one of the
two codes is a mother code of the other. For example C4,3 is not orthogonal with C1,0
and C2,1, but is orthogonal with C2,0.
z SF in uplink is from 4 to 256.
z SF in downlink is from 4 to 512.
Purpose of Channelization Code
z Channelization code is used to distinguish different physical
channels of one transmitter
For downlink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to
separate different physical channels of one cell

For uplink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to

separate different physical channels of one UE

z For voice service (AMR), downlink SF is 128, it means there are 128 voice services
maximum can be supported in one WCDMA carrier;

z For Video Phone (64k packet data) service, downlink SF is 32, it means there are 32
voice services maximum can be supported in one WCDMA carrier.
Purpose of Scrambling Code
z Scrambling code is used to distinguish different transmitters
For downlink, scrambling code is used to separate different
cells in one carrier

For uplink, scrambling code is used to separate different UEs

in one carrier

z In addition to spreading, part of the process in the transmitter is the scrambling

operation. This is needed to separate terminals or base stations from each other.
Scrambling Code
z Scrambling code: GOLD sequence.

z There are 224 long uplink scrambling codes which are used for
scrambling of the uplink signals. Uplink scrambling codes are
assigned by RNC.

z For downlink, 512 primary scrambling codes are used.

z Different scrambling codes will be planned to different cells in downlink.

z Different scrambling codes will be allocated to different UEs in uplink.

z The scrambling code is always applied to one 10 ms frame.

z In UMTS, Gold codes are chosen for their very low peak cross-correlation.
Primary Scrambling Code Group
Primary
scrambling code 0

Group 0 Primary
scrambling code 1

Primary
scrambling Group 1
codes for
downlink Primary
physical scrambling code 8
channels
Primary
scrambling code
Group 63 8*63

Primary
scrambling code
64 primary 8*63 +7
512 primary
scrambling scrambling code Each group consists of 8
codes groups primary scrambling codes

z There are totally 512 primary scrambling codes defined by 3GPP. They are further
divided into 64 primary scrambling code groups. There are 8 primary scrambling
codes in every group. Each cell is allocated with only one primary scrambling code.
Code Multiplexing
z Downlink Transmission on a Cell Level

Scrambling code

Channelization code 1 NodeB

User 1 signal

Channelization code 2

User 2 signal
Channelization code 3

User 3 signal

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
Code Multiplexing
z Uplink Transmission on a Cell Level
Scrambling code 1
Channelization code
User 1 signal

Scrambling code 2
Channelization code
User 2 signal NodeB

Scrambling code 3
Channelization code
User 3 signal

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

symbol modulated
bit chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Signal Decoding Despreading Demodulation
& Deinterleaving

Receiver

z Source coding can increase the transmitting efficiency.

z Channel coding can make the transmission more reliable.

z Spreading can increase the capability of overcoming interference.

z Scrambling can make transmission in security.

z Through the modulation, the signals will transfer to radio signals from digital signals.

z Bit, Symbol, Chip

Bit : data after source coding

Symbol: data after channel coding and interleaving

Chip: data after spreading

Modulation Overview
Data to be transmitted:
Digital Input 1 0 1 0
time
Basic steady radio
wave:
carrier = A.cos(2Ft+)

Amplitude Shift
Keying:
A.cos(2Ft+)

Frequency Shift
Keying:
A.cos(2Ft+)

Phase Shift Keying:

A.cos(2Ft+)

z A data-modulation scheme defines how the data bits are mixed with the carrier signal,
which is always a sine wave. There are three basic ways to modulate a carrier signal
in a digital sense: amplitude shift keying (ASK), frequency shift keying (FSK), and
phase shift keying (PSK).

z In ASK the amplitude of the carrier signal is modified by the digital signal.

z In FSK the frequency of the carrier signal is modified by the digital signal.

z The PSK family is the most widely used modulation scheme in modern cellular
systems. There are many variants in this family, and only a few of them are
mentioned here.
Modulation Overview
z Digital Modulation - BPSK

1 0 1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Information t
signal
Digital Input
NRZ coding
1

t
-1

High Frequency
Carrier
fo
Carrier

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Modulated
BPSK Waveform
=0 = =0 BPSK BPSK
signal

z In binary phase shift keying (BPSK) modulation, each data bit is transformed into a
separate data symbol. The mapping rule is 1 > + 1 and 0 > 1. There are only
two possible phase shifts in BPSK, 0 and radians.

z NRZ means none return zero.

Modulation Overview
z Digital Modulation - QPSK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NRZ Input 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1

I di-Bit Stream 1 -1 -1 1 -1

Q di-Bit Stream 1 1 1 -1 -1

I
Component

Q
Component

QPSK Waveform

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

z The quadrature phase shift keying (QPSK) modulation has four phases: 0, /2, , and
3/2 radians. Two data bits are transformed into one complex data symbol; A symbol
is any change (keying) of the carrier.
Modulation Overview
A Acos(ot)
I(t)
NRZ
coding

fo
QPSK
90o

NRZ Q(t)
coding
A Acos(ot + /2)

QPSK : A 2 cos( o + )

1 1 /4
1 -1 7/4
-1 1 3/4
-1 -1 5/4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

QPSK Waveform

1,1 -1,1 -1,1

1,-1 -1,-1

NRZ Output 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page48
WCDMA Modulation
z Different modulation methods corresponding to different
transmitting abilities in air interface

R99/R4: QPSK HSDPA: QPSK or 16QAM

z The UTRAN air interface uses QPSK modulation in the downlink, although HSDPA
may also employ 16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16QAM). 16QAM requires
good radio conditions to work well. As seen, with 16QAM also the amplitude of the
signal matters.

z As explained, in QPSK one symbol carries two data bits; in 16QAM each symbol
includes four bits. Thus, a QPSK system with a chip rate of 3.84Mcps could
theoretically transfer 2 3.84 = 7.68 Mbps, and a 16QAM system could transfer 4
3.84 Mbps = 15.36 Mbps. In 3GPP also the usage of 64QAM with HSDPA has been
studied.
Processing Procedure of WCDMA System
Transmitter

Service Source Channel

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding Coding

symbol modulated
bit chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Reception

Signal Decoding Despreading Demodulation
Decoding

Receiver

z Source coding can increase the transmitting efficiency.

z Channel coding can make the transmission more reliable.

z Spreading can increase the capability of overcoming interference.

z Scrambling can make transmission in security.

z Through the modulation, the signals will transfer to radio signals from digital signals.

z Bit, Symbol, Chip

Bit : data after source coding

Symbol: data after channel coding and interleaving

Chip: data after spreading

Wireless Propagation
Transmitted
Signal

Transmission Loss:
Amplitude
Path Loss + Multi-path Fading

Received
Signal

Time

z A mobile communication channel is a multi-path fading channel and any transmitted

signal reaches a receive end by means of multiple transmission paths, such as direct
transmission, reflection, scatter, etc.
Propagation of Radio Signal
Signal at Transmitter
20
15
10
5
dBm

0
-5
-10
-15
-20

Signal at Receiver
0
-5
-10
-15
dB

-20
-25
-30
-35 Fading
-40

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page52
Fading Categories
z Fading Categories
Slow Fading
Fast Fading

z Furthermore, with the moving of a mobile station, the signal amplitude, delay and
phase on various transmission paths vary with time and place. Therefore, the levels of
received signals are fluctuating and unstable and these multi-path signals, if overlaid,
will lead to fast fading. Fast fading conforms to Rayleigh distribution. The mid-value
field strength of fast fading has relatively gentle change and is called slow fading.
Slow fading conforms to lognormal distribution.
Diversity Technique
z Diversity technique is used to obtain uncorrelated signals for
combining
Reduce the effects of fading
Fast fading caused by multi-path
Slow fading caused by shadowing
Improve the reliability of communication
Increase the coverage and capacity

z Diversity technology means that after receiving two or more input signals with
mutually uncorrelated fading at the same time, the system demodulates these signals
and adds them up. Thus, the system can receive more useful signals and overcome
fading.
Diversity
z Time diversity
Channel coding, Block interleaving

z Frequency diversity
The user signal is distributed on the whole bandwidth
frequency spectrum

z Space diversity

z Polarization diversity

z Diversity technology is an effective way to overcome overlaid fading. Because it can

be selected in terms of frequency, time and space, diversity technology includes
frequency diversity, time diversity and space diversity.

z Time diversity: Channel coding

z Frequency diversity: WCDMA is a kind of frequency diversity. The signal energy is

distributed on the whole bandwidth.

z Space diversity: using two antennas

Principle of RAKE Receiver

Correlator 1

The
Correlator 2 Combiner combined
signal
Receive set
Correlator 3

Searcher correlator Calculate the

time delay and
signal strength
s(t) s(t)

t t

RAKE receiver help to overcome on the multi-path fading and enhance the receive
performance of the system

z The RAKE receiver is a technique which uses several baseband correlators to

individually process multipath signal components. The outputs from the different
correlators are combined to achieve improved reliability and performance.

z When WCDMA system is designed for cellular system, the inherent wide-bandwidth
signals with their orthogonal Walsh functions were natural for implementing a RAKE
receiver. In WCDMA system, the bandwidth is wider than the coherence bandwidth of
the cellular. Thus, when the multi-path components are resolved in the receiver, the
signals from different paths are uncorrelated with each other. The receiver can then
combine them using some combining schemes. So with RAKE receiver WCDMA
system can use the multi-path characteristics of the channel to get signal with better
quality.
Summary
z In this course, we have discussed basic concepts of WCDMA:
Spreading / Despreading principle

UTRAN Voice Coding

UTRAN Channel Coding

UTRAN Spreading Code

UTRAN Scrambling Code

UTRAN Modulation

UTRAN Transmission/Receiving

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page57
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA Radio
Interface Physical Layer

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Foreword
z The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers.

z The physical layer is expected to perform the following functions in

order to provide the data transport service, for example: spreading,
modulation and demodulation, despreading, Inner-loop power
control and etc.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page1
Objectives
z Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Outline radio interface protocol Architecture

Describe structure and functions of different physical channels

Describe UMTS physical layer procedures

2. Physical Channels

3. Physical Layer Procedure

2. Physical Channels

3. Physical Layer Procedure

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page4
UTRAN Network Structure
Core Network
CN CS PS CS PS
Iu-CS Iu-PS Iu-CS Iu-PS
RNS RNS
Iur
RNC RNC
UTRAN
Iub Iub Iub Iub

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Uu
UE
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page5

z UTRAN: UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network.

z The UTRAN consists of a set of Radio Network Subsystems connected to the Core
Network through the Iu interface.

z A RNS consists of a Radio Network Controller and one or more NodeBs. A NodeB is
connected to the RNC through the Iub interface.

z Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the RNS can be interconnected together through the
Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over direct physical
connection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable transport network.
Uu Interface Protocol Structure
GC Nt DC

Duplication avoidance
GC Nt DC
C-plane signaling UuS boundary
U-plane information

control
RRC L3
control

control

control
control radio bearer

PDCP PDCP L2/PDCP

BMC L2/BMC

RLC RLC L2/RLC

RLC RLC
RLC RLC
RLC RLC
logical channel

MAC L2/MAC
transport channel
PHY L1

z The layer 2 protocol is responsible for providing functions such as mapping, ciphering,
retransmission and segmentation. It is made of four sub-layers: MAC (Medium
Access Control), RLC (Radio Link Control), PDCP (Packet Data Convergence
Protocol) and BMC (Broadcast/Multicast Control).

z The layer 3 is split into 2 parts: the access stratum and the non access stratum. The
access stratum part is made of RRC (Radio Resource Control) entity and
duplication avoidance entity. duplication avoidance terminates in the CN but is part
of the Access Stratum. The higher layer signalling such as Mobility Management (MM)
and Call Control (CC) is assumed to belong to the non-access stratum, and therefore
not in the scope of 3GPP TSG RAN. In the C-plane, the interface between 'Duplication
avoidance' and higher L3 sub-layers (CC, MM) is defined by the General Control (GC),
Notification (Nt) and Dedicated Control (DC) SAPs.

z Not shown on the figure are connections between RRC and all the other protocol
layers (RLC, MAC, PDCP, BMC and L1), which provide local inter-layer control
services.

z The protocol layers are located in the UE and the peer entities are in the NodeB or the
RNC.
z Many functions are managed by the RRC layer. Here is the list of the most important:

Establishment, re-establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC

connection between the UE and UTRAN: it includes an optional cell re-
selection, an admission control, and a layer 2 signaling link establishment.
When a RNC is in charge of a specific connection towards a UE, it acts as the
Serving RNC.

Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers: a number of

Radio Bearers can be established for a UE at the same time. These bearers are
configured depending on the requested QoS. The RNC is also in charge of
ensuring that the requested QoS can be met.

Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC

connection: it handles the assignment of radio resources (e.g. codes, shared
channels). RRC communicates with the UE to indicate new resources allocation
when handovers are managed.

Paging/Notification: it broadcasts paging information from network to UEs.

Broadcasting of information provided by the non-access stratum (Core

Network) or access Stratum. This corresponds to system information regularly
repeated.

UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting: RRC indicates

what to measure, when and how to report.

Outer loop power control: controls setting of the target values.

Control of ciphering: provides procedures for setting of ciphering.

z The RRC layer is defined in the 25.331 specification from 3GPP.

z The RLCs main function is the transfer of data from either the user or the control
plane over the Radio interface. Two different transfer modes are used: transparent
and non-transparent. In non-transparent mode, 2 sub-modes are used:
acknowledged or unacknowledged.

z RLC provides services to upper layers:

data transfer (transparent, acknowledged and unacknowledged modes).

QoS setting: the retransmission protocol (for AM only) shall be configurable by

layer 3 to provide different QoS.

notification of unrecoverable errors: RLC notifies the upper layers of errors

that cannot be resolved by RLC.

z The RLC functions are:

mapping between higher layer PDUs and logical channels.

ciphering: prevents unauthorized acquisition of data; performed in RLC layer

for non-transparent RLC mode.

segmentation/reassembly: this function performs segmentation/reassembly of

variable-length higher layer PDUs into/from smaller RLC Payload Units. The
RLC size is adjustable to the actual set of transport formats (decided when
service is established). Concatenation and padding may also be used.

error correction: done by retransmission (acknowledged data transfer mode

only).

flow control: allows the RLC receiver to control the rate at which the peer RLC
transmitting entity may send information.
z MAC services include:

Data transfer: service providing unacknowledged transfer of MAC SDUs

between peer MAC entities.

Reallocation of radio resources and MAC parameters: reconfiguration of

MAC functions such as change of identity of UE. Requested by the RRC layer.

Reporting of measurements: local measurements such as traffic volume and

quality indication are reported to the RRC layer.

z The functions accomplished by the MAC sub-layer are listed above. Heres a quick
explanation for some of them:

Priority handling between the data flows of one UE: since UMTS is
multimedia, a user may activate several services at the same time, having
possibly different profiles (priority, QoS parameters...). Priority handling
consists in setting the right transport format for a high bit rate service and for a
low bit rate service.

Priority handling between UEs: use for efficient spectrum resources utilization
for bursty transfers on common and shared channels.

Ciphering: to prevent unauthorized acquisition of data. Performed in the MAC

layer for transparent RLC mode.

Access Service Class (ACS) selection for RACH transmission: the RACH
resources are divided between different ACSs in order to provide different
priorities on a random access procedure.
z PDCP

UMTS supports several network layer protocols providing protocol transparency

for the users of the service.

Using these protocols (and new ones) shall be possible without any changes to
UTRAN protocols. In order to perform this requirement, the PDCP layer has
been introduced. Then, functions related to transfer of packets from higher
layers shall be carried out in a transparent way by the UTRAN network entities.

PDCP shall also be responsible for implementing different kinds of optimization

methods. The currently known methods are standardized IETF (Internet
Engineering Task Force) header compression algorithms.

Algorithm types and their parameters are negotiated by RRC and indicated to
PDCP.

Header compression and decompression are specific for each network layer
protocol type.

In order to know which compression method is used, an identifier (PID: Packet

Identifier) is inserted. Compression algorithms exist for TCP/IP, RTP/UDP/IP,

Another function of PDCP is to provide numbering of PDUs. This is done if

lossless SRNS relocation is required.

To accomplish this function, each PDCP-SDUs (UL and DL) is buffered and
numbered. Numbering is done after header compression. SDUs are kept until
information of successful transmission of PDCP-PDU has been received from
RLC. PDCP sequence number ranges from 0 to 65,535.
z BMC (broadcast/multicast control protocol)

The main function of BMC protocol are:

Storage of cell broadcast message. the BMC in RNC stores the cell
broadcast message received over the CBC-RNC interface for scheduled
transmission.

Traffic volume monitoring and radio resource request for CBS. On the
UTRAN side, the BMC calculates the required transmission rate for the cell
broadcast service based on the messages received over the CBC-RNC
interface, and requests appropriate .CTCH/FACH resources from from RRC

Scheduling of BMC message. The BMC receives scheduling information

together with each cell broadcast message over the CBC-RNC interface. Based
on this scheduling information, on the UTRAN side the BMC generates schedule
message and schedules BMC message sequences accordingly. On the UE
side ,the BMC evaluates the schedule messages and indicates scheduling
parameters to RRC, which are used by RRC to configure the lower layers for
CBS discontinuous reception.

Transmission of BMC message to UE. The function transmits the BMC

messages according to the schedule

Delivery of cell broadcast messages to the upper layer. This UE function

delivers the received non-corrupted cell broadcast messages to the upper layer
z The layer 1 (physical layer) is used to transmit information under the form of
electrical signals corresponding to bits, between the network and the mobile user.
This information can be voice, circuit or packet data, and network signaling.

z The UMTS layer 1 offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these
services is through the use of transport channels via the MAC sub-layer.

z These services are provided by radio links which are established by signaling
procedures. These links are managed by the layer 1 management entity. One radio
link is made of one or several transport channels, and one physical channel.

z The UMTS layer 1 is divided into two sub-layers: the transport and the physical sub-
layers. All the processing (channel coding, interleaving, etc.) is done by the transport
sub-layer in order to provide different services and their associated QoS. The physical
sub-layer is responsible for the modulation, which corresponds to the association of
bits (coming from the transport sub-layer) to electrical signals that can be carried over
the air interface. The spreading operation is also done by the physical sub-layer.

z These two parts of layer 1 are controlled by the layer 1 management (L1M) entity. It is
made of several units located in each equipment, which exchange information through
the use of control channels.
RAB, RB and RL

RAB

RB
RNC CN
UE
RL
NodeB

UTRAN

z RAB: The service that the access stratum provides to the non-access stratum for
transfer of user data between User Equipment and CN.
z RB: The service provided by the layer 2 for transfer of user data between User
Equipment and Serving RNC.
z RL: A "radio link" is a logical association between single User Equipment and a single
UTRAN access point. Its physical realization comprises one or more radio bearer
transmissions.
Contents
1. Physical Layer Overview

2. Physical Channels

3. Physical Layer Procedure

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page14
Contents
2. Physical Channels
2.1 Physical Channel Structure and Functions

2.2 Channel Mapping

z Logical Channel = information container

Defined by <What type of information> is transferred

z Transport Channel = characteristics of transmission

Described by <How> and with <What characteristics> data
is transmitted over the radio interface

z Physical Channel = specification of the information global

content
providing the real transmission resource, maybe a frequency ,
a specific set of codes and phase

z In terms of protocol layer, the WCDMA radio interface has three types of channels:
physical channel, transport channel and logical channel.

z Logical channel: Carrying user services directly. According to the types of the carried
services, it is divided into two types: control channel and service channel.

z Transport channel: It is the interface between radio interface layer 2 and layer 1, and it
is the service provided for MAC layer by the physical layer. According to whether the
information transported is dedicated information for a user or common information for
all users, it is divided into dedicated channel and common channel.

z Physical channel: It is the ultimate embodiment of all kinds of information when they
are transmitted on radio interface. Each channel which uses dedicated carrier
frequency, code (spreading code and scramble) and carrier phase (I or Q) can be
regarded as a physical channel.
Logical Channel

Dedicated traffic channel (DTCH)

Common traffic channel (CTCH) Traffic channel

Broadcast control channel (BCCH)

Paging control channel (PCCH)
Dedicate control channel (DCCH) Control channel

Common control channel (CCCH)

z As in GSM, UMTS uses the concept of logical channels.

z A logical channel is characterized by the type of information that is transferred.
z As in GSM, logical channels can be divided into two groups: control channels for
control plane information and traffic channel for user plane information.
z The traffic channels are:
Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH): a point-to-point bi-directional channel,
that transmits dedicated user information between a UE and the network. That
information can be speech, circuit switched data or packet switched data. The
payload bits on this channel come from a higher layer application (the AMR
codec for example). Control bits can be added by the RLC (protocol information)
in case of a non transparent transfer. The MAC sub-layer will also add a header
to the RLC PDU.
Common Traffic Channel (CTCH): a point-to-multipoint downlink channel
for transfer of dedicated user information for all or a group of specified UEs.
This channel is used to broadcast BMC messages. These messages can either
be cell broadcast data from higher layers or schedule messages for support of
Discontinuous Reception (DRX) of cell broadcast data at the UE. Cell broadcast
messages are services offered by the operator, like indication of weather, traffic,
location or rate information.
Logical Channel

Dedicated traffic channel (DTCH)

Common traffic channel (CTCH) Traffic channel

Broadcast control channel (BCCH)

Paging control channel (PCCH)
Dedicate control channel (DCCH) Control channel

Common control channel (CCCH)

z The control channels are:

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH): a downlink channel that broadcasts all system
information types (except type 14 that is only used in TDD). For example, system
information type 3 gives the cell identity. UEs decode system information on the BCH
except when in Cell_DCH mode. In that case, they can decode system information type
10 on the FACH and other important signaling is sent on a DCCH.
Paging Control Channel (PCCH): a downlink channel that transfers paging
information. It is used to reach a UE (or several UEs) in idle mode or in connected mode
(Cell_PCH or URA_PCH state). The paging type 1 message is sent on the PCCH.
When a UE receives a page on the PCCH in connected mode, it shall enter Cell_FACH
state and make a cell update procedure.
Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH): a point-to-point bi-directional channel that
transmits dedicated control information between a UE and the network. This channel is
used for dedicated signaling after a RRC connection has been done. For example, it is
used for inter-frequency handover procedure, for dedicated paging, for the active set
update procedure and for the control and report of measurements.
Common Control Channel (CCCH): a bi-directional channel for transmitting control
information between network and UEs. It is used to send messages related to RRC
connection, cell update and URA update. This channel is a bit like the DCCH, but will be
used when the UE has not yet been identified by the network (or by the new cell). For
example, it is used to send the RRC connection request message, which is the first
message sent by the UE to get into connected mode. The network will respond on the
same channel, and will send him its temporary identities (cell and UTRAN identities).
After these initial messages, the DCCH will be used.
Transport Channel

Dedicated Channel (DCH) Dedicated transport

channel

Broadcast channel (BCH)

Forward access channel (FACH)
Paging channel (PCH) Common transport
Random access channel (RACH) channel
High-speed downlink shared channel
(HS-DSCH)

z In order to carry logical channels, several transport channels are defined. They are:
Broadcast Channel (BCH): a downlink channel used for broadcast of system
information into the entire cell.
Paging Channel (PCH): a downlink channel used for broadcast of control
information into the entire cell, such as paging.
Random Access Channel (RACH): a contention based uplink channel used
for initial access or for transmission of relatively small amounts of data (non
real-time dedicated control or traffic data).
Forward Access Channel (FACH): a common downlink channel used for
dedicated signaling (answer to a RACH typically), or for transmission of
relatively small amounts of data.
Dedicated Channel (DCH): a channel dedicated to one UE used in uplink or
downlink.
Physical Channel
z A physical channel is defined by a specific carrier frequency, code
(scrambling code, spreading code) and relative phase.
z In UMTS system, the different code (scrambling code or spreading
code) can distinguish the channels.
z Most channels consist of radio frames and time slots, and each
radio frame consists of 15 time slots.
z Two types of physical channel: UL and DL

Physical Channel

Frequency, Code, Phase

z Now we will begin to discuss the physical channel. Physical channel is the most
important and complex channel, and a physical channel is defined by a specific carrier
frequency, code and relative phase. In CDMA system, the different code (scrambling
code or spreading code) can distinguish the channel. Most channels consist of radio
frames and time slots, and each radio frame consists of 15 time slots. There are two
types of physical channel: UL and DL.
Downlink Physical Channel
z Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel (DL DPCH)

z Downlink Common Physical Channel

Primary Common Control Physical Channel (P-CCPCH)

Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)

Synchronization Channel (SCH)

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)

High-Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH)

High-Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)

z The different physical channels are:

Synchronization Channel (SCH): used for cell search procedure. There is the
primary and the secondary SCHs.
Common Control Physical Channel (CCPCH): used to carry common control
information such as the scrambling code used in DL (there is a primary CCPCH
and additional secondary CCPCH).
Common Pilot Channels (P-CPICH and S-CPICH): used for coherent
detection of common channels. They indicate the phase reference.
Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH): used to carry dedicated data
coming from layer 2 and above (coming from DCH).
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH): used to carry dedicated
control information generated in layer 1 (such as pilot, TPC and TFCI bits).
Page Indicator Channel (PICH): carries indication to inform the UE that paging
information is available on the S-CCPCH.
Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH): it is used to inform a UE that the
network has received its access request.
High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH): it is used to
carry subscribers BE service data (mapping on HSDPA) coming from layer 2.
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH): it is used to carry control
message to HS-PDSCH such as modulation scheme, UE ID etc.
Uplink Physical Channel

z Uplink Dedicated Physical Channel

Uplink Dedicated Physical Data Channel (Uplink DPDCH)

Uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (Uplink DPCCH)

High-Speed Dedicated Physical Channel (HS-DPCCH)

z Uplink Common Physical Channel

Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

z The different physical channels are:

Dedicated Physical Data Channel (DPDCH): used to carry dedicated data
coming from layer 2 and above (coming from DCH).
Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH): used to carry dedicated
control information generated in layer 1 (such as pilot, TPC and TFCI bits).
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH): used to carry random access
information when a UE wants to access the network.
High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH): it is used to
carry feedback message to HS-PDSCH such CQI,ACK/NACK.
Function of Physical Channel
Cell Search Channels
P-CPICH--Primary
P-CPICH--Primary Common
Common Pilot
Pilot Channel
Channel
SCH--Synchronisation
SCH--Synchronisation Channel
Channel
P-CCPCH-Primary
P-CCPCH-Primary Common
Common Control Physical Channel
Control Physical Channel

Paging Channels
PICH--Paging
PICH--Paging Indicator
Indicator Channel
Channel
SCCPCH--Secondary
SCCPCH--Secondary Common
Common Control
Control Physical
Physical Channel
Channel

Dedicated Channels
DPDCH--Dedicated
DPDCH--Dedicated Physical
Physical Data
Data Channel
Channel
DPCCH--Dedicated
DPCCH--Dedicated Physical
Physical Control
Control Channel
Channel

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page23
Synchronization Channels (P-SCH & S-
SCH)
z Used for cell search z Primary synchronization code is
z Two sub channels: P-SCH and S-SCH transmitted repeatedly in each time slot
z SCH is transmitted at the first 256 z Secondary synchronization code
chips of every time slot specifies the scrambling code groups of
the cell
Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #14

Primary ac p ac p ac p
SCH

Secondary acsi,14
SCH ac si,0 ac si,1

256 chips
2560 chips
One 10 ms SCH radio frame

z When a UE is turned on, the first thing it does is to scan the UMTS spectrum and find
a UMTS cell. After that, it has to find the primary scrambling code used by that cell in
order to be able to decode the BCCH (for system information). This is done with the
help of the Synchronization Channel.
z Each cell of a NodeB has its own SCH timing, so that there is no overlapping.
z The SCH is a pure downlink physical channel broadcasted over the entire cell. It is
transmitted unscrambled during the first 256 chips of each time slot, in time multiplex
with the P-CCPCH. It is the only channel that is not spread over the entire radio
frame. The SCH provides the primary scrambling code group (one out of 64 groups),
as well as the radio frame and time slot synchronization.
z The SCH consists of two sub-channels, the primary and secondary SCH. These sub-
channels are sent in parallel using code division during the first 256 chips of each time
slot. P-SCH always transmits primary synchronization code. S-SCH transmits
secondary synchronization codes.
z The primary synchronization code is repeated at the beginning of each time slot. The
same code is used by all the cells and enables the mobiles to detect the existence of
the UMTS cell and to synchronize itself on the time slot boundaries. This is normally
done with a single matched filter or any similar device. The slot timing of the cell is
obtained by detecting peaks in the matched filter output.
z This is the first step of the cell search procedure. The second step is done using the
secondary synchronization channel.
Secondary Synchronization Channel (S-SCH)
Scrambling slot number
Code Group #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14
Group 0 1 1 2 8 9 10 15 8 10 16 2 7 15 7 16
Group 1 1 1 5 16 7 3 14 16 3 10 5 12 14 12 10
Group 2 1 2 1 15 5 5 12 16 6 11 2 16 11 15 12
Group 3 1 2 3 1 8 6 5 2 5 8 4 4 6 3 7
Group 4 1 2 16 6 6 11 15 5 12 1 15 12 16 11 2

Group 61 9 10 13 10 11 15 15 9 16 12 14 13 16 14 11
Group 62 9 11 12 15 12 9 13 13 11 14 10 16 15 14 16
Group 63 9 12 10 15 13 14 9 14 15 11 11 13 12 16 10

Slot # ? Slot #? Slot #?

P-SCH acp acp acp
z ..
S-SCH 16 6 11 Group 2
Slot 7, 8, 9
256 chips

z The S-SCH also consists of a code, the Secondary Synchronization Code (SSC)
that indicates which of the 64 scrambling code groups the cells downlink scrambling
code belongs to. 16 different SSCs are defined. Each SSC is a 256 chip long
sequence.

z There is one specific SSC transmitted in each time slot, giving us a sequence of 15
SSCs. There is a total of 64 different sequences of 15 SSCs, corresponding to the 64
primary scrambling code groups. These 64 sequences are constructed so that one
sequence is different from any other one, and different from any rotated version of any
sequence. The UE correlates the received signal with the 16 SSCs and identifies the
maximum correlation value.

z The S-SCH provides the information required to find the frame boundaries and the
downlink scrambling code group (one out of 64 groups). The scrambling code (one
out of 8) can be determined afterwards by decoding the P-CPICH. The mobile will then
be able to decode the BCH.
Primary Common Pilot Channel (PCPICH)
z Primary PCPICH
Carrying pre-defined sequence
Fixed channel code: Cch, 256, 0, Fixed rate 30Kbps
Scrambled by the primary scrambling code
Broadcast over the entire cell
A phase reference for SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH and
downlink DPCH, Only one PCPICH per cell
Pre-defined symbol sequence

Tslot = 2560 chips , 20 bits

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot # i Slot #14

1 radio frame: Tr = 10 ms

z The Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) is a pure physical control channel broadcasted
over the entire cell. It is not linked to any transport channel. It consists of a sequence
of known bits that are transmitted in parallel with the primary and secondary CCPCH.
z The PCPICH is used by the mobile to determine which of the 8 possible primary
scrambling codes is used by the cell, and to provide the phase reference for common
channels.
z Finding the primary scrambling code is done during the cell search procedure through
a symbol-by-symbol correlation with all the codes within the code group. After the
primary scrambling code has been identified, the UE can decode system information
on the P-CCPCH.
z The P-CPICH is the phase reference for the SCH, P-CCPCH, AICH and PICH. It is
broadcasted over the entire cell. The channelization code used to spread the P-
CPICH is always Cch,256,0 (all ones). Thus, the P-CPICH is a fixed rate channel.
Also, it is always scrambled with the primary scrambling code of the cell.
Primary Common Control Physical Channel
(PCCPCH)
z Carrying BCH transport channel
z Fixed rate, fixed OVSF code (30kbpsCch, 256, 1)
z The PCCPCH is not transmitted during the first 256 chips of each
time slot
256 chips

PCCPCH Data
SCH
18 bits

T = 2560 chips,20 bits

slot

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

1 radio frame: T f = 10 ms

z The Primary Common Control Physical Channel (P-CCPCH) is a fixed rate

(SF=256) downlink physical channel used to carry the BCH transport channel. It is
broadcasted continuously over the entire cell like the P-CPICH.

z The figure above shows the frame structure of the P-CCPCH. The frame structure is
special because it does not contain any layer 1 control bits. The P-CCPCH only has
one fix predefined transport format combination, and the only bits transmitted are data
bits from the BCH transport channel. It is important to note that the P-CCPCH is not
transmitted during the first 256 chips of the slot. In fact, another physical channel
(SCH) is transmitted during that period of time. Thus, the SCH and the P-CCPCH are
time multiplexed on every time slot.

z Channelization code Cch,256,1 is always used to spread the P-CCPCH.

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)
z Carrying Paging Indicators (PI)
z Fixed rate (30kbps), SF = 256
z N paging indicators {PI0, , PIN-1} in each PICH frame, N=18, 36,
72, or 144

288 bits for paging indication 12 bits (undefined)

b0 b1 b 287 b 288 b 299

One radio frame (10 ms)

z The Page Indicator Channel (PICH) is a fixed rate (30kbps, SF=256) physical
channel used by the NodeB to inform a UE (or a group of UEs) that a paging
information will soon be transmitted on the PCH. Thus, the mobile only decodes the S-
CCPCH when it is informed to do so by the PICH. This enables to do other processing
and to save the mobiles battery.
z The PICH carries Paging Indicators (PI), which are user specific and calculated by
higher layers. It is always associated with the S-CCPCH to which the PCH is mapped.
z The frame structure of the PICH is illustrated above. It is 10 ms long, and always
contains 300 bits (SF=256). 288 of these bits are used to carry paging indicators, while
the remaining 12 are not formally part of the PICH and shall not be transmitted. That
part of the frame (last 12 bits) is reserved for possible future use.
z In order not to waste radio resources, several PIs are multiplexed in time on the PICH.
Depending on the configuration of the cell, 18, 36, 72 or 144 paging indicators can be
multiplexed on one PICH radio frame. Thus, the number of bits reserved for each PI
depends of the number of PIs per radio frame. For example, if there is 72 PIs in one
radio frame, there will be 4 (288/72) consecutive bits for each PI. These bits are all
identical. If the PI in a certain frame is 1, it is an indication that the UE associated
with that PI should read the corresponding frame of the S-CCPCH.
Secondary Common Control Physical Channel
(SCCPCH)
z Carrying FACH and PCH, SF = 256 - 4
Pilot: used for demodulation

TFCI: Transport Format Control Indication, used for describe data

format

TFCI Data Pilot

N TFCI bits N Data bits N Pilot bits

T slot = 2560 chips, 20*2 k bits (k=0..6)

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

1 radio frame: T f = 10 ms

z The Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) is used to carry

the FACH and PCH transport channels. Unlike the P-CCPCH, it is not broadcasted
continuously. It is only transmitted when there is a PCH or FACH information to
transmit. At the mobile side, the mobile only decodes the S-CCPCH when it expects a
useful message on the PCH or FACH.
z A UE will expect a message on the PCH after indication from the PICH (page indicator
channel), and it will expect a message on the FACH after it has transmitted something
on the RACH.
z The FACH and the PCH can be mapped on the same or on separate S-CCPCHs. If
they are mapped on the same S-CCPCH, TFCI bits have to be sent to support multiple
transport formats
z The figure above shows the frame structure of the S-CCPCH. There are 18 different
slot formats determining the exact number of data, pilot and TFCI bits. The data bits
correspond to the PCH and/or FACH bits coming from the transport sub-layer. Pilot bit
are typically used when beamforming techniques are used.
z The SF ranges from 4 to 256. The channelization code is assigned by the RRC layer
as is the scrambling code, and they are fixed during the communication. They are sent
on the BCCH so that every UE can decode the channel.
z As said before, FACH can be used to carry user data. The difference with the
dedicated channel is that it cannot use fast power control, nor soft handover. The
advantage is that it is a fast access channel.
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

z Carrying uplink signaling and data, consist of two parts:

One or several preambles: 16 kinds of available preambles

10 or 20ms message part

Preamble Preamble Preamble Message part

4096 chips
10 ms (one radio frame)

Preamble Preamble Preamble Message part

4096 chips 20 ms (two radio frames)

z The Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) is used by the UE to access the
network and to carry small data packets. It carries the RACH transport channel. The
PRACH is an open loop power control channel, with contention resolution mechanisms
(ALOHA approach) to enable a random access from several users.

z The PRACH is composed of two different parts: the preamble part and the message
part that carries the RACH message. The preamble is an identifier which consists of
256 repetitions of a 16 chip long signature (total of 4096 chips). There are 16 possible
signatures, basically, the UE randomly selects one of the 16 possible preambles and
transmits it at increasing power until it gets a response from the network (on the AICH).
That preamble is scrambled before being sent. That is a sign that the power level is
high enough and that the UE is authorized to transmit, which it will do after
acknowledgment from the network. If the UE doesnt get a response from the network,
it has to select a new signature to transmit.

z The message part is 10 or 20 ms long (split into 15 or 30 time slots) and is made of the
RACH data and the layer 1 control information.
PRACH Message Structure

Data
Data N data bits

Pilot TFCI
Control N Pilot bits N TFCI bits

T slot = 2560 chips, 10*2 k bits (k=0..3)

Slot # 0 Slot # 1 Slot # i Slot # 14

Message part radio frame T = 10

z The data and control bits of the message part are processed in parallel. The SF of the
data part can be 32, 64, 128 or 256 while the SF of the control part is always 256. The
control part consists of 8 pilot bits for channel estimation and 2 TFCI bits to indicate
the transport format of the RACH (transport channel), for a total of 10 bits per slot.

z The OVSF codes to use (one for RACH data and one for control) depend on the
signature that was used for the preamble (for signatures s=0 to s=15: OVSFcontrol=
Cch,256,m, where m=16s + 15; OVSFdata= Cch,SF,m, where m=SF*s/16.
PRACH Access Timeslot Structure

radio frame: 10 ms radio frame: 10 ms

5120 chips

#1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14

Access slot #0 Random Access Transmission

Access slot #1
Random Access Transmission

Access slot #7 Random Access Transmission

Access slot #8
Random Access Transmission

Access slot #14

z The PRACH transmission is based on the access frame structure. The access frame
is access of 15 access slots and lasts 20 ms (2 radio frames).
z To avoid too many collisions and to limit interference, a UE must wait at least 3 or 4
access slots between two consecutive preambles.
z The PRACH resources (access slots and preamble signatures) can be divided
between different Access Service Classes (ASC) in order to provide different priorities
of RACH usage. The ASC number ranges from 0 (highest priority) to 7 (lowest
priority).
Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)
z Carrying the Acquisition Indicators (AI), SF = 256
There are 16 kinds of Signature to generate AI

AI part Unused part

a0 a1 a2 a30 a31 a32 a33 a38 a39

AS #14 AS #0 AS #1 AS #i AS #14 AS #0

20 ms

z The Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) is a common downlink channel used to

control the uplink random accesses. It carries the Acquisition Indicators (AI), each
corresponding to a signature on the PRACH (uplink). When the NodeB receives the
random access from a mobile, it sends back the signature of the mobile to grant its
access. If the NodeB receives multiple signatures, it can sent all these signatures back
by adding the together. At reception, the UE can apply its signature to check if the
NodeB sent an acknowledgement (taking advantage of the orthogonality of the
signatures).
z The AICH consists of a burst of data transmitted regularly every access slot frame.
One access slot frame is formed of 15 access slots, and lasts 2 radio frames (20 ms).
Each access slot consists of two parts, an acquisition indicator part of 32 real-valued
symbols and a long part during which nothing is transmitted to avoid overlapping due
to propagation delays.
z s (with values 0, +1 and -1, corresponding to the answer from the network to a specific
user) and the 32 chip long sequence <bs,j> is given by a predefined table. There are
16 sequences <bs,j>, each corresponding to one PRACH signatures. A maximum of
16 AIs can be sent in each access slot. The user can multiply the received multi-level
signal by the signature it used to know if its access was granted.
z The SF used is always 256 and the OVSF code used by the cell is indicated in system
information type 5.
Uplink Dedicated Physical Channel
(DPDCH&DPCCH)
z Uplink DPDCH and DPCCH are I/Q code division
multiplexed (CDM) within each radio frame

z DPDCH carries data generated at Layer 2 and higher layer,

the OVSF code is Cch,SF,SF/4, where SF is from 256 to 4

z DPCCH carries control information generated at Layer 1,

the OVSF code is Cch,256,0

z There are two kinds of uplink dedicated physical channels, the Dedicated Physical
Data Channel (DPDCH) and the Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH).
The DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. The DPCCH is used to carry
the physical sub-layer control bits.

z Each DPCCH time slot consists of Pilot, TFCIFBITPC

z Pilot is used to help demodulation

z TFCI: transport format control indicator

z FBI:used for the FBTD. (feedback TX diversity)

z TPC: used to transport power control command.

Uplink Dedicated Physical Channel
(DPDCH&DPCCH)
z Frame Structure of Uplink DPDCH/DPCCH

Data
DPDCH Ndata bits

Pilot TFCI FBI TPC

DPCCH Npilot bits NTFCI bits NFBI bits NTPC bits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2k bits (k=0..6)

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

1 radio frame: Tf = 10 ms

z On the figure above, we can see the DPDCH and DPCCH time slot constitution. The
parameter k determines the number of symbols per slot. It is related to the spreading
factor (SF) of the DPDCH by this simple equation: SF=256/2k. The DPDCH SF ranges
from 4 to 256. The SF for the uplink DPCCH is always 256, which gives us 10 bits per
slot. The exact number of pilot, TFCI, TPC and FBI bits is configured by higher layers.
This configuration is chosen from 12 possible slot formats. It is important to note that
symbols are transmitted during all slots for the DPDCH
Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel
(DPDCH+DPCCH)
z Downlink DPDCH and DPCCH is time division multiplexing
(TDM).

z DPDCH carries data generated at Layer 2 and higher layer

z DPCCH carries control information generated at Layer 1

z SF of downlink DPCH is from 512 to 4

z The uplink DPDCH and DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed. But the downlink DPDCH
and DPCCH is time multiplexed. This is main difference.

z Basically, there are two types of downlink DPCH. They are distinguished by the use or
non use of the TFCI field. TFCI bits are not used for fixed rate services or when the
TFC doesnt change.
Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel
(DPDCH+DPCCH)
z Frame Structure of Downlink DPCH (DPDCH+DPCCH)

DPDCH DPCCH DPDCH DPCCH

Data1 TPC TFCI Data2 Pilot
Ndata1 bits NTPC bits NTFCI bits Ndata2 bits Npilot bits

Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2k bits (k=-1..6)

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

One radio frame, Tf = 10 ms

z We have known that the uplink DPDCH and DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed. But the
downlink DPDCH and DPCCH is time multiplexed. This is main difference. The
parameter k in the figure above determines the total number of bits per time slot. It is
related to the SF, which ranges from 4 to 512. The chips of one slot is also 2560.

z Downlink physical channels are used to carry user specific information like speech,
data or signaling, as well as layer 1 control bits. Like it was mentioned before, the
payload from the DPDCH and the control bits from the DPCCH are time multiplexed
on every time slot. The figure above shows how these two channels are multiplexed.
There is only one DPCCH in downlink for one user.
High-Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel
(HS-PDSCH)
z Bearing service data and layer 2 overhead bits mapped from the transport
channel
z SF=16, can be configured several channels to increase data service

Data
Ndata1 bits
Tslot = 2560 chips, M*10*2k bits (k=4)

Slot #0 Slot#1 Slot #2

1 subframe: Tf = 2 ms

z HS-PDSCH is a downlink physical channel that carries user data and layer 2 overhead
bits mapped from the transport channel: HS-DSCH.

z The user data and layer 2 overhead bits from HS-DSCH is mapped onto one or
several HS-PDSCH and transferred in 2ms subframe using one or several
channelization code with fixed SF=16.
High-Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)
z Carries physical layer signalling to a single UE ,such as modulation
scheme (1 bit) ,channelization code set (7 bit), transport block size
(6bit),HARQ process number (3bit), redundancy version (3bit), new data
indicator (1bit), UE identity (16bit)
z HS-SCCH is a fixed rate (60 kbps, SF=128) downlink physical channel
used to carry downlink signalling related to HS-DSCH transmission

Data
Ndata1 bits
Tslot = 2560 chips, 40 bits

Slot #0 Slot#1 Slot #2

1 subframe: Tf = 2 ms

z HS-SCCH uses a SF=128 and has q time structure based on a sub-frame of length 2
ms, i.e. the same length as the HS-DSCH TTI. The timing of HS-SCCH starts two slot
prior to the start of the HS-PDSCH subframe.

z The following information is carried on the HS-SCCH (7 items)

Modulation scheme(1bit) QPSK or 16QAM

Channelization code set (7bits)

Transport block size ( 6bits)

HARQ process number (3bits)

Redundancy version (3bits)

New Data Indicator (1bit)

UE identity (16 bits)

z In each 2 ms interval corresponding to one HS-DSCH TTI , one HS-SCCH carries

physical-layer signalling to a single UE. As there should be a possibility for HS-DSCH
transmission to multiple users in parallel (code multiplex), multiplex HS-SCCH may be
needed in a cell. The specification allows for up to four HS-SCCHs as seen from a UE
point of view .i.e. UE must be able to decode four HS-SCCH.
High-Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel
(HS-DPCCH )
z Carrying information to acknowledge downlink transport blocks
and feedback information to the system for scheduling and link
adaptation of transport block
CQI and ACK/NACK
z Physical Channel, Uplink, SF=256

Tslot = 2560 chips 2 Tslot = 5120 chips

ACK/NACK CQI

One HS-DPCCH subframe ( 2ms )

Subframe #0 Subframe #i Subframe #n

1 radio frame: Tf = 10 ms

z The uplink HS-DPCCH consists of:

Acknowledgements for HARQ

Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)

z As the HS-DPCCH uses SF=256, there are a total of 30 channel bits per 2 ms sub
frame (3 time slot). The HS-DPCCH information is divided in such a way that the
HARQ acknowledgement is transmitted in the first slot of the subframe while the
channel quality indication is transmitted in the rest slot.
Contents
2. Physical Channels
2.1 Physical Channel Structure and Functions

2.2 Channel Mapping

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
Mapping Between Channels
Logical channels Transport channels Physical channels

BCCH BCH P-CCPCH

FACH S-CCPCH

PCCH PCH S-CCPCH

CCCH RACH PRACH

FACH S-CCPCH

CTCH FACH S-CCPCH

DCCH, DTCH DCH DPDCH

HS-DSCH HS-PDSCH

RACH, FACH PRACH, S-CCPCH

z This page indicates how the mapping can be done between logical, transport and
physical channels. Not all physical channels are represented because not all physical
channels correspond to a transport channel.

z The mapping between logical channels and transport channels is done by the MAC
sub-layer.

z Different connections can be made between logical and transport channels:

BCCH is connected to BCH and may also be connected to FACH;

DTCH can be connected to either RACH and FACH, to RACH and DSCH, to
DCH and DSCH, to a DCH or a CPCH;

CTCH is connected to FACH;

DCCH can be connected to either RACH and FACH, to RACH and DSCH, to
DCH and DSCH, to a DCH or a CPCH;

PCCH is connected to PCH;

CCCH is connected to RACH and FACH.

z These connections depend on the type of information on the logical channels.

Contents
1. Physical Layer Overview

2. Physical Channels

3. Physical Layer Procedure

UE uses PSC to acquire slot

Slot synchronization to a cell
Synchronization

UE uses SSC to find frame

Frame synchronization & synchronization and identify the code
Code Group Identification group of the cell found in the first step

UE determines the primary scrambling

code through correlation over the
Scrambling Code
PCPICH with all codes within the
Identification identified group, and then detects the P-
CCPCH and reads BCH information

z The purpose of the Cell Search Procedure is to give the UE the possibility of finding a
cell and of determining the downlink scrambling code and frame synchronization of
that cell. This is typically performed in 3 steps:
PSCH (Slot synchronization): The UE uses the SCHs primary synchronization
code to acquire slot synchronization to a cell. The primary synchronization code
is used by the UE to detect the existence of a cell and to synchronize the mobile
on the TS boundaries. This is typically done with a single filter (or any similar
device) matched to the primary synchronization code which is common to
all cells. The slot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the
matched filter output.
SSCH (Frame synchronization and code-group identification): The secondary
synchronization codes provide the information required to find the frame
boundaries and the group number. Each group number corresponds to a unique
set of 8 primary scrambling codes. The frame boundary and the group number
are provided indirectly by selecting a suite of 15 secondary codes. 16 secondary
codes have been defined C1, C2, .C16. 64 possible suites have been defined,
each suite corresponds to one of the 64 groups. Each suite of secondary codes
is composed of 15 secondary codes (chosen in the set of 16), each of which will
be transmitted in one time slot. When the received codes matches one of the
possible suites, the UE has both determined the frame boundary and the group
number.
PCPICH (Scrambling-code identification): The UE determines the exact primary
scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is
typically identified through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the PCPICH with
all the codes within the code group identified in the second step. After the
primary scrambling code has been identified, the Primary CCPCH can be
detected and the system- and cell specific BCH information can be read.
START
Random Access Choose a RACH sub channel from

Procedure available ones

Get available signatures

Set Preamble Retrans Max

Set Preamble_Initial_Power

Send a preamble
No AI

Get negative AI
Choose a access slot again Check the corresponding AI

Get positive AI
Choose a signature and
increase preamble transmit power Increase message part power by
p-m based on preamble power
The counter of preamble retransmit
Subtract 1, Commanded preamble power Send the corresponding message part
increased by Power Ramp Step

Y Set physical status to be RACH

Counter> 0 & Preamble power Set physical status to be Nack
message transmitted on AICH received
< maximum allowed power

N
Report the physical status to MAC
Set physical status to be Nack
on AICH received
END

z Physical random access procedure

1. Derive the available uplink access slots, in the next full access slot set, for the set of available
RACH sub-channels within the given ASC. Randomly select one access slot among the ones
previously determined. If there is no access slot available in the selected set, randomly select one
uplink access slot corresponding to the set of available RACH sub-channels within the given ASC
from the next access slot set. The random function shall be such that each of the allowed
selections is chosen with equal probability

2. Randomly select a signature from the set of available signatures within the given ASC.

3. Set the Preamble Retransmission Counter to Preamble_ Retrans_ Max

4. Set the parameter Commanded Preamble Power to Preamble_Initial_Power

5. Transmit a preamble using the selected uplink access slot, signature, and preamble transmission
power.

6. If no positive or negative acquisition indicator (AI +1 nor 1) corresponding to the selected

signature is detected in the downlink access slot corresponding to the selected uplink access slot:

A: Select the next available access slot in the set of available RACH sub-channels within
the given ASC;
B: select a signature;
C: Increase the Commanded Preamble Power;
D: Decrease the Preamble Retransmission Counter by one. If the Preamble
Retransmission Counter > 0 then repeat from step 6. Otherwise exit the physical random
access procedure.
7. If a negative acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is detected in the
downlink access slot corresponding to the selected uplink access slot, exit the physical random
access procedure Signature

8. If a positive acquisition indicator corresponding to the selected signature is detected , Transmit

the random access message three or four uplink access slots after the uplink access slot of the last
transmitted preamble

9. exit the physical random access procedure

Transmit Diversity Mode
z Application of Tx diversity modes on downlink physical channel

Physical channel type Open loop mode Closed loop mode

TSTD STTD Mode 1 Mode 2

P-CCPCH applied

SCH applied

S-CCPCH applied

DPCH applied applied applied

PICH applied

HS-PDSCH applied applied

HS-SCCH applied

AICH applied

z Transmitter-antenna diversity can be used to generate multi-path diversity in places

where it would not otherwise exist. Multi-path diversity is a useful phenomenon,
especially if it can be controlled. It can protect the UE against fading and shadowing.
TX diversity is designed for downlink usage. Transmitter diversity needs two antennas,
which would be an expensive solution for the UEs.

z The UTRA specifications divide the transmitter diversity modes into two categories: (1)
open-loop mode and (2) closed-loop mode. In the open-loop mode no feedback
information from the UE to the NodeB is available. Thus the UTRAN has to determine
by itself the appropriate parameters for the TX diversity. In the closed-loop mode the
UE sends feedback information up to the NodeB in order to optimize the transmissions
from the diversity antennas.

z Thus it is quite natural that the open-loop mode is used for the common channels, as
they typically do not provide an uplink return channel for the feedback information.
Even if there was a feedback channel, the NodeB cannot really optimize its common
channel transmissions according to measurements made by one particular UE.
Common channels are common for everyone; what is good for one UE may be bad for
another. The closed-loop mode is used for dedicated physical channels, as they have
an existing uplink channel for feedback information. Note that shared channels can
also employ closed loop power control, as they are allocated for only one user at a
time, and they also have a return channel in the uplink. There are two specified
methods to achieve the transmission diversity in the open-loop mode and two methods
in closed-loop mode
Transmit Diversity - STTD
z Space time block coding based transmit antenna diversity
(STTD)
4 consecutive bits b0, b1, b2, b3 using STTD coding
b0 b1 b2 b3 Antenna 1
b0 b1 b2 b3

-b2 b3 b0 -b1 Antenna 2

Channel bits

STTD encoded channel bits

for antenna 1 and antenna 2.

z The TX diversity methods in the open-loop mode are

space time-block coding-based transmit-antenna diversity (STTD)

time-switched transmit diversity (TSTD).

z In STTD the data to be transmitted is divided between two transmission antennas at

the base station site and transmitted simultaneously. The channel-coded data is
processed in blocks of four bits. The bits are time reversed and complex conjugated,
as shown in above slide. The STTD method, in fact, provides two brands of diversity.
The physical separation of the antennas provides the space diversity, and the time
difference derived from the bit-reversing process provides the time diversity.

z These features together make the decoding process in the receiver more reliable. In
addition to data signals, pilot signals are also transmitted via both antennas. The
normal pilot is sent via the first antenna and the diversity pilot via the second antenna.

z The two pilot sequences are orthogonal, which enables the receiving UE to extract the
phase information for both antennas.

z The STTD encoding is optional in the UTRAN, but its support is mandatory for the
UEs receiver.
Transmit Diversity - TSTD
z Time switching transmit diversity (TSTD) is used only on
SCH channel

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #2 Slot #14

(Tx
acp OFF) acp acp
Antenna 1
i,0 (Tx i,2
acs OFF) acs aci,14
s

(Tx (Tx (Tx

OFF) acp OFF) OFF)

Antenna 2
(Tx i,1 (Tx (Tx
OFF) acs OFF) OFF)

z Time-switched transmit diversity (TSTD) can be applied to the SCH. Just like STTD,
the support of TSTD is optional in the UTRAN, but mandatory in the UE. The principle
of TSTD is to transmit the synchronization channels via the two base station antennas
in turn. In even-numbered time slots the SCHs are transmitted via antenna 1, and in
odd-numbered slots via antenna 2. This is depicted in above Figure. Note that SCH
channels only use the first 256 chips of each time slot (i.e., one-tenth of each slot).
Closed Loop Mode
z Used in DPCH and HS-PDSCH

z The closed-loop-mode transmit diversity can only be applied to the downlink channel if
there is an associated uplink channel. Thus this mode can only be used with dedicated
channels. The chief operating principle of the closed loop mode is that the UE can
control the transmit diversity in the base station by sending adjustment commands in
FBI bits on the uplink DPCCH. The UE uses the base stations common pilot channels
to estimate the channels separately. Based on this estimation, it generates the
adjustment information and sends it to the UTRAN to maximize the UEs received
power.

z There are actually two modes in the closed-loop method. In mode 1 only the phase
can be adjusted; in mode 2 the amplitude is adjustable as well as the phase. Each
uplink time slot has one FBI bit for closed-loop-diversity control. In mode 1 each bit
forms a separate adjustment command, but in mode 2 four bits are needed to
compose a command.

z This functions can be configured by LMT command ADD CELLSETUP.

References
z TS 25.104 UTRA (BS) FDD Radio Transmission and Reception
z TS 25.201 Physical layer-general description
z TS 25.211 Physical channels and mapping of transport channels onto physical
channels (FDD)
z TS 25.212 Multiplexing and channel coding (FDD)
z TS 25.213 Spreading and modulation (FDD)
z TS 25.214 Physical layer procedures (FDD)
z TS 25.308 UTRA High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)
z TR 25.877 High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) - Iub/Iur Protocol
Aspects
z TR 25.858 Physical layer aspects of UTRA High Speed Downlink Packet Access

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page50
Summary
z This course mainly introduces the basic concept, key
technology and procedures of WCDMA physical layer.

z These knowledge is very important for understanding Uu

interface and further study.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page51
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA UTRAN Interface
and Signaling Procedure

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Objectives
z Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Understand UTRAN interface and structure

Understand the definitions about UTRAN network elements

Understand UTRAN signaling procedure

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
UMTS Network Structure
Core Network
CN CS PS CS PS
Iu-CS Iu-PS Iu-CS Iu-PS
RNS RNS
Iur
RNC RNC
UTRAN
Iub Iub Iub Iub

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Uu
UE
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page4

z UTRAN (UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access network) structure

The UTRAN consists of one or several Radio Network Subsystem ( RNS ), each
containing one RNC and one or several NodeB
z Interface
Iu interface: the Iu interface connects the UTRAN to the CN and is split in two
parts. The Iu-CS is the interface between the RNC and the circuit switched
domain of the CN. The Iu-PS interface is the interface between the RNC and the
packet switched domain of the CN.
Uu interface: the Uu interface is the WCDMA radio interface with in UMTS. It is
the interface through which the UE accesses the fixed part of the network.
Iub interface: the Iub interface connects the NodeB and the RNC. Contrarily to
GSM, this interface is fully open in UMTS and thus more competition is expected.
Iur interface: the RNC-RNC interface was initially designed in order to provide
inter RNC soft handover, but more features were added during the development.
Uu Interface
GC Nt DC

Duplication avoidance
GC Nt DC
C-plane signaling UuS boundary
U-plane information

control
RRC L3
control

control

control
control radio bearer

PDCP PDCP L2/PDCP

BMC L2/BMC

RLC RLC L2/RLC

RLC RLC
RLC RLC
RLC RLC
logical channel

MAC L2/MAC
transport channel
PHY L1

z The layer 1 supports all functions required for the transmission of bit streams on the
physical medium. It is also in charge of measurements function consisting in indicating
to higher layers, for example, Frame Error Rate (FER), Signal to Interference Ratio
(SIR), interference power, transmit power, It is basically composed of a layer 1
management entity, a transport channel entity, and a physical channel entity.
z The layer 2 protocol is responsible for providing functions such as mapping, ciphering,
retransmission and segmentation. It is made of four sublayers: MAC (Medium Access
Control), RLC (Radio Link Control), PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) and
BMC (Broadcast/Multicast Control).
z The layer 3 is split into 2 parts: the access stratum and the non access stratum. The
access stratum part is made of RRC (Radio Resource Control) entity and duplication
avoidance entity. The non access stratum part is made of CC, MM parts.
z Not shown on the figure are connections between RRC and all the other protocol
layers (RLC, MAC, PDCP, BMC and L1), which provide local inter-layer control
services.
z The protocol layers are located in the UE and the peer entities are in the NodeB or the
RNC.
General Protocol Mode for UTRAN
Terrestrial Interface
z The structure is based on the principle that the layers and planes
are logically independent of each other.

Radio Control Plane User Plane

Network
Layer Application Data
Protocol Stream(s)

Transport Transport Network Transport Network Transport Network

Network User Plane Control Plane User Plane
Layer ALCAP(s)

Signaling Signaling Data

Bearer(s) Bearer(s) Bearer(s)

Physical Layer

z Protocol structures in UTRAN terrestrial interfaces are designed according to the same
general protocol model. This model is shown in above slide. The structure is based on
the principle that the layers and planes are logically independent of each other and, if
needed, parts of the protocol structure may be changed in the future while other parts
remain intact.
z Horizontal Layers
The protocol structure consists of two main layers, the Radio Network Layer
(RNL) and the Transport Network Layer (TNL). All UTRAN-related issues are
visible only in the Radio Network Layer, and the Transport Network Layer
represents standard transport technology that is selected to be used for UTRAN
but without any UTRAN-specific changes.
z Vertical Planes
Control Plane
The Control Plane is used for all UMTS-specific control signaling. It includes the
Application Protocol (i.e. RANAP in Iu, RNSAP in Iur and NBAP in Iub), and the
Signaling Bearer for transporting the Application Protocol messages. The
Application Protocol is used, among other things, for setting up bearers to the UE
(i.e. the Radio Access Bearer in Iu and subsequently the Radio Link in Iur and
Iub). In the three plane structure the bearer parameters in the Application
Protocol are not directly tied to the User Plane technology, but rather are general
bearer parameters. The Signaling Bearer for the Application Protocol may or
may not be of the same type as the Signaling Bearer for the ALCAP. It is always
set up by O&M actions.
User Plane

All information sent and received by the user, such as the coded voice in a voice
call or the packets in an Internet connection, are transported via the User Plane.
The User Plane includes the Data Stream(s), and the Data Bearer (s) for the
Data Stream(s). Each Data Stream is characterized by one or more frame
protocols specified for that interface.

Transport Network Control Plane

The Transport Network Control Plane is used for all control signaling within the
Transport Layer. It does not include any Radio Network Layer information. It
includes the ALCAP protocol that is needed to set up the transport bearers (Data
Bearer) for the User Plane. It also includes the Signaling Bearer needed for the
ALCAP. The Transport Network Control Plane is a plane that acts between the
Control Plane and the User Plane. The introduction of the Transport Network
Control Plane makes it possible for the Application Protocol in the Radio Network
Control Plane to be completely independent of the technology selected for the
Data Bearer in the User Plane.

z About AAl2 and AAL5

Above the ATM layer we usually find an ATM adaptation layer (AAL). Its function
is to process the data from higher layers for ATM transmission.

This means segmenting the data into 48-byte chunks and reassembling the
original data frames on the receiving side. There are five different AALs (0, 1, 2,
3/4, and 5). AAL0 means that no adaptation is needed. The other adaptation
layers have different properties based on three parameters:

Real-time requirements;

Constant or variable bit rate;

Connection-oriented or connectionless data transfer.

The usage of ATM is promoted by the ATM Forum. The Iu interface uses two
AALs: AAL2 and AAL5.

AAL2 is designed for the transmission of connection oriented, real-time

data streams with variable bit rates.

AAL5 is designed for the transmission of connectionless data streams

with variable bit rates.
RNL Control Plane Application Protocol

CN
RANAP

RRC RNSAP
UE RNC RNC
NBAP

NodeB

NBAP Node B Application Part

RANAP Radio Access Network Application Part
RNSAP Radio Network Subsystem Application Part
RRC Radio Resource Control

z RANAP is the signaling protocol in Iu that contains all the control information specified
for the Radio Network Layer.
z RNSAP is the signaling protocol in Iur that contains all the control information specified
for the Radio Network Layer.
z NBAP is the signaling protocol in Iub that contains all the control information specified
for the Radio Network Layer.
z RRC is the signaling protocol in Uu that locate in the Uu interface layer 3.
Iu-CS Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
RANAP Iu UP
Layer

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

z Protocol Structure for Iu CS

The Iu CS overall protocol structure is depicted in above slide. The three planes
in the Iu interface share a common ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode)
transport which is used for all planes. The physical layer is the interface to the
physical medium: optical fiber, radio link or copper cable. The physical layer
implementation can be selected from a variety of standard off-the-shelf
transmission technologies, such as SONET, STM1, or E1.

z Iu CS Control Plane Protocol Stack

The Control Plane protocol stack consists of RANAP, on top of Broadband (BB)
SS7 (Signaling System #7) protocols. The applicable layers are the Signaling
Connection Control Part (SCCP), the Message Transfer Part (MTP3-b) and
SAAL-NNI (Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer for Network to Network Interfaces).

z Iu CS Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack

The Transport Network Control Plane protocol stack consists of the Signaling
Protocol for setting up AAL2 connections (Q.2630.1 and adaptation layer
Q.2150.1), on top of BB SS7 protocols. The applicable BB SS7 are those
described above without the SCCP layer.

z Iu CS User Plane Protocol Stack

A dedicated AAL2 connection is reserved for each individual CS service.

Iu-PS Interface

Radio Control Plane User plane

Network
Layer RANAP Iu UP

ATM
Physical Layer

z Protocol Structure for Iu PS

The Iu PS protocol structure is represented in above slide. Again, a common

ATM transport is applied for both User and Control Plane. Also the physical layer
is as specified for Iu CS.

z Iu PS Control Plane Protocol Stack

z Iu PS Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack

The Transport Network Control Plane is not applied to Iu PS. The setting up of
the GTP tunnel requires only an identifier for the tunnel, and the IP addresses for
both directions, and these are already included in the RANAP RAB Assignment
messages.

z Iu PS User Plane Protocol Stack

In the Iu PS User Plane, multiple packet data flows are multiplexed on one or
several AAL5 PVCs. The GTP-U (User Plane part of the GPRS Tunneling
Protocol) is the multiplexing layer that provides identities for individual packet
data flow. Each flow uses UDP connectionless transport and IP addressing.
Iub Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
Layer NBAP Iub FP

NCP CCP
Transport Network
Control Plane

Transport Transport Network

Network Transport Network ALCAP
User Plane ALCAP User Plane
Layer

SAAL UNI SAAL UNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

z The Iub interface is the terrestrial interface between NodeB and RNC. The Radio
Network Layer defines procedures related to the operation of the NodeB. The
Transport Network Layer defines procedures for establishing physical connections
between the NodeB and the RNC.

z The Iub application protocol, NodeB application part ( NBAP ) initiates the
establishment of a signaling connection over Iub . It is divided into two essential
components, CCP and NCP.

z NCP is used for signaling that initiates a UE context for a dedicated UE or signals that
is not related to specific UE. Example of NBAP-C procedure are cell configuration ,
handling of common channels and radio link setup

z CCP is used for signaling relating to a specific UE context.

z SAAL is an ATM Adaptation Layer that supports communication between signaling

entities over an ATM link.

z The user plane Iub Frame Protocol ( FP ), defined the structure of the frames and the
basic in band control procedure for every type of transport channel. There are DCH-FP,
RACH-FP, FACH-FP, HS-DSCH FP and PCH FP.
Iur Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network Iur Data
RANAP
Layer Stream

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

z Iur interface connects two RNCs. The protocol stack for the Iur is shown in above slide.

z The RNSAP protocol is the signaling protocol defined for the Iur interface.
Contents
1. UTRAN Network Overview

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

z SRNC and DRNC are concepts for a connected UE.

z The SRNC handles the connection to one UE, and may borrow radio
resources of a certain cell from the DRNC.
z Drift RNCs support the Serving RNC by providing radio resources
z A UE in connection state has at least one and only one SRNC, but can
has 0 or multiple DRNCs

z Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the Radio Network Subsystems can be interconnected
together through the Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over
direct physical connection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable
transport network .
z For each connection between User Equipment and the UTRAN, One RNC is the
Serving RNC. When required, Drift RNCs support the Serving RNC by providing radio
resources. The role of an RNC (Serving or Drift) is on a per connection basis between
a UE and the UTRAN.
RAB, RB and RL

RAB

RB
RNC CN
UE
RL
NodeB

UTRAN

z RAB: The service that the access stratum provides to the non-access stratum for
transfer of user data between User Equipment and CN.
z RB: The service provided by the layer2 for transfer of user data between User
Equipment and Serving RNC.
z RL: A "radio link" is a logical association between single User Equipment and a single
UTRAN access point. Its physical realization comprises one or more radio bearer
transmissions.
UE Working Modes and States
z Idle Mode

z Connected Mode
CELL_DCH

CELL_FACH

CELL_PCH

URA_PCH

z If RRC connection does not exit between UE and RNC, then the UE is in idle mode.
z If RRC connection exits between UE and RNC, then the UE is in connected mode.
z Based on UE mobility and activity UE in connected mode may be allocated to four
different states: CELL_DCH, CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH and URA_PCH.
z The UE leaves the connected mode and returns to idle mode when the RRC
connection is released or at RRC connection failure.
Idle Mode
z The UE has no relation to UTRAN, only to CN. For data
transfer, a signaling connection has to be established.

z UE camps on a cell
It enables the UE to receive system information from the PLMN

UE can monitor PICH of a cell for paging

z The idle mode tasks can be divided into three processes:

PLMN selection and reselection

Cell selection and reselection

Location registration

z When a UE is switched on, a public land mobile network (PLMN) is selected and the
UE searches for a suitable cell of this PLMN to camp on.
z The UE searches for a suitable cell of the chosen PLMN and chooses that cell to
provide available services, and tunes to its control channel. This choosing is known as
"camping on the cell". The UE will, if necessary, then register its presence, by means
of a NAS registration procedure, in the registration area of the chosen cell.
z If the UE finds a more suitable cell, it reselects onto that cell and camps on it. If the
new cell is in a different registration area, location registration is performed.
Connected Mode
z When UE is in connected mode
The UE position can be known on different levels:
Cell level (CELL_DCH/CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH)

UTRAN Registration Area (URA) level (URA_PCH)

The UE can use different types of channels in connected mode

Dedicated transport channels (CELL_DCH)

Common transport channels (CELL_FACH)

z Assuming that there exists an RRC connection, there are two basic families of RRC
connection mobility procedures, URA updating and handover. Different families of RRC
connection mobility procedures are used in different levels of UE connection (cell level
and URA level):
URA updating is a family of procedures that updates the UTRAN registration
area of a UE when an RRC connection exists and the position of the UE is
known on URA level in the UTRAN;
Handover is a family of procedures that adds or removes one or several radio
links between one UE and UTRAN when an RRC connection exists and the
position of the UE is known on cell level in the UTRAN.
z Which type of transport channel is used by UE in connected mode is decided by RNC
according to the UE activity.
Connected Mode
z Cell-DCH
In active state

Communicating via its dedicated channels

UTRAN knows which cell UE stays in

z If there is huge data to be transmitted, it must allocate dedicated channel. Thus UE will
be in Cell-DCH. UE in Cell-DCH state is communicating via DCH (downlink and uplink)
with UTRAN.
Connected Mode
z Cell-FACH
In active state

Few data to be transmitted both in uplink and in downlink.

There is no need to allocate dedicated channel for this UE

Downlink uses FACH and uplink uses RACH

UE needs to monitor the FACH for its information

UTRAN knows which cell the UE stays in

z If there is only few data to be transmitted, there is no need to allocate dedicated

channel. Thus UE will be in Cell-FACH. UE in Cell-FACH state is communicating via
FACH (downlink) and RACH (uplink) with UTRAN. UE need to monitor the FACH for
its relative information because FACH is shared for all users in the cell.
Connected Mode
z Cell-PCH
No data to be transmitted or received

Monitor PICH, to receive its paging

UTRAN knows which cell the UE stays in

UTRAN has to update cell information of UE when UE roams

to another cell

Lower the power consumption of UE

z If UE has no data to be transmitted or received, UE will be in Cell-PCH or URA-PCH.

In these two states, UE needs to monitor PICH,to receive its paging. UTRAN knows
which cell or URA UE is now in. The difference between Cell-PCH and URA-PCH is
that UTRAN update UE information only after UE which is in URA-PCH state has
roamed to other URA.
z UTRAN have to update cell information of UE when UE roams to another cell. UE
migrates to cell-FACH state to complete the cell update. If there is also no data to be
transmitted or received, UE is back to CELL-PCH state after cell update. If the cell
update times in a fixed time reach a preset value, UTRAN will let UE migrate to URA-
PCH. URA is an area of several cells.
Connected Mode
z URA-PCH
No data to be transmitted or received
Monitor PICH, to receive its paging
UTRAN only knows which URA (which consists of multiple
cells) that UE stays
UTRAN updates UE information only after UE has roamed to
other URA
A better way to reduce the resource occupancy and signaling
transmission

z It is the same as the CELL-PCH state. UE should migrate to CELL-FACH state to

complete the URA update.
UE Working Modes and States
- Reduce activity further - Reduce activity, DTX,
- Avoid unnecessary RRC Connection and save power
signaling
URA_PCH CELL_PCH

CELL_DCH CELL_FACH
- Dedicated channel
- Common channel
- Common service,
- PS service with few
such as voice
data to transmit
IDLE
- Monitor paging channel
- Cell re-selection

- Scan networks (PLMN)

DEAD - Camp on a cell

z This is the UE states figure. These states are significant only for UTRAN and UE. They
are transparent to CN. Lets focus on the switch between the states.
Contents
1. UTRAN Network Overview

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

UE Node B RNC

1. System Information Update Request

NBAP NBAP

2. System Information Update Response

NBAP NBAP

3. BCCH: System Information

RRC RRC

4. BCCH: System Information

RRC RRC

5. BCCH: System Information

RRC RRC

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page26
Introduction of System Information
z MIB:
PLMN tag

Scheduling information for SB (Scheduling Block)

Scheduling information for SIB (System Information Block)

z SB1: scheduling information for SIB

z SB2: scheduling information for SIB (extended)

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
Introduction of System Information
z SIB1: System information for NAS and the timer/counter for
UE
z SIB2: URA information
z SIB3: Parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection
z SIB4: Parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection while UE
is in connected mode
z SIB5: Parameters for the common physical channels of the
cell
z SIB6: Parameters for the common physical channels of the cell
while UE is in connected mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page28
Introduction of System Information
z SIB7: uplink interference level and the refreshing timer
z SIB8: the CPCH static information
z SIB9: the CPCH dynamic information
z SIB10: information to be used by UEs having their DCH controlled
by a DRAC procedure
z SIB11: measurement controlling information
z SIB12: measurement controlling information in connected mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page29
Introduction of System Information
z SIB13: ANSI-41 system information
z SIB14: the information in TDD mode
z SIB15: the position service information
z SIB16: the needed pre-configuration information for handover
from other RAT to UTRAN
z SIB17: the configuration information for TDD
z SIB18: the PLMN identities of the neighboring cells to be used in
shared networks to help with the cell reselection process

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page30
System Information Block Type 1
z System information type 1
The NAS system information
CS domain DRX: K=6, then DRX
period is 2^k= 2^6= 64TTI=640 ms
PS domain DRX: K=6, then DRX
period is 2^k=2^6=64TTI =640 ms

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
System Information Block Type 2
z System info type 2
URA information

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page32
System Information Block Type 3
z The references for cell selection
and re-selection
Qhyst2s
Sintrasearch
Sintersearch
Sinterratsearch
Qqualmin
Qrxlemin
T reselection
Max Allowed UE TX power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
System Information Block Type 5
z The configuration information for
the following physical channels
and the counterpart transport
channels
PCCPCH
SCCPCH
PICH
AICH
PRACH

z System info type 7

Including the UL interference level which is used for open loop power
control
Including the Expiration Time Factor which is used for refreshing the
SIB7 periodically

z System info type 11

The neighbor cell information for cell re-selection in IDLE mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page35
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page36
Paging Initiation
z CN initiated paging
z Establish a signaling connection

z UTRAN initiated paging

z Trigger the cell update procedure

z Trigger reading of updated system information

z For CN originated paging:

In order to request UTRAN connect to UE, CN initiates the paging procedure, transmits
paging message to the UTRAN through Iu interface, and UTRAN transmits the paging
message from CN to UE through the paging procedure on Uu interface, which will make
the UE initiate a signaling connection setup process with the CN.

z For UTRAN originated paging:

UE state transition: In order to trigger UE in the CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state to carry

out state transition (for example, transition to the CELL_FACH state), the UTRAN will
perform a paging process. Meanwhile, the UE will initiate a cell update or URA update
process, as a reply to the paging.

When the cell system message is updated: When system messages change, the
UTRAN will trigger paging process in order to inform UE in the idle, CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH state to carry out the system message update, so that the UE can read the
updated system message.
Paging Type 1
z If UE is in CELL_PCH,URA_PCH or IDLE statethe paging
message will be transmitted on PCCH with paging type 1
CN RNC1 RNC2 NODEB1.1 NODEB2.1 UE

PAGING
RANAP RANAP

RANAP PAGING RANAP

PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1

z Paging type 1:

The message is transmitted in one LA or RA according to LAI or RAI.

After calculating the paging time, the paging message will be transmitted at that time

If UE is in CELL_PCH or URA_PCH state, the UTRAN transmits the paging information

in PAGING TYPE 1 message to UE. After received paging message, UE performs a cell
update procedure to transit state to CELL_FACH.

z As shown in the above figure, the CN initiates paging in a location area (LA), which is covered
by two RNCs. After receiving a paging message, the RNC searches all the cells corresponding
to the LAI, and then calculates the paging time, at which it will send the PAGING TYPE 1
message to these cells through the PCCH.
Paging Type 2
z If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH statethe paging
message will be transmitted on DCCH with paging type 2
CN SRNC UE

PAGING
RANAP RANAP

DCCH: PAGING TYPE 2

RRC RRC

z Paging type 2:

If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH statethe paging message will be transmitted on

DCCH with paging type 2

The message will be only transmitted in a cell

z As shown in the above figure, if the UE is in the CELL_-DCH or CELL_FACH state, the
UTRAN will immediately transmit PAGING TYPE 2 message to the paged UE on DCCH
channel.
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page40
Introduction of Call Process
z In WCDMA system, a call process includes the following basic
signaling flows:
RRC connection flow
Direct transfer message flow
Authentication flow (optional)
Security flow (optional)
RAB establish flow
Call proceeding
NAS signaling before correlative bearer release
Correlative bearer release

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
RRC Connection Establishment Flow
(CCCH)
Serving
UE
RNC

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC RRC

2. CCCH: RRC Connection Set up

RRC RRC

3. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete

RRC RRC

z In the idle mode, when the non-access layer of the UE requests to establish a signaling
connection, the UE will initiate the RRC connection procedure. Each UE has up to one
RRC connection only.

z When the SRNC receives an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message from the UE,
the Radio Resource Management (RRM) module of the RNC determines whether to
accept or reject the RRC connection request according to a specific algorithm. If
accepting the request, the RRM module determines whether to set up the RRC
connection on a Dedicated Channel (DCH) or on a Common Channel (CCH) according
to a specific RRM algorithm.

z Description:

The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message to the SRNC

through the uplink CCCH, requesting the establishment of an RRC connection.

Based on the RRC connection request cause and the system resource state, the
SRNC decides to establish the connection on the common channel.

The SRNC sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP message to the UE through

the downlink CCCH. The message contains the information about the CCH.

The UE sends an RRC CONNECTION SETUP COMPLETE message to the

SRNC through the uplink CCCH.
RRC Connection Establishment Flow
(DCCH)
Serving
UE Node B
RNC
1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request
RRC RRC

Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP NBAP

Start RX

3. Radio Link Setup Response

NBAP NBAP

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

DCH - FP
5. Downlink Synchronization
DCH - FP

DCH - FP
6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP

Start TX

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Set up

RRC RRC
8. Radio Link Restore Indication
NBAP NBAP
9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete
RRC RRC

z Typically, an RRC connection is set up on the DCH.

z Description:
The UE sends an RRC Connection Request message via the uplink CCCH to
request to establish an RRC connection.
Based on the RRC connection request cause and the system resource state, the
SRNC decides to establish the connection on the dedicated channel, and
allocates the RNTI and L1 and L2 resources.
The SRNC sends a Radio Link Setup Request message to Node B, requesting
the Node B to allocate specific radio link resources required by the RRC
connection.
After successfully preparing the resources, the Node B responds to the SRNC
with the Radio Link Setup Response message.
The SRNC initiates the establishment of Iub user plane transport bearer with the
ALCAP protocol and completes the synchronization between the RNC and the
Node B.
The SRNC sends an RRC Connection Setup message to the UE in the
downlink CCCH.
The UE sends an RRC Connection Setup Complete message to the SRNC in
the uplink DCCH.
ID Name Recommended value
ORIGCONVCALLEST Originating Conversational Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
ORIGSTREAMCALLEST Originating Streaming Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
ORIGINTERCALLEST Originating Interactive Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
ORIGBKGCALLEST Originating Background Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
ORIGSUBSTRAFFCALLEST Originating Subscribed traffic Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
TERMCONVCALLEST Terminating Conversational Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
TERMSTREAMCALLEST Terminating Streaming Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
TERMINTERCALLEST Terminating Interactive Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
TERMBKGCALLEST Terminating Background Call DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
EMERGCALLEST Emergency Call RRC establish type DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
INTERRATCELLRESELEST Inter-RAT cell re-selection DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING
INTERRATCELLCHGORDERE Inter-RAT cell change order DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING
ST

REGISTEST Registration DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING

DETACHEST Detach FACH
ORIGHIGHPRIORSIGEST Originating High Priority Signaling DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
ORIGLOWPRIORSIGEST Originating Low Priority Signaling FACH
CALLREEST Call re-establishment DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING
TERMHIGHPRIORSIGEST Terminating High Priority Signaling DCH_13.6K_SIGNALLING
TERMLOWPRIORSIGEST Terminating Low Priority Signaling FACH
TERMCAUSEUNKNOWN Terminating cause unknown FACH
DEFAULTEST Spare RRC establish DCH_3.4K_SIGNALLING
Direct Transfer Message Flow

UE NodeB RNC CN
Initial DT
RRC RRC
Connect Request
SCCP SCCP
Connect Confirm
SCCP SCCP
Initial UE Message
RANAP RANAP
Common ID
RANAP RANAP

z In Iu interface, radio network layer reports the RANAP

information and NAS information. NAS information is
taken as directed message in RANAP information.

z After the RRC connection between the UE and the UTRAN is successfully set up, the
UE sets up a signaling connection with the CN via the RNC for NAS information
exchange between the UE and the CN, such as authentication, service request and
connection setup. This is also called the NAS signaling setup procedure.

z For the RNC, the signaling exchanged between the UE and the CN is a direct transfer
message. After receiving the first direct transfer message, that is, the Initial Direct
Transfer message, the RNC sets up a signaling connection with the CN on the SCCP.
The procedure is shown in the above figure:

z The specific procedure is given as follows:

After the RRC connection is established, the UE sends the Initial Direct Transfer
message to the RNC via the RRC connection. This message carries the NAS
information content sent to the CN by the UE.

After receiving the Initial Direct Transfer message from the UE, the RNC sends
the SCCP Connection Request (CR) message to the CN via the Iu interface.
The message content is the Initial UE Message sent from the RNC to the CN,
and carries the message content sent from the UE to the CN.

If the CN is ready to accept the connection request, then it returns the SCCP
Connection Confirm (CC) message to the RNC. The SCCP connection is
successfully set up. The RNC receives the message and confirms the signaling
connection setup success.
If the CN cannot accept the connection request, then it returns the SCCP
Connection Reject (CJ) message to the RNC. The SCCP connection setup fails.
The RNC receives the message and confirms the signaling connection setup
failure. Then it initiates the RRC release procedure.

z After the signaling connection is successfully set up, the message sent by the UE to
the CN is forwarded to the RNC via the Uplink Direct Transfer message, and the RNC
converts it into the Direct Transfer message to send to the CN. The message sent by
the CN to the UE is forwarded to the RNC via the Direct Transfer message, and the
RNC converts it into the Downlink Direct Transfer to send to the UE.
Common ID

RRC Connection Setup

Initial DT Initial UE Message
(CM Service Request)
Common ID

DL DT (Authentication Request)
DL DT (Authentication Request)
DL DT (Authentication Response)
DL DT (Authentication Response)

Security Mode Command

Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command Complete
Security Mode Command Complete

UL Direct Transfer (Setup)

Direct Transfer (Setup)

Direct Transfer (Call Proceeding)

DL Direct Transfer (Call Proceeding)

RAB Assignment

z Authentication is used for the validity of CN and UE.

z Security flow includes the encrypt process and integrity protection.
RAB Establishment Flow
UE NodeB RNC CN
RAB Ass Req
RANAP RANAP

Q.AAL2 AAL2 Setup Req Q.AAL2

Q.AAL2
AAL2 Setup Rsp Q.AAL2

RL Recfg Prep NBAP

NBAP
RL Recfg Ready NBAP
NBAP
AAL2 Setup Req Q.AAL2
Q.AAL2
AAL2 Setup Rsp Q.AAL2
Q.AAL2
DL Sync FP
FP
UL Sync
FP FP

RRC
RB Setup
RRC
RL Recfg Commit
NBAP NBAP

RRC
RB Setup Complete
RRC
RAB Ass Rsp
RANAP RANAP

z RAB is the carrier which is provided by AS for NAS.

z RAB is the carrier in user plane, which is for transferring the voice service, data service
or multiple media service between UE and CN.
z RAB establishment flow mainly includes the AAL2 PATH establishment of Iu and Iub
interface, also includes the reconfiguration process of radio resource.
z The RAB refers to the user plane bearer that is used to transfer voice, data and
multimedia services between the UE and the CN. The UE needs to complete the RRC
connection establishment before setting up the RAB.
z The RAB setup is initiated by the CN and executed by the UTRAN. The basic
procedure is as follows:
1. First the CN sends the RAB assignment request message to the UTRAN,
requesting the UTRAN to establish the RAB.
2. The SRNC in the UTRAN initiates the establishment of the data transport bearer
between the Iu interface and the Iub interface (Iur interface).
3. The SRNC sends the RB setup request to the UE.
4. After completing the RB establishment, the UE responds to the SRNC with the
RB setup complete message.
5. The SRNC responds to the CN with the RAB assignment response message
and the RAB setup procedure ends.
z When the RAB is successfully established, a basic call is set up and the UE enters the
conversation process.
NAS Signaling (CS)
UE MSC MSC UE
Paging
RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup
RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup
CM Service Request
Paging Response
Authentication Request
Authentication Request
Authentication Response
Authentication Response
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command Complete Security Mode Command Complete
Setup Setup
Call Proceeding Call Confirmed
RAB Assignment RAB Assignment
Alerting Alerting
Connect Connect
Connect ACK Connect ACK
Disconnect Disconnect
Release Release
Release Complete Release Complete

UE Outgoing Call UE Terminating Call

z Authentication and security flow are optional.

z CN does not need to the CM Service Response if the security mode is used.
NAS Signaling (PS)
UE SGSN SGSN UE
Paging
RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup
Service Request Service Request
Authenticate and Ciphering Req Authenticate and Ciphering Req
Authenticate and Ciphering Rsp Authenticate and Ciphering Rsp
Security Mode Command Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command Complete Security Mode Command Complete
Service Accept Request PDP Context Activation
Activate PDP Context Req Activate PDP Context Req

RAB Assignment RAB Assignment

Activate PDP Context Accept Activate PDP Context Accept

Deactivate PDP Context Req Deactivate PDP Context Req

Deactivate PDP Context Accept Deactivate PDP Context Accept

UE Outgoing Call UE Terminating Call

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page62
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page63
Concepts about Soft Handover
z Soft handover: the signals from different NodeBs are
merged in RNC

z Softer handover: the signals from different cells, but from

the same NodeB are merged in NodeB

z In the WCDMA system, since the intra-frequency exists among neighboring cells, the
UE can communicate with the network via multiple radio links, and can select one with
good signal quality by comparison when these radio links are merged, thus optimizing
the communication quality. The soft handover can be conducted only in the FDD mode.
The soft handover falls into the following cases according to the locations of the cells.
The first case is the soft handover among difference cells of the Node B. In this case,
the radio links can be merged within the Node B or the SRNC. If they are merged
within the Node B, it is called softer handover. The second case is the soft handover
among different Node Bs within the same RNC and among different RNCs.
z An important issue during the soft handover is the merge of multiple radio links. In the
WCDMA system, the MACRO DIVERSITY technology is adopted for the merge of the
radio links, that is, the system compares the data from different radio links based on
certain standards (such as BER), and selects the data with better quality to send to the
upper layer.
z Soft handover:
Selection combination in uplink
Maximum combination in downlink
z Softer handover
Maximum combination in uplink and downlink
Soft Handover Flow (Intra-RNC)

CN CN CN

SRNC SRNC SRNC

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Before Handover During Handover After Handover

z During the soft handover, two or more radio links are connected with UE, and data in
each RL are same.
z The following are some key concepts about the neighboring cell in the soft handover:
Active set: The set of cells currently used by the UE. The execution result of the
soft handover indicates the increase or decrease of the cells in the active set.
Monitor set: The set of cells that are not in the active set but are being observed
by the UE based on the neighboring cell information from the UTRAN. The UE
measures the cells in the observation set. When the measurement results satisfy
certain conditions, the cells may be added to the active set. Therefore, the
observation set sometimes is also called the candidate set.
Detected set: The set of cells that have been detected by the UE but do not
belong to the active set or the observation set. The UTRAN can request the UE
to report the measurement result of the detected set. Since the cells in the
detected set are not listed in the neighboring cell list, this set is also called the
unlisted set.
Soft Handover Flow

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

z It is no handover in this slide, only one radio links is connected with UE.
Soft Handover Flow

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in NodeB

z It is softer handover. During the handover, the cells in active set belong to one NodeB.
The NodeB uses the RAKE receiver to combine the data, and the UE also combines
the data in RAKE receiver.
Soft Handover Flow

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in RNC

z It is soft handover. During the handover, the cells in active set belong to one RNC, but
different NodeBs. So the UE can combine the data in RAKE receiver. But in uplink, the
data are combined with selection combination in RNC.
Soft Handover Flow (SRNC-DRNC)

Core Network

Serving RNC

Drift RNC

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in SRNC

z It is soft handover. During the handover, the cells in active set belong to different RNCs.
So the UE can combine the data in RAKE receiver. But in uplink, the data are
combined with selection combination in SRNC.
Soft Handover Flow (SRNC Relocation)

Core Network

RNC

Serving RNC

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

z There is no handover, but the SRNC has been changed.

Typical Soft Handover Flow (L3 Signaling)

z Soft handover is triggered by 1A/1B/1C or 1D event

UE RNC
RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control

Measurement Report (1A/1B/1C or 1D)

Active Set Update

Active Set Update Complete

Measurement Control

z The soft handover procedure comprises the following steps:

Based on the Measurement Control information from the RNC, the UE
measures the intra-frequency neighboring cells, and reports the measurement
result to the RNC via Measurement Report.
The RNC compares the reported measurement result with the set threshold to
decide the cells to be added and deleted.
(If some cells are to be added, the RNC notifies the Node B to get ready. )
The RNC notifies the UE to add and/or delete cells via the Active Set Update
message.
After the UE successfully update the active set, UE will send Active Set Update
Complete to inform RNC.
(if the cells are deleted, the Node B will be notified to release the corresponding
resources. )
After the soft handover, perhaps the measurement control information changes,
if it is, RNC will send new Measurement Control to UE.
z The original communication is not affected during the soft handover procedure so that
smooth handover from a cell to another can be successfully completed.
Soft Handover Flow (Add Branch in AS)

z For adding a cell into Active Set, RNC will notify NodeB to prepare the new RL before
sending Active Set Update.
Soft Handover Flow (Del Branch from AS)

z For deleting a cell from Active Set, RNC sends Active Set Update to UE first. After UE
deleting the RL successfully, RNC will inform NodeB to delete the RL.
Hard Handover

CN CN

SRNC SRNC

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Before Handover After Handover

Radio Link can not exist simultaneously

z It is hard handover. The UE disconnects the original radio link, then connects to the
target cell. It happens in intra-frequency, inter-frequency and inter-RAT.
Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
z Intra-Frequency hard handover is triggered by 1D event
UE RNC

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Report (1D)

Decision to
setup new RL

Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Intra-Freq)

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Control (2D & 2F)

Measurement Report(2D)
Decision to enter
compress mode
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Inter-Freq)

Measurement Report
Decision to
setup new RL
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

z Description:
Step 1 to step 5 is similar with soft handover, the differences are:
The SRNC sends the Physical Channel Reconfiguration message carrying the
target cell information to the UE via the downlink DCCH.
After the UE hands over from the source cell to the target cell, the Node B of the
source cell detects the radio link communication failure and then sends the
Radio Link Failure Indication message to the SRNC, indicating the radio link
failure.
After successfully handing over to the target cell, the UE sends the Physical
Channel Reconfiguration Complete message to the SRNC via the DCCH,
notifying the SRNC that the physical cannel reconfiguration is complete.
The Node B where the source cell is deletes the radio link resources, and then
responds to the SRNC with the Radio Link Deletion Response message.
The SRNC adopts the ALCAP protocol to release the Iub interface transport
bearer of the SRNC and the Node B where the source cell is.
Inter-RAT Handover Flow (UMTS->GSM)
UE RNC 3G MSC 3G MSC BSC

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Control (2D & 2F)

Measurement Report(2D)
Decision to enter
compress mode
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Inter-RAT)

Measurement Report (GSM)

Decision to
handover to GSM
Relocation Required
Prepare Handover
Handover Request

Handover Request ACK

Prepare Handover
Response
Relocation Command
Inter-System Handover Command
Handover Complete

Handover Compltet
Send END
Signal Request
Iu Release Command
Iu Release Complete

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Course Learning Objectives
z Review WCDMA and HSDPA evolution and standards

z Define HSDPA protocol stack

z Describe new channels for HSDPA

z Explain the physical channel processing

z HSDPA impact on protocol stack

z Identify HSDPA UE categories

z Define HSDPA protocols of Mac sub-layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page1
References
z 3GPP Release 6 Specification References
TS 25.308 HSDPA overall description stage2
TS 25.211 Physical channel and mapping of transport channels onto
physical channel (FDD)
TS 25.212 Multiplexing and channel coding (FDD)
TS 25.213 Spreading and modulation (FDD)
TS 25.214 Physical layer procedure (FDD)
TS 25.306 UE radio access capabilities
TS 25.321 Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification
TS 25.322 Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol specification
TS 25.331 Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification

2. HSDPA Key Techniques

3. HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

4. HSDPA Physical Layer Processing

5. HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
WCDMA Evolution
WCDMA HSDPA HSUPA
GSM GPRS
R99 R5 R6

EDGE

Downlink Peak Data Rate Downlink Peak Data Rate

(Typical Deployment) (Theoretical Maximum)

GSM 9.6kbps 9.6kbps

GPRS 40kbps 171kbps
EDGE 120kbps 473kbps
R99 WCDMA 384kbps 2.0Mbps
HSDPA 10.0Mbps 14.4Mbps

WCDMA Evolution

WCDMA evolved from GSM/GPRS, inheriting much of the upper layer functionality
directly from those systems. The first commercial deployments of WCDMA are based
on a version of the standards called Release 99.

Enhanced Data rates for GSM Evolution (EDGE) is another system in the GSM/GPRS
family that some operators have deployed as an intermediate step before deploying
WCDMA.

HSDPA was introduced in WCDMA Release 5 to offer higher speed Downlink data
services.

Release 6 introduces the Enhanced Uplink (i.e. HSUPA) that will provide faster data
services for the Uplink.
High Speed Downlink Packet
Access
z What are the benefits of HSDPA
z Higher Data Rates
Peak data rate up to 14Mbps per user

z Higher Capacity
More subscribers and throughput

Further reduces the cost per megabyte

z Richer Application
Low latency improvement for
streaming ,interactive, background
applications

Data Services and High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)

Data Services are expected to grow significantly within the next few years. Current
2.5G and 3G operators are already reporting that a significant proportion of usage is
now due to data, implying an increasing demand for high-data-rate, content-rich
multimedia services. Although current Release 99 WCDMA systems offer a maximum
practical data rate of 384 kbps, the 3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) have
included in Release 5 of the specifications a new high-speed, low-delay feature
referred to as High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA).

HSDPA provides significant enhancements to the Downlink compared to WCDMA

Release 99 in terms of peak data rate, cell throughput, and round trip delay. This is
achieved through the implementation of a fast channel control and allocation
mechanism that employs such features as Adaptive Modulation and Coding and fast
Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ). Shorter Physical Layer frames are also
employed.
Release 99 Packet Data
z How is Packet Data handled in Release 99 (FDD) ?
DCH ( Dedicated Channel )
Spreading codes assigned per user
Closed loop power control
Node B
Soft handover

FACH ( Common Channel )

Common Spreading code
No closed loop power control
Node B
No soft handover

Release 99 Packet Data

There are different techniques defined in the Release 99 specification to enable Downlink
packet data. Most commonly, data transmission is supported using either the
Dedicated Channel (DCH) or the Forward Access Channel (FACH).

The DCH is the primary means of supporting packet data services. Each user is
assigned a unique Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) code
dependent on the required data rate. Fast closed loop Power Control is
employed to ensure that a target Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) is maintained
in order to control the block error rate (BLER). Macro Diversity is supported
using soft handover.

Data transfer can also be supported on the FACH. This common channel employs
a fixed OVSF code. As it needs to be received by all UEs, higher data rates are
generally not supported. Macro Diversity is also not supported and the channel
operates with a fixed (or slow changing) power allocation. Each data block
contains a unique UE identifier that allows a given UE to keep itsown data and
discard that belonging to other UEs.
Release 99 Downlink Limitation
z Dedicated Channel Features ( DCH )
Maximum implemented downlink of 384kbps
OVSF code limitation for high data rate users
Rate change according to burst throughput is slow
Outer loop power control responds slowly to channel

z Common Channel Features ( FACH )

Good for burst data application
Only low data rates supported
Fixed transmit power

Release 99 Downlink Limitations

1. Although WCDMA Release 99 standard allows for maximum data rates of up to 2.0
Mbps, it has only been widely implemented with a maximum data rate of 384 kbps.
This data rate is achieved by allocating a dedicated channel to each user. The use of
dedicated resources can be a limitation, especially for data applications with bursty
characteristics. Each dedicated channel uses an OVSF code. Shorter codes are used
for higher data rates and longer codes for lower data rates. When an OVSF of a
particular length is used, all longer OVSF codes derived from that code become
unavailable. This limits the number of simultaneous high speed data users in a given
cell. The Release 99 standards provide support for a Secondary Scrambling Code,
which eases this limitation, but it has not been widely implemented in commercial
systems and will likely be removed from future versions of the specification. The data
rate of a dedicated channel can be adjusted to accommodate varying requirements of
a data service application, but the procedure for doing so is slow and thus inefficient.
Capacity is controlled both by the maximum amount of PA power that is available and
by the power requirement of each data service. In dedicated mode, fast power control
is used so that a target Eb/No is achieved on the Downlink. However, the required
Eb/No set point changes at a much slower rate. This can result in wasted resources
whereby a better than required Eb/No is achieved for the required BLER.
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
z The differences between HSDPA and R99
Set of high data rate channel

Channels are shared by multiple users

Each user may be assigned all or part of the resource every 2ms
Big shared pipe
Code multiplexing for HSDPA

Node B
HSDPA user#1
2ms
HSDPA user#2
HSDPA user#3
a set of HS-PDSCHs
HSDPA user#4

High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA)

In HSDPA, the NodeB allocates a set of high speed channels. These channels are
assigned to a user using a fast scheduling algorithm that allocates the channels
every 2 ms. All or part of the channels may be assigned to a given user during
any 2 ms period.

The rapid scheduling of HSDPA is well-suited to the bursty nature of packet data.
During periods of high activity, a given user may get a larger percentage of the
channel bandwidth, while it gets little or no bandwidth during periods of low
activity.
High Speed Downlink Packet Access
z How will HSDPA figure out the limitations of R99
Adaptive modulation and coding
Fast feedback of Channel condition
QPSK and16QAM
Channel coding rate from 1/3 to 1

Multi-code operation
Multiple codes allocated per user
Fixed spreading factor

NodeB fast Scheduling

Physical Layer HARQ ( Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest )

HSDPA Basic Concepts

In HSDPA a common channel with fixed power is employed for data transfer. Users
are separated in both the time and code domains. A fixed spreading factor is
employed but multi codes operation is possible for increased data rates.

Adaptive Modulation and Coding (AMC) replaces the role of power control so that
the modulation and coding rate are changed depending on the channel condition.

This is accomplished by locating the scheduling algorithm for channel allocation at

the NodeB instead of the RNC in Release 99.
High Speed Downlink Packet
Access
z Comparison Summary
Mode DCH FACH HSDPA
Channel Type Dedicated Shared Shared

Closed Inner
Fixed Power
Loop at 1500Hz
Power Control & Closed Outer
No with link
adaptation
Loop

Soft Handover Supported Not Supported Not Supported

Suitability for
Poor Good Good
Bursty
Data Rate Medium Low High

Comparison Summary

DCH and FACH are the two Release 99 channels typically used for packet switched
data in practice. The advantages and disadvantages of each approach are
apparent. Whereas DCH is suited for medium high data rates (with a maximum
rate of 384 kbps), rate switching is slow, making it unsuitable and inefficient for
bursty data such as a Web browsing application. By contrast, FACH provides
good support for bursty data but is a common channel without power control or
other mechanism to account for channel conditions. This makes it unsuitable for
higher data rates. Switching from DCH to FACH is slow and inefficient, due in
part to the typical timer values used to detect inactivity

HSDPA is suitable to high date rates for a bursty application, though we will see
that the absence of soft handover makes it more suitable for stationary or low-
mobility users than for highly mobile users. HSDPA typically operates at a fixed
power, but feedback from the UE can instruct the NodeB to use lower power
when the UE is in good channel conditions. Link adaptation is used to adjust
data rate, coding, and modulation to quickly respond to changing channel
conditions.
Contents
1. HSDPA Introduction

2. HSDPA Key Techniques

3. HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

4. HSDPA Physical Layer Processing

5. HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

Block 1? Block 1
+
Block 1?

AMC (Adaptive Modulation & Coding) HARQHybrid ARQwith Fast Scheduling based on
CQI and fairness
Data rate adapted to radio condition on 2ms Soft combing
Scheduling of user on 2ms
Reduce round trip time

SF16, 2ms and CDM/TDM 16QAM 3 New Physical Channels

Dynamic shared in Time and code domain 16QAM in complement to QPSK
for higher peak bit rates

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
Adaptive Modulation and Coding
z AMC ( Adaptive Modulation and Coding ) in accordance with CQI
( Channel Quality Indicator )
Adjust data rate to compensation channel condition
Good channel condition higher data rate

Bad channel condition lower data rate

Adjust channel coding rate to compensation channel condition

Good channel condition channel coding rate is higher e.g. 3/4

Bad channel condition channel coding rate is higher e.g. 1/3

Adjust the modulation scheme to compensation channel condition

Good channel condition high order modulation scheme e.g. 16QAM

Bad channel condition low order modulation scheme e.g. QPSK

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13
Adaptive Modulation and Coding
z AMC ( Adaptive Modulation and Coding ) based on CQI
( Channel Quality Indicator )
CQI ( channel quality indicator )
UE measures the channel quality and reports to NodeB every
2ms or more cycle
NodeB selects modulation scheme ,data block size based on CQI
Power Control Rate Adaptation

Bad channel condition Bad channel condition

More power low data rate
Good channel condition Node B Node B
Good channel condition
less power
high data rate

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page14
CQI mapping table for UE category 10
Transport Number of Reference power
CQI value Modulation
Block Size HS-
HS-PDSCH adjustment
0 N/A Out of range

1 137 1 QPSK 0

2 173 1 QPSK 0

13 2279 4 QPSK 0

14 2583 4 QPSK 0

15 3319 5 QPSK 0

16 3565 5 16-
16-QAM 0

17 4189 5 16-
16-QAM 0

18 4664 5 16-
16-QAM 0

28 23370 15 16-
16-QAM 0

29 24222 15 16-
16-QAM 0

30 25558 15 16-
16-QAM 0

CQI Mapping Table

The CQI table consists of 30 entries, where each entry indicates a different TFRC.
Transport Format Resource Combination (TFRC) points to the combination of number
of HS-PDSCH channelization codes, modulation scheme, and the HS-DSCH
transport block size. The 5-bit CQI reported by a UE is an index into this table
containing all possible TFRC combinations for that UE category. The TFRC
combinations are different for UEs with different HS-DSCH UE categories because of
the differences in the UE capabilities. Along with TFRC, CQI may also indicate a
power offset relative to the current HS-PDSCH power. The CQI table shown in the
slide is for UE categories supporting up to 15 HS-PDSCH codes (HSDPA terminal
category 10)
HSDPA UE Categories
Maximum Maximum Number of Bits of
Minimum
Number of HS- an HS-DSCH Transport Total Number of Soft
UE Category Inter-TTI
DSCH Codes Block Received Within an Channel Bits
Interval
Received HS-DSCH TTI
Category 1 5 3 7298 19200

Category 2 5 3 7298 28800

Category 3 5 2 7298 28800

Category 4 5 2 7298 38400

Category 5 5 1 7298 57600

Category 6 5 1 7298 67200

Category 7 10 1 14411 115200

Category 8 10 1 14411 134400

Category 9 15 1 20251 172800

Category 10 15 1 27952 172800

Category 11 5 2 3630 14400

Category 12 5 1 3630 28800

z HSDPA RF performance depends on UE capability

UE Categories

HSDPA is advertised with data rates up to 14 Mbps. However, the actual HS-DSCH
peak data rate depends on the UEs HS-DSCH category. As shown in the table,
only a category 10 UE can achieve the maximum HSDPA throughput of 14 Mbps
when using all 15 HS-PDSCHs simultaneously.

Factors that decide the UEs HS-DSCH category are:

HS-PDSCH codes Determines the number of simultaneous HS-PDSCH channels

that can be decoded by a UE.

Inter-TTI interval Determines the minimum interval (in terms of HS-DSCH TTI)
between two successive HS-PDSCH assignments. The more HARQ processes a
UE supports, the shorter the inter-TTI interval. A minimum inter-TTI of 1 requires at
least 6 simultaneous HARQ processes.

Transport Block size Determines the maximum size of transport block that can
be sent on HS-DSCH in a TTI. It is dependent on the number of HS-PDSCH codes
and the modulation scheme.

IR buffer size Determines the maximum number of soft bits that can be buffered
by a UE across all simultaneously running HARQ processes.
Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest
z Conventional ARQ
In a conventional ARQ scheme, received data blocks that can not be
correctly decoded are discarded and retransmitted data blocks are
separately decoded

z Hybrid ARQ ( HARQ )

In case of Hybrid ARQ with soft combining, received data blocks that
can not be correctly decoded are not discarded. Instead the
corresponding received signal is buffered and soft combined with later
received retransmission of information bits. Decoding is then applied
to the combined signal

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17
Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest
z Example for HARQ

z The use of HARQ with soft combining increases the effective received
Eb/Io for each retransmission and thus increases the probability for
correct decoding of retransmissions, compare to conventional ARQ

The maximum retransmission amount of HARQ procedure can be set. (NodeB LMT)
Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest
z There are many different schemes for HARQ with soft
combining
z These schemes differ in the structure of retransmissions
and in the way by which the soft combining is carried out at
the receiver
In case of Chase combining ( CC ) each retransmission is an
identical copy of the original transmission
In case of Incremental Redundancy ( IR ) each retransmission
may add new redundancy

HARQ is a technique that transmitter sends new set of parity bits if the previous
transmission failed (NACK) and receiver buffer the failed decodes for soft combining with
later retransmission.

Example for Chase Combining ( CC ) Scheme

Example for Incremental Redundancy ( IR ) Scheme
Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest
z Each HSDPA assignment is handled by a HARQ process
HARQ processes run in NodeB and UE

z The UE HARQ process is responsible for:

Attempting to decode the data

Deciding whether to send ACK or NACK

Soft combining of retransmitted data

z The NodeB HARQ process is responsible for:

Selecting the corrected bits to send according to the selected
retransmission scheme and UE capability

Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request (HARQ)

To support consecutive assignments, HSDPA defines a Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request

(HARQ) protocol. This protocol is implemented in both the NodeB and the UE, and
consists of procedures implemented in both the MAC-hs sublayer and the Physical
Layer. When the NodeB assigns an HSDPA subframe to a UE, it also assigns a HARQ
process to handle the data transfer. The UE HARQ process is responsible for

Decoding the initial transmission

Sending an ACK or NACK

Soft-combining retransmissions of the data packet until it is successfully

decoded or until NodeB aborts the packet

The maximum number of HARQ processes that a UE supports is a function of its HSDPA
category. The minimum number of HARQ processes supported by any UE is 2, which
corresponds to a UE that uses an inter-TTI interval of 3.
Short TTI (2ms)
z Shorter TTI ( Transmission Time Interval ) is to reduce RTT
( round trip time )

z Shorter TTI is necessary to benefit from other functionalities

such as AMC, scheduling algorithm and HARQ

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22
Shared Channel Transmission
z In HSDPA, a new DL transport channel is introduced call HS-
DSCH. The idea is that a part of the total downlink code resource
is dynamically shared between HSDPA and Release 99

Shared channel transmission implies that a certain amount of radio resource of a cell
(code and power) is seem as a common resource that is dynamically shared between
users.
Shared Channel Transmission
z In HSDPA, a new DL transport channel is introduced call HS-
DSCH. The idea is that a part of the total downlink power resource
is dynamically shared between HSDPA and Release 99

Power margin for DCH power control

Time

Total Power Higher power utility

efficiency

Allowed power for HSDPA

DPCH

Power for CCH

Time

Shared channel transmission implies that a certain amount of radio resource of a cell
(code and power) is seem as a common resource that is dynamically shared between
users.

The NodeB transmit power allocation algorithm is not specified by the standard, but two
possible schemes are likely:

Static A fixed amount of power is allocated to HSDPA channels (i.e. the HS-PDSCHs
and HS-SCCHs). Remaining power is distributed among common channels and power
controlled dedicated channels. The overall transmit power fluctuates as a function of
the power controlled channels.

Dynamic HSDAP( i.e.HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH ) power is allocated dynamically as

a function of the remaining available power, which fluctuates due to the power
controlled dedicated channels. The overall transmit power of the cell remains constant.

The above diagram does not consider the Node Bs power margin, whereby the Node Bs
power fluctuates. The Node Bpower doesnt really remain constant, due to the peak-to-
average ratio of transmit power.
Shared Channel Transmission
z The codes are assigned to HSDPA user only when they are actually to be
used for transmission, which leads to efficient code and power utilization
z In HSDPA, the idea is that a part of the total downlink code resource is
dynamically shared between a set of HSDPA users

There can be multiple (up to 15) HS-PDSCHs in a serving cell, which enables use of both
time division and code division multiple access methods.
Higher-Order Modulation Scheme
z HSDPA modulation scheme
QPSK

16QAM

WCDMA R99 uses QPSK data modulation for downlink transmission. To support higher
data rate, higher order data modulation, such as 16QAM can be used.

Compared to QPSK modulation, higher order modulation is more bandwidth efficient i.e.
can carry more bits per Hertz
Fast Scheduling
z Fast scheduling is about to decided to which terminal the shared
channel transmission should be directed at any given moment

The basic idea of fast scheduling is to transmit at the fading peaks of the channel in order
to increase the throughput and to use resource more efficiently. But this might lead to
large variations in data rate of the users. The trade-off is between the cell throughput
and fairness against users.

There are a number of scheduling algorithms that take into consideration the trade-off
between throughput and fairness:

Round Robin (RR): radio resource are allocated to communication links on a sequential
basis, not taking into account the instantaneous radio channel conditions experienced
by each link.

Max C/I: for maximum cell throughput ,the radio resource should be as much as possible
be allocated to communication links with the best instantaneous channel condition.

Proportional Fair (PF): allocates the channel to the user with relatively best channel
quality.

Enhanced Proportional Fair (EPF): allocates the channel to the user according to
relatively best channel quality, fairness, guarantee bit rate requirement.
HSDPA New Physical Channels

2. HSDPA Key Techniques

3. HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

4. HSDPA Physical Layer Processing

5. HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

Release 99 Channels
This diagram shows possible mappings of logical, transport, and physical channels
in the control and user planes for UMTS Release 99.
Some channels exist only in Physical Layer (CPICH, SCH, DPCCH, AICH, PICH).
These channels carry no upper layer signaling or user data.
Transport channels carry the following types of information:
Broadcast Control Channel (BCH) Broadcast information that defines overall
system configuration.
Paging Channel (PCH) Paging notification messages. A Paging Indicator
Channel (PICH) is associated with a PCH to allow a UE to quickly determine
whether it needs to read the PCH during its assigned paging occasion.
Forward Access Channel (FACH) Common Downlink signaling messages. Also
carries dedicated Downlink signaling and user information to a UE operating in
Cell_FACH state.
Random Access Channel (RACH) Common Uplink signaling messages. Also
carries dedicated Uplink signaling and user information to a UE operating in
Cell_FACH state.
Dedicated Channel (DCH) Dedicated signaling and user information for a UE
operating in the Cell_DCH state. DCH is mapped to a Dedicated Physical Data
Channel (DPDCH). An associated Dedicated Physical Control Channel (DPCCH)
carries Physical Layer control information, such as power control commands.
HSDPA Physical Layer Channels
z New HSDPA Channels
High Speed Downlink shared Channel ( HS-DSCH )
Downlink Transport Channel

High Speed Shared Control Channel ( HS-SCCH )

Downlink Control Channel

High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel ( HS-PDSCH )

Downlink Physical Channel

High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel ( HS-DPCCH )

Uplink Control Channel

HSDPA introduces three new Downlink channels and one new Uplink channel:

High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH) A Downlink transport

channel shared by several UEs. The HS-DSCH is associated with one or
several Shared Control Channels (HS-SCCH). It operates on a 2 ms
Transmission Time Interval (TTI).

High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) A Downlink physical channel

used to carry Downlink control information related to HS-DSCH transmission.
The UE monitors this channel continuously to determine when to read its data
from the HS-DSCH, and the modulation scheme used on the assigned physical
channel.

High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) A Downlink

physical channel shared by several UEs. It supports Quadrature Phase Shift
Keying (QPSK) and 16-Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (16-QAM) and multi-
code transmission. It is allocated to a user at 2 ms intervals.

High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH) An Uplink

physical channel that carries feedback from the UE to assist the Node Bs
scheduling algorithm. The feedback includes a Channel Quality Indicator (CQI)
and a positive or negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) of a previous HS-
DSCH transmission.
HSDPA Physical Channels

HSDPA Channels (continued)

Only dedicated logical user data channels may be mapped to HS-DSCH. When
DTCH is mapped to HS-DSCH, only Unacknowledged Mode (UM) and
Acknowledged Mode (AM) channels may be used.

A UE operating in HSDPA mode also has at least one Release 99 dedicated

channel (DCH/DPDCH) allocated, to ensure that RRC and NAS signaling can
always be sent, even if the UE is not able to receive the high speed channels.

The HS-DPCCH is a Physical Layer control channel. It carries no upper layer

information, and therefore has no logical or transport channel mapping.
Physical layer Frame Duration
z Frame Duration
10ms radio frame, 15 slots
2ms HSDPA sub-frame, 3 slots
1 HS-DSCH Transport Time interval (TTI)

z Slot Duration R99 radio frame

10ms
2560chips per slot
7680 chips per HSDPA sub-frame HSDPA sub-frame
2ms
z Symbol Timing
QPSK: 2bits / symbol
Time slot
16QAM: 4bits / symbol 0.67ms

Physical Layer Frame Timing

A basic WCDMA radio frame is 10 ms long and has 15 slots. HSDPA introduces the
notion of sub-frames within a WCDMA radio frame. An HSDPA sub-frame is 2 ms (3
slots) long and all the HS-channels use this sub-frame timing. The sub-frame allows
fast user switching where the shared channel can potentially be assigned to a different
user every sub-frame. As the HSDPA sub-frame is only 2ms long, it alleviates the need
for power control. HS-DSCH has a fixed TTI of 2 ms. Each HS-DSCH transport block
is mapped to an HS-PDSCH sub-frame. HS-SCCH and HSDPCCH also use the 2ms
sub-frame to transmit control and feedback respectively.

Each HSDPA sub-frame has 3 slots and each slot is comprised of symbols. The number
of symbols in a slot depends on the spreading factor used for that channel. HS-PDSCH,
HS-SCCH,and HS-DPCCH use SF 16, 128, and 256 respectively, giving number of
symbols per slot as 160 (HS-PDSCH), 20 (HS-SCCH), and 10 (HS-DPCCH).

A symbol is made up of 1 or more bits and each bit is spread using SF to an equivalent
number of chips. A QPSK symbol consists of two consecutive bits, one bit each
mapped onto the I and Q branch. A 16-QAM symbol, on the other hand, has four
consecutive bits with two bits on each branch.

HSDPA use 2ms TTI. Shorter TTI mechanism can reduce the latency ,and then increase
fast schedule times. Shorter TTI mechanism can better trace the variation of wireless
environment
HS-PDSCH sub-frame Structure
z HS-PDSCH sub-frame structure
3 time slots constituted one TTI (2ms) , only one TB will be sent during one TTI
Fixed spreading factor ( SF=16 )
May use QPSK or 16QAM modulation scheme
Up to 15 HS-PDSCH may be assigned simultaneously
UE capability indicated max. number of codes it supports

All HS-PDSCH used to carry users data

UE can be assigned multiple OVSF code ( SF=16 ) based on UE Categories

HS-PDSCH

When the UE decodes the HS-SCCH and determines that there is an HS-DSCH
assignment in the next TTI, it decodes the assigned HS-PDSCHs. Each HS-PDSCH
uses an OVSF of length 16. If multiple HS-PDSCHs are assigned simultaneously to
one UE, they must use consecutive OVSF codes. The HS-SCCH indicates the first
OVSF code and the number of codes for each assignment.

The High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS- PDSCH) is used to carry the
High Speed Downlink Shared Channel (HS-DSCH).

An HS-PDSCH may use QPSK, 16QAM or 64QAM modulation symbols. In above figure,
M is the number of bits per modulation symbols i.e. M=2 for QPSK, M=4 for 16QAM
and M=6 for 64QAM.

A UE is a member of one of 12 categories, as a function of its hardware capabilities. Each

category represents different values of the following parameters:

Number of simultaneous HS-PDSCH codes (5, 10, or 15)

Maximum transport block size

Inter-TTI interval minimum time between consecutive assignments.

Incremental redundancy buffer size used to soft-combine symbols from

retransmissions.
HS-SCCH sub-frame Structure
z HS-SCCH sub- frame structure
3 time slots constitutes one TTI ( 2ms )
HS-SCCH SF=128, QPSK only, Fixed rate of 60kbps
HS-SCCH carries the following control messages: Xue, Xccs, Xms, Xrv, Xtbs,
Xhap and Xnd
UE demodulates HS-SCCH sub-frame and find out the received data
addressed to the UE with Xue. Then UE demodulates HS-PDSCH sub-frame
with Xccs, Xms, Xrv, Xhap, Xtbs and Xnd are used for HARQ Process
UE may need to simultaneous monitor up to four HS-SCCHs

Xue [16bits]:UE identity, Multiple UEs may be monitoring the same set of HS-SCCHs.
Each UE has an assigned identity called the H-RNTI.

Xccs [7bits]:channelization code set, The HS-SCCH indicates which of the OVSF codes
allocated to the HS-PDSCHs will be used. HS-PDSCH uses multi-code transmission,
which means that multiple OVSF codes may be assigned to one UE at the same time

Xms [1bit]:modulation scheme, HS-PDSCH uses either QPSK or 16-QAM modulation.

This can change from one assignment to the next, and HS-SCCH indicates which
method will be used.

Xrv[3bits]:redundancy version, The HARQ protocol supports retransmissions and

incremental redundancy. These parameters allow the UE to differentiate new
transmissions from retransmissions.

Xtbs [6bits]:transport block size, The HS-SCCH indicates how much data will be sent
during the next assignment

Xhap [3bits]:HARQ process number

Xnd [1bit]:new data indicator

HS-DPCCH sub-frame Structure
z HS-DPCCH sub-frame structure
TTI=2ms ( 3 time slots ), SF=256, Fixed rate of 15kbps, carry 2 types of HSDPA
uplink physical layer control message, including ACK/NACK CQI
ACK and NACK notifies NodeB that UE has received correct downlink data or not.
The field defines like this: 1-NACK, 0-ACK
CQI reflects physical channel quality indicator based on CPICH strength, and
reported by period range from 0 to 160ms ( 0 means no transmission ). Usually the
period is 2ms ( one TTI )
ACK/NACK and CQI having different function may be controlled independently by
different parameters.

HS-DPCCH

Whenever the UE is operating in HSDPA mode, it uses the HS-DPCCH to give

feedback to the serving Node B. This feedback consist of two parts:

ACK/NACK The UE sends a positive or negative acknowledgement for each HS-

DSCH assignment. UTRAN may configure the UE to repeat the ACK/NACK, up
to a maximum of 4 transmissions. The first ACK/NACK for a given HS-DSCH
assignment is sent 5 ms (7.5 slots) after the end of the HS-DSCH transmission.

Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) The UE measures the channel quality of the
Downlink CPICH and computes a CQI value. The value is an index into a table,
and corresponds to the maximum data rate that the UE can decode with an error
rate of less than 10%, assuming the channel conditions dont change. UTRAN
may configure the UE to repeat the CQI, up to a maximum of 4 transmissions.
UTRAN may also configure the periodicity of CQI reporting, ranging from 2 ms
to 160 ms.
Uplink HS-DPCCH preamble and postamble

z Transmit Preamble and Postamble on HS-DPCCH around ACK / NACK

z Eases the decoding, which allows HS-DPCCH to operate at lower power

z The general rule of when N_acknack_transmit > 1

In R5, whether the data is received by UE is judged based on ACK/NACK. Pre/Postamble

is introduced since R6. Position is the 1st slot in HS-DPCCH sub-frame, same as
ACK/NACK.

Advantage of Pre/Postamble
More coding gain is introduced, since Node B could judge whether the data is received
by UE on the basis of more correlative slots
If ensuring the same demodulation performance of ACK/NACK, PO (ACK/NACK) could
be reduced. Accordingly, UL interference to be reduced

Problem of Pre/Postamble
More decoding complexity is introduced
More power is consumed by UE to send Pre/Postamble
Associated physical channel A -DPCH
z Besides 3 physical channels on top. There is another physical channel
named DPCH, which is a dedicated channel . DPCH is also called associated
channel used for signalling transmission and power control

z DPCH does not carry service generally, sometimes carry real time (RT)
service such as AMR service

HSDPA Serving Cell

HS_SCCH Downlink
DPDCH&DPCCH (i.e.
associated DPCH)

HS_PDSCH Uplink DPDCH&DPCCH

HS_DPCCH (i.e. associated DPCH)

When a DL RAB is mapped onto the HS-DSCH, UL DCH is set up regardless of the
existence of UL data. UL DCH transmits the UL signaling, UL RLC acknowledgement
message and possible UL service data. DL DCH is set up to transmit the DL signaling.
These DCHs are called associated DCHs.

When the UE is in soft handover or softer handover, the HS-DSCH data can be
transmitted only in the HSDPA serving cell while the DCH data can be transmitted in
all the cells in the active set.

F-DPCH ( Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel ) is a new downlink physical channel

in release 6. Release 6 supports mapping the SRB to the HS channels on both the
Downlink and the Uplink (provided that HS channels are activated). This results in
faster signaling and, for PS-only calls, the DCH (i.e. associated DCHs) is not reserved
for signaling. To maintain closed loop power control functionality without the DCH (i.e.
associated DCH), a new physical channel is introduced: the F-DPCH (Fractional
DPCH).
Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel (F-DPCH)

z The F-DPCH is a new physical channel in Release 6

z Purpose of F-DPCH introduction is to keep the closed loop power control working
for HSDPA users without an assigned DPCH (A-DPCH)

z The difference of HSDPA physical channels between Release5 and Release6

The F-DPCH is a shared physical channel.

It has only TPC bits information

The Downlink A-DPCH occupies

one code per user in the cell

The F-DPCH is a new physical channel in release 6. Huawei RAN10 product support this
physical channel

The F-DPCH is a special case of the Downlink DPCCH. It has only TPC bits information;
no Pilot or data fields are carried. It multiplexes the TCP bits for a maximum of 10 UEs
with different frame offsets. The TPC bits forwarded on the F-DPCH are needed to
control the power of the HS-DPCCH (Uplink channel)
Fractional Dedicated Physical Channel
(F-DPCH)
zThe F-DPCH carries control information generated at layer 1 (TPC
commands). It is a special case of downlink DPCCH
z Following figure shows the frame structure of the F-DPCH
Each frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot =
2560 chips, corresponding to one power-control period, SF=256
Each user occupy one Symbol in one slot to bear TPC command, Pilot
and TFCI is not needed
Up to 10 users can be multiplexed on one F-DPCH
(Tx OFF) TPC (Tx OFF)
NOFF1 bits NTPC bits NOFF2 bits

Tslot = 2560 chips

Slot #0 Slot #1 Slot #i Slot #14

1 radio frame: Tf = 10 ms

10 users can be multiplexed on one F-DPCH

P-CCPCH frame
offset256chip
TPC TPC UE1 0
TPC TPC UE2 1

TPC UE3 2

TPC UE4 3

TPC UE5 4
TPC UE6 5

TPC UE7 6
TPC UE8 7

TPC UE9 8
TPC TPC UE10 9

Advantage of F-DPCH introduction

Code utilization efficiency is improved up to 90%, especially used for large number
of VoIP users
Problem of F-DPCH introduction
Code utilization efficiency could be downgraded in SHO due to the timing restrictions
on when TPC bits can be transmitted to UEs in SHO zones
HSDPA Physical Channels Timing
z Start of HS-SCCH is aligned with the start of PCCPCH
z HS-PDSCH, subframe is transmitted two slots after the associated
HS-SCCH subframe
10 ms
P -C C P C H R ad io fram e w ith (S F N m o d u lo 2 ) = 0 R a d io fram e w ith (S F N m o d u lo 2 )= 1

3 slo ts = 2 m s

H S -S C C H S u b fram e # 0 S u b fram e # 1 S u b fram e # 2 S u b fram e # 3 S u b fra m e # 4

3 slo ts = 2 m s

H S -P D S C H S u b fram e # 0 S u b fram e # 1 S u b fram e # 2 S u b fram e # 3 S u b fram e # 4

2 slo ts 1 5 slo ts = 1 0 m s

DPCH S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t S lo t
D PC H
~ 7 .5 slo ts
H S -D P C C H
3 slo ts = 2 m s

HSPDA Channel Timing

HSDPA channel timing is based on a time interval of 2 ms, or 3 slots

1. The UE measures the Downlink channel quality and sends a CQI report on the HS-
DPCCH. An ACK or NACK from a previously received block may also be included in
this transmission

2. If the NodeB decides to send data to the UE, it will send information on the HS-SCCH
to assign the physical channel and give the UE information about how the data was
encoded. The earliest that this assignment can be made is in the sub-frame following
the end of CQI report.

3. During the next 2ms HS-DSCH transmission time, one or more HS-PDSCHs carry the
UEs data. The HS-SCCH transmission overlaps the HS-PDSCH transmission

4. After the UE decodes the data, it sends an ACK or NACK on the HS-DPCCH. The UE
must send the ACK or NACK 5ms(i.e. 7.5 slots) after the end of the HS-DSCH
transmission. If the UE sends a NACK, the NodeBmay send the data again during a
later time slot, or may choose not to retransmit the data. A CQI report may also be
included in this transmission
Theoretical HSDPA Maximum Data
Rate
z Theoretical HSDPA Maximum data rate is 14.4Mbps
z How do we get to 14.4Mbps ?
Multi-code transmission
NodeB must allocate all 15 OVSF codes ( SF =16 ) to one UE
Consecutive assignments using multiple HARQ process
NodeB must allocate all time slots to one UE
UE must decode all transmission correctly on the first transmission
Low channel coding gain
Effective code rate = 1
Requires very good channel conditions to decode
16QAM
Requires very good channel condition

Theoretical HSDPA Maximum Data Rate

The theoretical maximum data rate is 14.4 Mbps. The following techniques are used
to achieve this data rate:

Multi-code transmission Up to 15 HS-PDSCH channels may be assigned to a

single UE during one 2 ms TTI.

Consecutive assignments The HARQ procedure allows the NodeB to send back-
to-back assignments at 2 ms intervals.

Lower Coding Gain Higher data rates can be achieved by puncturing more bits for
a higher effective code rate (and thus lower coding gain).

16-QAM This modulation scheme increases the data rate over QPSK by a factor of
2.
More Data Rate Factors
z More factors that affect HSDPA data rate
Inter- TTI interval
Retransmission
ACK / NACK Repetition

z Assuming
5 OVSF code for HS-PDSCH
Consecutive assignment
QPSK
Turbo code rate =1/3
Retransmission
75% of data block decoded on first transmission
25% of data block decoded on second transmission

Other factors that influence the maximum data rate are:

Inter-TTI Interval The interval between consecutive assignments is called the inter-TTI
interval. If the UE supports an inter-TTI interval of 1, then it is capable of receiving a
new HSDPA assignment every 2 ms. Allowed values of the inter-TTI interval are 1, 2,
and 3

Retransmissions If the UE NACKs a transmission, the NodeB may retransmit that data
in a subsequent assignment. The retransmission may consist of identical symbols that
were sent previously, or may be a different redundancy version of the turbo coded
output symbols

ACK/NACK Repetition The NodeB may configure the UE to send the ACK/NACK
transmission up to four times
More Data Rate Factors
z 5 OVSF code for HS-PDSCH
14.4Mbps / 3 = 4.8Mbps
z QPSK
4.8Mbps / 2 = 2.4Mbps
z Turbo code rate =1/3
2.4Mbps / 3 = 0.8Mbps
z Retransmission
0.8Mbps 0.8 = 640 kbps

1 2 3 4 5

Decoded on 1st transmit Decoded on 2nd transmit

2. HSDPA Key Techniques

3. HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

4. HSDPA Physical Layer Processing

5. HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page46
HSDPA Physical Layer Model-
Downlink
NodeB PHY UE PHY

HS-PDSCH carries actual information payload from HS-DSCH

HS-SCCH carries Physical Layer control information including HARQ
parameters, OVSF codes, and UE ID

HSDPA Physical Layer Model Downlink

In 3GPP Release 5, two new Downlink physical channels have been introduced to enable
HSDPA. In addition, the existing R99 channels are also required for HSDPA operation.

HS-PDSCH Transmitted by NodeB to send HS-DSCH data to UEs in the HSDPA

serving cell. Unlike a dedicated channel, this shared channel is assigned to a user for a
2ms period and may be assigned to another user in the next 2ms period. This fast
scheduling rate is well suited for the bursty packet data and helps increase the
capacity of a cell. There can be multiple (up to 15) HS-PDSCHs in a serving cell, which
enables use of both time division and code

division multiple access methods. HS-PDSCH carries user data and has a transport
channel HSDSCH mapped on it.

HS-SCCH Transmitted by NodeB to signal control information to the users in the

HSDPA serving cell. This channel is shared by multiple users and the control
information sent on it is masked with a UE ID. The mask allows a UE to identify if there
is HS-DSCH data for it in the upcoming HS-PDSCH sub-frame and the control
information tells how to decode that data. HS-SCCH does not have a transport channel
mapped on it.
HSDPA Physical Layer Model-
Uplink
NodeB PHY UE PHY

HS-DPCCH carries feedback signaling consisting of HARQ

acknowledgement and channel quality indicator (CQI)

HSDPA Physical Layer Model Uplink

In 3GPP Release 5, there is one new Uplink physical channel. The existing R99 channels
are required for the HSDPA operation.

HS-DPCCH Transmitted by the UE to signal feedback information to Node B. The

feedback information consists of:

1. acknowledgement of data received by the UE on HS-PDSCH

2. Downlink channel quality indicator (CQI)

NodeB uses this feedback information to send retransmissions and to schedule HS-
PDSCH transmissions to UEs. HS-DPCCH doesnt carry any higher layer control or
traffic and doesnt have a transport channel mapped on it.
Downlink HS-PDSCH
z High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-
PDSCH)
Fixed SF 16 with 3 slots format

Uo to 15 HS-PDSCH under one cell

May use QPSK or 16QAM modulation scheme

DL HS-PDSCH High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel

An HS-PDSCH channel carries the actual user payload to the UE. One HS-PDSCH
subframe contains one TTI (2 ms) of HS-DSCH transport channel payload. There is no
transport channel multiplexing in HSDPA so the information contained in HS-PDSCH
subframe is from a single

HS-DSCH transport channel.

An HS-DSCH serving cell can have as many as 15 channelization codes assigned to HS-
PDCH. The HS-PDSCH channels are shared among different users by using time
division, code division or a combination of the two multiple access methods. The
number of HS-PDSCHs that can be simultaneously decoded by a UE depends on the
HS-DSCH UE Category.

The phase reference used for demodulating HS-PDSCH is the same as for the associated
DL DPCH. By default, P-CPICH is used as the phase reference.
Downlink HS-PDSCH
z HS-DSCH Processing chain

z New Physical Layer Procedures in

Release 5
Bit Scrambling

Physical Layer HARQ functionality

HS-DSCH interleaving

Constellation re-arrangement for 16QAM

The HS-DSCH channel coding involves a number of other functions performed by the
NodeBs Physical Layer. The main reason for this additional processing is the dynamic
size of the transport block transmitted in an HS-DSCH TTI. Other reasons include
large HS-DSCH payload size and the possible use of 16-QAM modulation for HS-
PDSCH. Comparing the coding chain for the Release 99 channel with the Release 5
HS-DSCH channel, some blocks have been removed and some new blocks have been
added.

HS-DSCH coding chain does not require:

1. Concatenation, because there is always only one transport block per HS-DSCH TTI.
The transport block size, however, varies from 137 bits to 27952 bits. In case of
retransmission, the transport block size remains the same as of the original
transmission.

2. First DTX insertion, because HS-DSCH doesnt support fixed position transport channel
and thus Blind Transport Format Detection (BTFD).

3. Second DTX insertion, because there is just one transport channel mapped on to HS-
PDSCH.

4. Radio frame segmentation, because HS-DSCH has a fixed TTI of 2 ms, which is equal
to the HS-PDSCH sub-frame duration.

5. Transport channel multiplexing, because there is just one transport channel mapped on
to HS-PDSCH.
HS-DSCH Channel Coding
z Mac delivers one HS-DSCH TB per TTI to
Physical Layer
z CRC Attachment
24 bits CRC added per TB

z Bit Scrambling
Facilitates uniform distribution of 16- QAM
symbols at receiver

z Code Block Segmentation

Turbo encoder has a fixed max. code block
size of 5114 bits
If bit scrambled data is more than 5114 bits,
need to segment into equal code blocks

HS-DSCH Channel Coding

NodeBs MAC-hs delivers the HS-DSCH transport channel data to the Physical Layer in
NodeB. The Physical Layer then performs a number of functions on the HS-DSCH TTI
data before the data is finally mapped to one or more HS-PDSCH physical channels.
CRC Attachment A fixed 24-bit Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is attached to HS-
DSCH TTI data. There is only one transport block per HS-DSCH TTI.
Bit Scrambling Done to avoid non-uniform symbol distribution over 16-QAM
constellation at the receiver. A uniform symbol distribution helps the UE efficiently
decode the received HS-DSCH bits. Typically, the received symbols are uniformly
distributed over the entire constellation. However, certain degenerate HS-DSCH bit
sequences (e.g., the all-ones or all-zeroes sequences) could violate this condition,
leading to an asymmetric HS-DSCH bit distribution (over {0,1}) and hence a non-
uniform 16-QAM symbol distribution at the receiver input. This is true regardless of the
use of turbo-encoding on the HS-DSCH, due to the possibility of transmitting turbo-
codewords comprised predominantly of systematic bits. The estimated performance
loss due to the non-uniform distribution in such very unlikely cases is between
Code Block Segmentation It is done if the number of bits output from the bit scrambler
is more than the maximum input code block size of the FEC encoder. The maximum
encoder code block size in case of HS-DSCH is 5114 bits. If segmentation is
performed, all the resulting segments are of equal size and may require adding some
filler bits to the beginning of 1st code block. The filler bits are all 0s and are transmitted
along with data.
HS-DSCH Channel Coding
z Channel Coding
Rate 1/3 Turbo coder
used for Channel coding
Effective code rate
changes after HARQ

HS-DSCH Channel Coding (continued)

FEC Coding Rate 1/3 turbo coder is used for encoding HS-DSCH bits. FEC coding is
done on one or more code blocks, where code blocks are formed by segmenting bit
scrambled HS-DSCH data (if more than 5114 bits). The output from turbo coder
consists of Systematic bits (original input data bits) and Parity bits. For each input bit,
there is 1 Systematic bit and 2 Parity bits.
First Rate Matching Virtual IR Buffer Second Rate Matching

Systematic
Nsys Nt,sys
bits
RM_S

Parity 1 W
C NTTI Np1 Nt,p1 Ndata
bit bits bit
RM_P1_1 RM_P1_2
separation collection

Parity2
bits Np2 Nt,p2
RM_P2_1 RM_P2_2

Twelve tail bits are added per block after encoding for the trellis termination. The encoded
blocks, when more than one, are serially concatenated and fed to the HARQ block.
The code rate after turbo encoding is 1/3 but the effective coder rate after HARQ rate
matching may be different. An effective code rate of close to 1 is required to achieve
peak throughput of 14.4 kbps.
HS-DSCH Channel Coding
z Hybrid ARQ (HARQ)
Combines ARQ with adaptive channel
coding

NodeB sends new set of parity bits if

previous transmission failed (NACK)

UE buffers the failed decodes for soft

combining with future retransmission

Soft Combining is done before each

channel decoding attempt

HS-DSCH Channel Coding (continued)

Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) HARQ is a technique combining FEC and ARQ methods that
save information from previous failed decode attempts to be used in the future
decoding. There are two different HARQ schemes, Chase Combine and IR, depending
on which bits are chosen to be sent over the air to UE. The redundancy version (RV)
parameters, r and s, indicate to the UE the HARQ scheme used for the current
transmission.

Both HARQ combining schemes soft combine bits from the previous failed decodes with
the currently received retransmission. Soft combining helps minimize the number of
retransmissions. For a retransmission, HARQ uses the same transport block size and
consequently the same number of HS-DSCH bits that were used in the initial
transmission.
HS-DSCH Channel Coding Physical
Layer HARQ Functionality
z Physical Layer HARQ consists of two rate matching stages and a
virtual buffer
1st stage: matches number of input bits to the virtual IR buffer size
IR buffer size is determined by UEs soft memory capability

Puncturing is done if inputs bits exceed the virtual IR buffer size

2nd stage: matches numbers of bits to the number of HS-PDSCH bits

in the given TTI
Redundancy Version (RV) parameters control the output from 2nd stage

Repetition or puncturing is done to perform 2nd stage rate matching

First Rate Matching Virtual IR Buffer Second Rate Matching

Systematic
Nsys Nt,sys
bits
RM_S

Parity 1 W
C NTTI Np1 Nt,p1 Ndata
bit bits bit
RM_P1_1 RM_P1_2
separation collection

Parity2
bits Np2 Nt,p2
RM_P2_1 RM_P2_2

First Transmission
Always self-decodable, RV parameters s = 1
Chase Combining
Each retransmission is self decodable, RV parameter s = 1, Systematic bits are prioritized
Same coded data packet may be sent in each retransmission, Using the same RV
parameter r in each retransmission
Retransmission with a different r value implies different set of punctured bits
Receiver attempts to decode by soft combining multiple copies
Incremental Redundancy (IR)
Retransmissions are not self decodable, RV parameter s = 0, Parity bits are prioritized
Redundant information is incrementally transmitted if initial decoding fails
Each retransmission provides additional redundant bits to the receiver
RV parameter r is different for different set of redundancy bits
Receiver attempts to decode based on accumulated bits
HS-DSCH Channel Coding HARQ Combining Schemes

HARQ combining refers to the combining of the HS-DSCH soft bits in the receiver
(UE). If an HS-DSCH sub-frame transmission is not correctly decoded (CRC failure) by
the UEs Physical Layer the soft bits from this failed decode are buffered in the IR
buffer to be combined with the future retransmissions. This type of combining changes
the effective received code rate with each retransmission and helps in minimizing the
number of retransmissions. There are different types of HARQ combining schemes:

Chase combining requires each retransmission to be self-decodable. The transmitter

may retransmit the same coded data packet in which case the decoder at the receiver
combines multiple copies of the same transmitted packet weighted by the received
SNR. Time diversity gain is thus obtained. Using a different redundancy version
parameter r, a different set of puncture bits can be used in each retransmission.

Incremental Redundancy (IR) is another implementation of the HARQ technique

where retransmissions are not self decodable, i.e., they may have a very low
proportion (or none) of the systematic bits. Additional redundant information, prioritizing
the parity bits, is incrementally transmitted if the decoding fails on the prior attempt.
Retransmitted sub-frames are soft combined with the buffered soft bits to achieve
additional coding gain, which helps the UE to successfully decode the sub-frame.

The RV parameter signaled to the UE indicates the HARQ scheme used, allowing the UE
to use the same scheme for HARQ combining.

RV parameters mapping list (3GPP TS25.212)

HS-DSCH Channel Coding
Segmentation and interleaving
z Physical Channel Segmentation
Segments data equally into P segments
P is number of HS-PDSCHs allocated to UE
Up to 15
Total HS-PDSCH bits per TTI:
P * ( Number of bits per HS-PDSCH channel )
z HS-DSCH interleaving
Block interleaving using 32*30 matrix
Write in rows, read out columns
Done separately on each HS-PDSCH

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page56
HS-DSCH Channel Coding-16QAM
Constellation Re-arrangement

z Bit Reliability
change with bit position within a symbol
is different for 0 and 1 in case of i2 and q2

HS-DSCH Channel Coding 16-QAM Constellation Rearrangement

An optional 16-QAM modulation scheme has been introduced for HS-PDSCH to achieve
high data rates. Constellation rearrangement is required in the case of 16-QAM
modulation because two of the four bits in a 16-QAM symbol have a higher probability
of error than the other two bits. The rearrangement occurs during retransmission and
disperses the error probability equally among all the bits when averaged over
retransmissions.

The reliabilities of the bits mapped to the 16-QAM symbols vary from the most significant
bits (i1, q1) to the least significant bits (i2, q2). These variations reduce the
performance of the turbo decoder with respect to having equal bit reliabilities. By
rearranging the signal constellation during retransmissions, the same bit gets placed at
different positions within a symbol across different retransmissions and the bit
reliabilities are averaged out over the retransmissions. For both Chase combining and
IR, the decoder performance increases with the constellation rearrangement due to a
more homogeneous input of log-likelihood values to the turbo decoder.

The bits output from the HS-DSCH interleaver are taken in groups of four consecutive bits
(i1q1i2q2) and then rearranged based on the value of constellation version parameter
b. NodeB signals this parameter to the UE on HS-SCCH channel so that the UE can
undo this bit rearrangement. In case of QPSK modulation, the constellation
rearrangement block is transparent.
Constellation re-arrangement for 16QAM [TS25.212]

constellation
version Output bit sequence Operation
parameter b

0 v p ,k v p ,k +1v p ,k + 2 v p ,k +3 None

1 v p ,k + 2 v p ,k +3v p ,k v p ,k +1 Swapping MSBs with LSBs

2 v p ,k v p ,k +1 v p ,k + 2 v p ,k + 3 Inversion of the logical values of LSBs

Swapping MSBs with LSBs and

3 v p ,k + 2 v p ,k +3 v p ,k v p ,k +1 inversion of logical values of LSBs
HS-DSCH Physical Channel
Mapping
z Bits are mapped to one or more HS-PDSCH

z Same number of bits/sub-frame on each HS-PDSCH

HS-DSCH Physical Channel Mapping

After constellation rearrangement (only for 16-QAM) or HS-DSCH interleaving (for QPSK),
the HS-DSCH bits are finally mapped to one or more HS-PDSCH channels. This is
called Physical Channel Mapping. A UE may be assigned one or more HS-PDSCH
codes depending on the UE capability, QoS requirement, and the NodeBs radio
resource availability. In case of more than one HS-PDSCH channel assigned to a UE,
the number of bits in the given sub-frame on each

assigned HS-PDSCH channel is the same.

Physical Layer Process Case for HS-
DSCH

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
Downlink HS-SCCH
z High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)
Fixed rate 60kbps (SF 128) channel with one slot format
UE may need to simultaneously monitor up to four HS-SCCHs
More than four HS-SCCHs possible under one cell
QPSK only

DL HS-SCCH High Speed Shared Control Channel

The NodeB transmits control information required for detecting and decoding HS-PDSCH
sub-frames to UEs on HS-SCCH channel. UEs are signaled to monitor a set of HS-
SCCH channels containing up to a maximum of four HS-SCCHs. At any time, only one
of the four HS-SCCHs contains information for a given UE. There may be more than
four active HS-SCCHs under a cell. Multiple users are assigned to the same HS-SCCH
(or set of HS-SCCHs) and thus a

UE can successfully decode the information on this channel only when the information is
intended for that UE. The HS-SCCH information is scrambled with the UE ID, which
enables the desired UE to successfully decode HS-SCCH. The reason for having
multiple HS-SCCHs is to enable NodeB to address multiple UEs in the same sub-
frame.
Downlink HS-SCCH
z HS-SCCH Processing chain

HS-SCCH Channel Coding

Convolutional coding and CRC coding are used as the main channel coding schemes by NodeBfor
the HS-SCCH channel. Part 1 and Part 2 of an HS-SCCH sub-frame are individually coded and
mapped to the allocated slots in a sub-frame. Both Part 1 and Part 2 are scrambled with the UE
ID. The UE ID used for scrambling HS-SCCH is a 16-bit HS-DSCH Radio Network Temporary
Identity (H-RNTI).

Part 1 consists of the following information:

Channelization Code Set Contains the number of in-sequence HS-PDSCH codes assigned to a
UE and the offset of the first code.

Modulation Scheme HS-PDSCH modulation scheme where 0 = QPSK and 1 = 16-QAM.

Part 2 consists of the following information:

Transport Block Size The transport block size used for the corresponding HS-PDSCH sub-frame
is signaled as a 6-bit Transport Format Resource Indicator (TFRI). The actual transport block
size in bits is derived from TFRI and depends on the modulation scheme and the number of HS-
PDSCH channelization codes signaled on HS-SCCH.

HARQ Process ID Contains the HARQ process ID for the corresponding HS-PDSCH sub-frame.
There may be one to eight simultaneous HARQ processes running in a UE.

Redundancy & Constellation Version Contains RV parameters r and s that are used by the
Physical Layer HARQ functionality. If 16-QAM modulation is used, this field also contains the
constellation version parameter b that indicates the rearranged version of 16-QAM constellation
used for the corresponding HS-PDSCH sub-frame transmission.

New Data Indicator Contains 1-bit indicator that toggles every time the NodeB sends new HS-
DSCH data. The indicator is not toggled in case of retransmissions.
HS-PDSCH and HS-SCCH Spreading
and Modulation
z HS-PDSCH is spread with SF 16, scrambled with Primary
Scramble Code
z HS-SCCH is spread with SF 128, scrambled with same code as
HS-PDSCH

The Downlink physical channels (except SCH) are spread to the chip rate with individual
channelization codes and then scrambled with the same scrambling code. All such
channels use QPSK modulation except HS-PDSCH, which can use either QPSK or 16-
QAM.

The Downlink physical channels HS-SCCH and HS-PDSCH consist of a sequence of

binary symbols. In the case of QPSK modulation, each pair of two consecutive
symbols is first serial-to-parallel converted and then mapped to the I and Q branches.
The QPSK modulation mapper maps the even and odd numbered symbols to the I and
Q branch respectively. In the case of 16-QAM modulation, a set of four consecutive
binary symbols nk, nk+1, nk+2, nk+3 (with k mod 4 = 0) is serial-to-parallel converted
to two consecutive binary symbols (i1= nk, i2= nk+2) on the I branch and two
consecutive binary symbols (q1= nk+1, q2= nk+3) on the Q branch and then mapped
to 16-QAM constellation by the modulation mapper. The modulation mapper converts
the binary symbols into the real-valued symbols.
Uplink HS-DPCCH
z High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-
DPCCH)
3 slots format, SF 256, OVSF code Cch,256,64
Fixed power offset ( ACK, NACK, CQI ) relative to Uplink
associated DPCCH
CQI measurement reference period is 3 slots, ending 1 slots before
CQI is sent

UL HS-DPCCH High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel

Each UE operating in the HSDPA mode has an active Uplink HS-DPCCH along with the
dedicated UL DPCCH. The UE uses UL DPCCH as reference for adjusting the HS-
DPCCH channel power. UE transmits HS-DPCCH at a fixed power offset relative to UL
DPCCH but the offset is different for ACK, NACK, and CQI fields. These power offsets
are signaled to UE by UTRAN and are used by UEs Physical Layer to calculate the
HS-DPCCH gain factor (hs). As the HS-DPCCH power is adjusted relative to UL
DPCCH, the Uplink power control is indirectly

adjusting the HS-DPCCH power.

Each subframe (2 ms) of HS-DPCCH has one slot for HARQ ACK/NACK and two slots for
Channel Quality Indicator (CQI) field. UTRAN may configure the UE to repeat each
ACK/NACK and/or CQI report up to three more times in the consecutive subframes. If
there is nothing to acknowledge, i.e., no data received on HS-PDSCH or CRC error on
HS-SCCH, then DTX bits are sent in the ACK/NACK field.

UTRAN configures CQI reporting by signaling CQI feedback cycle parameter to UE.
Based on the feedback cycle parameter, UE may be asked to not send CQI at all or
send CQI at periodic intervals ranging from 2 ms to 160 ms. For example, if the CQI
feedback cycle is 4 ms, the UE reports CQI in every other subframe. Those subframes
not scheduled to report CQI have DTX bits in place of CQI.

CQI value reflect wireless environment quality of previous sub-frame (i.e reference period
in above figure)
HS-DPCCH Channel Coding
z 1 bit ACK/NACK is coded as 10 bits

z 5 bits CQI is coded as 20 bits

z Sub-frame repetition of ACK/NACK and CQI add more reliability

HS-DPCCH Channel Coding

Channel coding is done by UEs Physical Layer to add redundant bits to the HS-DPCCH
information. In general, there are different methods of doing channel coding such as
repetition, convolutional coding, turbo coding, Reed-Muller (RM) coding, etc., but the
basic strategy is to add some redundant bits to the original bit(s). This redundancy
helps the receiver correctly decode the original bits which may have been impaired due
to bad RF channel conditions. The

1-bit ACK/NACK information is coded into 10 bits by repeating the original bit. The 5-bit
CQI information is coded into 20 bits by using RM coding.
HS-DPCCH Spreading and Modulation

z Unique OVSF code Cch,256,64

z Gain factor hs is derived from
power offsets (ACK , NACK ,
CQI)
z Multiplexed on Q branch
z Same scrambling code as on UL
DPCH
z QPSK modulation

HS-DPCCH Spreading and Modulation

The HS-DPCCH channel is I/Q code multiplexed with UL DPCH. Depending on whether
the number of active UL DPDCHs is even or odd, HS-DPCCH is mapped on to I or Q
branch, respectively. The SF used for HS-DPCCH is 256 with OVSF code number Cch,
256, 64 when there is only one active UL DPDCH. The power offsets ACK , NACK ,
and CQI are signaled to UE by UTRAN through higher layer signaling.
Contents
1. HSDPA Introduction

2. HSDPA Key Techniques

3. HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

4. HSDPA Physical Layer Processing

5. HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

UMTS Protocol Stack

The UMTS signaling protocol stack is divided into Access Stratum (AS) and Non-Access
Stratum (NAS). The Non-Access Stratum architecture evolved from the GSM/GPRS
upper layers and is divided into Circuit Switched (CS) and Packet Switched (PS)
protocols.

The Access Stratum consists of three layers:

1. Layer 3 The Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer handles establishment,

release, and configuration of radio resources.

2. Layer 2 Consists of two sub-layers. The Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer
provides segmentation, re-assembly and other traditional Layer 2 functions. The
Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layer multiplexes data and signaling onto
the appropriate channels and controls access to the Physical Layer.

3. Layer 1 The Physical Layer transfers data over the radio link.
UTRAN protocol structure to be found in 25.301

GC Nt DC

Duplication avoidance

GC Nt DC
UuS boundary
C-plane signalling U-plane information

RRC control L3

Radio
control

control

control
control

Bearers

PDCP
PDCP L2/PDCP

BMC
L2/BMC

RLC RLC L2/RLC

RLC RLC
RLC RLC
RLC RLC

Logical
Channels

MAC L2/MAC
Transport
Channels
PHY L1
HSDPA Protocol Stack

1. HSDPA Protocol Stack

1. In a Release 99 PS network, the NAS layer protocols are terminated at the

SGSN. RRC, RLC,and MAC protocols are terminated at the RNC. The Physical
Layer protocol is terminated at the Node B.

2. The Release 5 specifications define a new sublayer of MAC called MAC-hs,

which implements the MAC protocols and procedures for HSDPA. This sublayer
operates at the NodeBand the UE.

3. UTRAN MAC-hs is responsible for fast scheduling of the HS-PDSCHs. The

scheduler determines:
1. To which UEs the channels are assigned.
2. How much data to send.
3. Which modulation scheme to use.
4. Whether to send new data or retransmitted data.
5. Which redundancy version to send.

4. UE MAC-hs is responsible for:

1. Sending ACK or NACK after decoding a block.
2. Re-ordering data blocks before submitting to upper layers, if
retransmissions caused data to be received out of order.
UTRAN Mac Architecture

1. UTRAN MAC Architecture

1. The UTRAN MAC protocol consists of three entities:

2. MAC-hs Responsible for the high speed HSDPA channels and the only entity
of MAC that resides in the Node B. When a UE operates in HSDPA mode,
MAC-hs maps user data and signaling from DCCH and DTCH onto the shared
HS-DSCH transport channels.

3. MAC-c/sh Responsible for common and shared logical (PCCH, BCCH, CCCH,
and CTCH) and transport (PCH, BCH, RACH, FACH) channels. MAC-c/sh
resides in the RNC, and there is one MAC-c/sh entity per RNC. When a UE
operates in Cell_FACH state, MAC-c/sh maps user data and signaling from its
DCCH and DTCH onto the common FACH and RACH transport channels.

4. MAC-d Responsible for mapping data from dedicated logical channels (DCCH
and DTCH) onto dedicated transport channels (DCH). MAC-d resides in the
RNC, and there is one MAC-d entity for each UE to which dedicated logical
channels have been assigned.
UTRAN MAC-hs Architecture

1. UTRAN MAC-hs Architecture

2. Data enters the UTRAN MAC-hs from a set of MAC-d flows. The data is routed to a set
of priority queues with the following properties:

1. Up to 8 priority queues and 8 MAC-d flows are allowed per UE.

2. The queue distribution entity maps each MAC-d flow onto one or more priority
queues.The mapping is configured when the HSDPA operation begins.

3. Each priority queue is mapped to only one MAC-d flow.

3. When data is removed from a priority queue for transmission, it is assigned to a HARQ
process.

4. There are a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 8 HARQ processes per UE. The HARQ
process tracks the ACK/NACK signaling for the data block and determines when
retransmission is necessary.

5. In response to CQI and ACK/NACK signaling on HS-DPCCH, the scheduler decides:

1. To which UEs the HSDPA channels will be assigned.

2. For each scheduled UE, whether to send new data from a priority queue or a
retransmission from a HARQ process.

6. Signaling on HS-SCCH indicates the scheduling decision to the UEs operating in

HSDPA mode.
Mac-hs functions
z Flow Control
The flow control entity controls the HSDPA data flow between
RNC and NodeB

Purpose: to reduce the transmission time of HSDPA data on

the UTRAN side and to reduce the data discarded and
retransmitted when the Iub interface or Uu interface is
congested

The transmission capabilities of the Uu interface and Iub

interface are taken into account in a dynamic manner in the
flow control

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page73
Mac-hs functions
z Scheduling
The scheduling entity handles the priority of the queues and
schedules the priority queues or NACK HARQ processes of the
HS-DSCH UEs in a cell to be transmitted on the HS-DSCH
related physical channels in each TTI

Purpose: to achieve considerable cell throughput capability and

to satisfy user experience

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page74
Mac-hs functions
z HARQ
The HARQ entity handles the HARQ protocol for each HS-
DSCH UE

Each HS-DSCH UE has one HARQ entity on the MAC-hs of

the UTRAN side to handle the HARQ functionality

One HARQ entity can support multiple instances (i.e.HARQ

processes) of stop and wait HARQ protocols

Based on the status reports from HS-DPCCH, a new

transmission or retransmission is determined

The round trip time at the physical layer is 12 ms. Therefore, it is necessary for one UE to
have multiple parallel instances (HARQ processes) of the stop and wait HARQ
protocol to increase the Uu interface throughput

One problem in the receiver caused by multiple HARQ processes is that, in a specific time
window, the TBs may arrive out of sequence. Therefore, it is necessary to have
reordering functionality on the receiver side
Mac-hs functions
z TFRC selection
The TFRC selection entity selects an appropriate transport
format and resource for the data to be transmitted on HS-
DSCH

The transport format includes the transport block size and

modulation scheme. The resource includes the power resource
and code resource of HS-PDSCH

Transport Format and Resource Combination (TFRC) for each

UE is channel quality based, where AMC is the key technique

1. UE MAC-hs Architecture

1. When the UE Physical Layer decodes a data block addressed to it, the
associated HARQ process determines whether to ACK or NACK the block. If an
ACK is sent, the data block is passed to the assigned re-ordering queue.

2. Re-ordering of MAC-hs PDUs is necessary because up to 8 HARQ processes

can be operating on sequentially transmitted data. MAC-hs PDUs can be
received out of order when a HARQ process sends a NACK.

3. The re-ordering queue passes the block up to the disassembly entity when it
receives consecutive data blocks. The disassembly entity takes apart the MAC-
hs PDU into its constituent MAC-d PDUs and passes them up to the appropriate
MAC-d flow for processing by the MAC-d layer.
Data Flow Example
z Data Flow
Transmitter (NodeB)
RNC RLC PDU to NodeB priority queue
NodeB Mac-hs PDU assembly
NodeB HARQ Process

Receiver (UE)
UE HARQ process
UE re-ordering queue
UE Mac-hs PDU disassembly

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page78
Data Flow Example
RNC Mac-d PDU to NodeB Priority
Queue

Data Flow Example RNC MAC-d PDU to NodeBPriority Queue

In this example, two logical channels, DTCH 1 and DTCH 2, are mapped to one MAC-d
flow.

The MAC-d entity in the RNC constructs MAC-d PDUs by prepending a header to each
RLC PDU. The MAC-d header contains a C/T field that identifies the DTCH from which
the data came. The priority DTCH 1 is higher than DTCH 2, so MAC-d selects all the
PDUs from DTCH1, and then all the PDUs from DTCH 2.

The MAC-d flow is mapped to a MAC-hs priority queue. The RNC transfers the data
across the Iub interface to the Node B, where the MAC-hs entity stores the MAC-d
PDUs in the priority queue, preserving the order of the PDUs as sent across the Iub
interface.
Data Flow Example
NodeB Mac-hs PDU Assembly
z Mac-hs PDU structure

Data Flow Example NodeBMAC-hs PDU Assembly

When the scheduler in the NodeB MAC-hs decides to send data from a given priority
queue, it constructs a MAC-hs PDU. The scheduler determines the size of the MAC-hs
PDU as a function of the UEs CQI report, number of HS-PDSCHs, available transmit
power, and other proprietary parameters.
MAC-d PDUs are packed into the MAC-hs PDU sequentially. The MAC-hs PDU is then
sent to the Physical Layer as the HS-DSCH transport block. The MAC-hs PDU header
consists of the
following fields:
Version Flag (VF) Always set to 0 for this release.
Queue Identifier (QID) Identifies the priority queue in the NodeB from which the data
came, and the re-ordering queue in the UE to which the data is being sent.
Transmission Sequence Number (TSN) Used by the re-ordering protocol to ensure
inorder delivery of MAC-d PDUs when retransmissions occur.
Size Index Identifier (SID) When HSDPA operations begin, the RNC sends a signaling
message to the UE that maps valid MAC-d PDU sizes to a set of up to 7 SIDs.
Number (N) Indicates the number of consecutive MAC-d PDUs of the size given by the
previous SID. The maximum number of MAC-d PDUs in a MAC-hs PDU is 70.
Flag (F) One-bit flag field to indicate the end of the MAC-hs header.
Padding MAC-hs adds padding as needed to fill the MAC-hs PDU size (transport block
size) chosen by the scheduler.
Data Flow Example
NodeB HARQ Process

Data Flow Example NodeB HARQ Process

The scheduler chooses a HARQ process from which to send the PDU. The NodeB supports up to 8
HARQ processes for each UE.
The NodeB transmits the HARQ process ID in the second part of the HS-SCCH. A one-bit indicator,
the New Data Indicator (NDI), in the second part of HS-SCCH is toggled whenever a new PDU
is transmitted.
The Physical Layer uses the UEs H-RNTI to scramble the HS-SCCH. When the UE monitors the
HS-SCCH, it looks for subframes scrambled with its H-RNTI, ignoring those that dont match
and processing those that do.
The NodeB sends the MAC-hs PDU to the Physical Layer on the HS-DSCH transport channel. The
Physical Layer processes the data and maps it onto one or more HS-PDSCHs.
The HARQ protocol supports the following features:
Soft combining If the UE NACKs a data block, the NodeB may retransmit the data. The
Physical Layer performs soft combining of the retransmitted symbols with those previously
received.
Stop and Wait (SAW) Each HARQ process, up to a maximum of 8, operates independently on
one data block until that block is correctly decoded or transmission is aborted by the NodeB.
Synchronous ACK/NACK The UE transmits an ACK or NACK for a given block at a fixed time
following reception of the data.
Asynchronous retransmission The NodeB sends a retransmission any time after an NACK
is received. The earliest this can occur is 10 ms after the previous transmission. A more typical
value is expected to be 12 ms, due to internal delays in the Node B scheduling algorithm. A
retransmission could occur later than 12 ms depending on channel quality reported by the UE
and other internal scheduling decisions.
HARQ Protocol signaling on HS-SCCH

HARQ Protocol HS-SCCH Information

The Node B sends control Information for the HARQ protocol on the HS-SCCH. The first
slot of the HS-SCCH is scrambled with the UEs H-RNTI, which identifies the UE to
which this HSDPA assignment belongs. A 16-bit CRC masked with the UEs H-RNTI is
computed over both parts.

The information on HS-SCCH includes:

Channelization Code Set Which HS-PDSCH codes to use, and how many channels.

Modulation Scheme QPSK or 16-QAM

HARQ Process ID Which HARQ process should decode the next HSDPA
assignment.

Transport Format Resource Indicator (TFRI) A 6-bit value that maps to the
Transport Block size of the data.

Redundancy and Constellation Version The redundancy version indicates to the

Turbo decoder which combination of systematic and parity bits will be sent. For 16-
QAM, the constellation version indicates how the symbols were mapped to the
constellation.

New Data Indicator (NDI) A 1-bit value that is toggled whenever new data is sent to
a given HARQ process, to allow it to distinguish a retransmission from a new
transmission.
Data Flow Example
UE HARQ Process

Data Flow Example UE HARQ Process

Each UE HARQ process performs operations within the Physical Layer and within the
MAC-hs layer.

Physical Layer HARQ Process Operations

When the UE decodes its H-RNTI on the HS-SCCH, it prepares to decode the next HS-
DSCH TTI. The HS-SCCH includes a HARQ process ID. In the Physical Layer, the
HARQ process decodes the associated HS-PDSCHs. If the data is decoded correctly,
the data is routed to the MAC-hs part of the HARQ process.

MAC-hs Layer HARQ Process Operations

The MAC-hs HARQ process generates either an ACK or a NACK to be sent in the
subframe numbered 5 in the diagram above. If the UE sends an ACK and the NodeB
decodes the ACK correctly, the earliest that HARQ process 1 can be used for a new
data block is the subframe numbered 8 above. If other data blocks are sent to the UE
during the intervening subframes, they must be assigned to other HARQ processes.
UE HARQ Process flowchart

UE HARQ Process Flowchart

The control flow for a HARQ process in the UE is as follows:

1. When a data block is received, compare the New Data Indicator (NDI) bit with the value

received in the previous block.

If NDI is different, flush data in the buffer and store new data

If NDI is the same and the buffer is empty, this data has already been decoded
correctly, so discard it and send an ACK. This can happen if the Node B
interprets an ACK as a NACK, and retransmits the data block.

If NDI is the same and the buffer is not empty, soft combine the new data with
data already in the buffer.

2. Attempt to decode the data in the buffer.

If correctly decoded, deliver the data to the re-ordering queue, flush the buffer,
and send an ACK.

If incorrectly decoded, keep the data in the buffer and send a NACK.
z HARQ Protocol Errors

Errors can occur in the HARQ protocol if the Node B misinterprets the UEs
ACK/NACK.
If the Node B receives nothing in the HS-DPCCH slot in which it expects
an ACK or NACK, it treats it as a NACK

If the Node B interprets an ACK as a NACK, a packet may be

retransmitted when it was not necessary to do
The UE HARQ process detects this condition by the fact that the New
Data Indicator bit is the same value as the previous transmission, so it
discards the data and sends another ACK

Another type of protocol error occurs if the Node B misinterprets a NACK

as an ACK. In this case, the Node B assumes the UE correctly decoded
the data, so it sends a new data block to the same HARQ process
The HARQ process in UE side must discard the previous transmission and
attempt to decode the new block, sending the ACK or NACK accordingly.
This is a worse error than mistaking an ACK, because data is lost and
must be recovered by higher layer protocols (i.e., RLC)
Data Flow Example
UE re-ordering Queue

Data Flow Example UE Re-ordering Queue

When the UEs HARQ process ACKs the data block, it routes the MAC-hs PDU to a re-
ordering queue, according to the QID given in the MAC-hs header. The re-ordering
queue uses the TSN in the MAC-hs header to put the PDUs in the correct order. The
re-ordering queue routes consecutively received PDUs to the disassembly entity.

If a HARQ process sends a NACK, this can create a hole in the re-ordering queue. The re-
ordering queue buffers subsequent PDUs until either the missing PDU is successfully
received, or the reordering protocol stops waiting for that PDU. Two mechanisms,
timer-based and window-based, are used for stall avoidance. These are examined in
detail in later slides.

This example illustrates a simple case in which consecutive assignments originate from
the same NodeB priority queue and thus are all routed to the same re-ordering queue.
In a more complicated example, data from multiple priority queues can be interleaved
according to the NodeB MAC-hs scheduling decisions.
Data Flow Example
UE Mac-hs PDU Disassembly

Data Flow Example UE MAC-hs PDU Disassembly

The UE MAC-hs entity disassembles the MAC-hs PDU, using the information in the MAC-
hs header to separate the PDUs. It passes the MAC-d PDUs to the MAC-d entity,
which then delivers the PDUs to the DTCH logical channels, using the C/T field to
differentiate channels.
Re-ordering Protocol
z Features of the MAC-hs Re-ordering Protocol
Each reordering queue operates independently
Control information in MAC-hs header
Queue ID (QID), 3 bits
Transmission Sequence Number (TSN), 6 bits

In-sequence delivery of MAC-d PDUs to RLC

HARQ protocol may deliver data out of sequence
RLC requires in-sequence delivery

Re-ordering Protocol MAC-hs Header

The MAC-hs PDU header consists of the following fields:

Version Flag (VF) Always set to 0 for this release.

Queue Identifier (QID) Identifies the priority queue in the Node B from which the
data came, and the re-ordering queue in the UE to which the data is being sent.

Transmission Sequence Number (TSN) Used by the re-ordering protocol to ensure

in-order delivery of MAC-d PDUs when retransmissions occur.

Size Index Identifier (SID) When HSDPA operations begin, the RNC sends a
signaling message to the UE that maps valid MAC-d PDU sizes to a set of up to 7 SIDs.

Number (N) Indicates the number of consecutive MAC-d PDUs of the size given by
the previous SID. The maximum number of MAC-d PDUs in a MAC-hs PDU is 70.

Flag (F) One-bit flag field to indicate the end of the MAC-hs header.

Padding Padding as needed to fill the scheduled MAC-hs size.

Re-ordering Protocol
In-sequence Delivery of Mac-hs PDUs

Re-ordering Protocol In-sequence Delivery of MAC-hs PDUs

When a HARQ process sends a NACK, a hole is created in the re-ordering queue for
which that PDU was intended. As subsequent PDUs are received, the re-ordering
queue buffers those PDUs to prevent them from being delivered out of order to the
RLC layer above MAC-hs.

When the missing PDU is received correctly, the re-ordering queue inserts it into the
correct position in the buffer and delivers it and all subsequent consecutive PDUs that
are awaiting delivery.
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA Overview

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Development of Mobile communication

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

3G Evolution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

3G Spectrum Allocation

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

3G Application Services

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Multiple Access Technology

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Duplex Thechnology

Duplex Thecnology
- Frequency division duplex (FDD)
- Time Division Duplex (TDD)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Duplex Technology

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Differences FDD & TDD

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Architecture

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Architecture

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Evolution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Evolution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Uu Interface Protocol Structure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

General Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UMTS Protocol Architecture:
The Complete Picture (Packet Switched)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UMTS Protocol Architecture:
The Complete Picture (Circuit Switched)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UMTS Protocol Architecture:
Iub Interface Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Source Coding in WCDMA

The WCDMA system adopts the adaptive multi-rate (AMR) speech

coding.
- A total of eight coding modes are available. The coding rate ranges from 12.2 Kbps to
4.75 Kbps.
- Multiple voice rates are compatible with the coding modes used by current mainstream
mobile communication systems. This facilitates the design of multi-mode terminals.
- The system automatically adjusts the voice rate according to the distance between the
user and the NodeB, thus reducing the number of handovers and call drop.
- The system automatically decreases the voice rate of some users according to the cell
load, thus saving power and containing more users.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Coding in WCDMA

Channel coding can enhance symbol correlation to recover signals in

the case of interference.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Code type
- Voice service: Convolutional code (1/2 and 1/3).
- Data service: Turbo code (1/3).

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Interleaving

Interleaving is used to damage symbol correlation and reduce the impact

caused by fast fading and interference of the channel.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Self Correlation and Mutual Correlation of Code
Words

Different users adopt different spreading code words, such as x1(t) ,

x2(t) .
- Self correlation determines multipath interference.
- Mutual correlation determines multiple access interference.

Self-correlation function
- R() =<x1(t) x1(t+) >

Mutual-correlation function
- V() =<x1(t) x2(t+) >

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Spreading Principle

Users who need to send information: UE1, UE2 and UE3

- UE1 uses c1 for spreading: UE1 x c1
- UE2 uses c2 for spreading: UE2 x c2
- UE3 uses c3 for spreading: UE3 x c3
- c1, c2 and c3 are orthogonal to each other
Information sent: UE1 x c1 + UE2 x c2 + UE3 x c3

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential
De-spreading Principle

UE1 uses c1 for de-spreading.

- (UE1 x c1 + UE2 x c2 + UE3 x c3) x c1
= UE1 x (c1 x c1) + UE2 x (c2 x c1) + UE3 x (c3 x c1)
= UE1 x 1 + UE2 x 0 + UE3 x 0
= UE1
In the same way, UE2 uses c2 for de-spreading and UE3 uses c3 for
de-spreading to get their own signals.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

De-spreading Principle

UE1c1 UE2c2 0 -2 0 -2 0 +2 0 +2
UE1 de-spreading with c1: +1 -1 +1 -1 +1 -1 +1 -1
De-spreading result: 0 +2 0 +2 0 -2 0 -2
Integral: +4 -4
Decision: +4/4 = +1 -4/4 = -1

UE2 de-spreading with c2: +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1 +1

De-spreading result: 0 -2 0 -2 0 +2 0 +2
Integral: -4 +4
Decision : -4/4 = -1 +4/4 = +1

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Spectrum Analysis of Spreading & Dispreading
in WCDMA-3G

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Spectrum Analysis of Spreading & Dispreading
in WCDMA-3G

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Spreading and Scrambling

Chips after
spreading
Symbols 3.84Mcps and
xx sps 3.84M
scrambling

OVSF code Scrambling

code
3.84Mcps

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Channelization Code
Cch,4,0 =(1,1,1,1)
Cch,2,0 = (1,1)
Cch,4,1 = (1,1,-1,-1)

Cch,1,0 = (1)
Cch,4,2 = (1,-1,1,-1)

Cch,2,1 = (1,-1)
Cch,4,3 = (1,-1,-1,1)

SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Channelization Code

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Purpose of WCDMA Channelization Code

Channelization code is used to distinguish different physical channels of

one transmitter
For downlink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to separate
different physical channels of one cell
For uplink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to separate
different physical channels of one UE
For voice service (AMR), downlink SF is 128, it means there are 128
voice services maximum can be supported in one WCDMA carrier;
For Video Phone (64k packet data) service, WCDMA downlink SF is 32,
it means there are 32 voice services maximum can be supported in one
WCDMA carrier.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Purpose of WCDMA Scrambling Code

Scrambling code is used to distinguish different transmitters

For WCDMA downlink, scrambling code is used to separate different
cells in one carrier
For WCDMA uplink, scrambling code is used to separate different UEs in
one carrier
In addition to spreading, part of the process in the transmitter is the
scrambling operation. This is needed to separate terminals or base
stations from each other.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Scrambling in the WCDMA System

Downlink: Different cells have different downlink scrambling codes.

- Each cell is configured with a unique downlink scramble. The UE identifies a cell
based on the scramble.
- The OVSF code is used to distinguish different users in a cell.
Uplink: Scrambles are used to distinguish different users.
- In one cell, each user is configured with a unique uplink scrambling code.
- The OVSF code is used to distinguish the services of a user.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Primary Scrambling code

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Modulation Overview

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Modulation Overview

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Modulation Overview

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Demodulation

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Modulation

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Processing Procedure of WCDMA System

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Propagation

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Fading

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Fading Categories

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Diversity Technique

Method for improving the reliability of a message signal by using two or

more communication channels with different characteristics.
The following classes of diversity schemes can be identified:
- Time diversity: Multiple versions of the same signal are transmitted at different
time instants
- Frequency diversity: The signal is transmitted using several frequency
channels or spread over a wide spectrum that is affected by frequency-
selective fading
- Space diversity: The signal is transmitted over several different propagation
paths. In the case of wired transmission, this can be achieved by transmitting
via multiple wires
- Polarization diversity: Multiple versions of a signal are transmitted and
received via antennas with different polarization.
- Multiuser diversity: Multiuser diversity is obtained by opportunistic user
scheduling at either the transmitter or the receiver.
- Cooperative diversity: Achieves antenna diversity gain by using the
cooperation of distributed antennas belonging to each node.
www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential
Rake Receiver

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

THANKS

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Radio Interface & Physical Layer

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Development of Mobile communication

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Architecture

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Uu Interface Protocol Structure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Concepts

Layer 1: Physical layer- This layer is responsible for transporting data

across the available physical path (radio link). Main jobs of physical layer
are :
1. Forward error correction(FEC)
2. Interleaving
3. Transport channel multiplexing
4. Channel quality measurements
5. Synchronization
6. Spreading , scrambling, modulation

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Concepts

Layer 2 : Data link layer It is the upper neighbor of the physical layer.
3GPP divides it into the radio link control (RLC) and the medium access
control(MAC) layer. It delivers data block by block to layer 1 via transport
channels (or fetches the data when receiving).

In the other direction, layer 2 communicates with the adjoining network

layer via Logical channels.

The RLC and MAC layers have the following essential functions:
- 1. Mapping of logical channels on transport channels
- 2. Selection of the transport format based on current needs
- 3. Data encryption
- 4. Error protection as a function of the desired QOS
- 5. Acknowledgement of data blocks and requests for retransmission in case of
errors

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Concepts

Layer 3 : Network Layer(RRC Layer): RRC layer is directly above the

layer 2 and is responsible for radio resource control. The main RRC
tasks include :
1. Broadcasting of system information
2. Establishment and clear down a RRC connection
3. Management of radio connections
4. Cell selection in IDLE mode
5. Querying and evaluation of physical layer measurements

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Concepts

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RAB, RB, RL

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Mapping

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Logical Channel

Control Channel (Signaling) Traffic Channel

(User Data)

Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH)

Dedicated Traffic
channels (DTCH)
Paging Control Channel (PCCH)

Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) Common Traffic

Channel (CTCH)

Common Control Channel (CCCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Transport Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Transport Channel
Dedicated Transport Channel Dedicated Transport Channel

DCH (Dedicated Channel) This is used to transfer data to a particular UE. Each UE has its own DCH in
each direction

Common Transport Channel Common Transport Channel

BCH (Broadcast Channel) This channel broadcasts information to the UEs in the cell to enable them to
identify the network and the cell.

FACH (Forward Access Channel) Downlink; Transports small amount of data from
BCCH/CCCH/DCCH/CTCH to either a specific UE or over the entire cell

PCH (Paging Channel) Downlink; Transports data from PCCH to UE over entire cell. This channel
carries messages that alert the UE to incoming calls, SMS messages, data
sessions or required maintenance such as re-registration.

RACH (Random Access Channel) This channel carries requests for service from UEs trying to access the system

CPCH (Common Packet Channel) This channel provides additional capability beyond that of the RACH and for
fast power control.

DSCH (Downlink Shared Channel) This channel can be shared by several users and is used for data that is
"bursty" in nature such as that obtained from web browsing etc.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Physical Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Synchronization Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Primary Common Pilot Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Primary Common Control Physical
Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

SCCPCH (Secondary Common Control Physical
Channel)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Physical Random Access Channe

PRACH consists preamble part and message part

Random access transmit 1or more 4096 chips length

preambles and 10ms or 20ms length message part.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Physical Random Access Channel

10ms message part is split into 15 timeslots, each timeslot consists

of 2560chips.
Each timeslot includes data part and control part. They are
transmitted in parallel .
Data part :SF=32~256 , control part: SF=256.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Uplink physical channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Uplink Dedicated physical channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Downlink physical channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Downlink dedicated physical
channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High-Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Shared Control Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Dedicated Physical control channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Cell Search

UE has to get the system information before it

registers with the network and access to services.
The system information is bearded in the BCH
channel, and its data is mapped into the Primary
CCPCH.
So the cell search procedure is mainly to decode
the data of P-CCPCH.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RACH Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Downlink Transmit Diversity

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Open Loop Transmit Diversity

STTD (Space Time Transmit Diversity)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Open Loop Transmit Diversity

TSTD (Time Switched Transmit Diversity)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Close Loop Transmit Diversity

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Transmit Diversity on Physical Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Thanks

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA RAN Signaling Flow

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Content

1. UTRAN Network Overview

2. Basic Concept UTRAN
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Development of Mobile communication

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Network Architecture

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Uu Interface Protocol Structure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

General Protocol UTRAN

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Iu-CS Interface

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Iu-CS Interface

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Iub - Interface

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Iur - Interface

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Content

1. UTRAN Network Overview

2. Basic Concept UTRAN
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

SRNC & DRNC

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE Working Mode

Idle Mode
Connected Mode
- CELL_DCH
- CELL_FACH
- CELL_PCH
- URA_PCH

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE In Idle Mode
- The Idle mode tasks may be divided in five different processes:
- PLMN selection and reselection
- Cell selection and reselection
- Location area (LA) and routing area (RA) registration
- Paging procedure
- Reading system information

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Connected Mode

When UE in connected mode

- The UE Position can be known on different levels :
- Cell Level (CELL_DCH/CELL_PCH/CELL_FACH
- UTRAN Registration Area URA Level (URA_PCH
- The UE can use different type of channel in connected mode
- Dedicated Transport Channel (CELL_DCH)
- Common Transport Channel (CELL_FACH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Connected Mode

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Connected Mode

If there is huge data to be transmitted, it must allocate dedicated

channel. Thus UE will be in Cell-DCH. UE in Cell-DCH state is
communicating via DCH (downlink and uplink) with UTRAN.
If there is only few data to be transmitted, there is no need to allocate
dedicated channel. Thus UE will be in Cell-FACH. UE in Cell-FACH
state is communicating via FACH (downlink) and RACH (uplink) with
UTRAN. UE need to monitor the FACH for its relative information
because FACH is shared for all users in the cell.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Connected Mode

If UE has no data to be transmitted or received, UE will be in Cell-PCH or URA PCH. In

these two states, UE needs to monitor PICH,to receive its paging. UTRAN knows which
cell or URA UE is now in. The difference between Cell PCH and URA-PCH is that UTRAN
update UE information only after UE which is in URA-PCH state has roamed to other
URA.
UTRAN have to update cell information of UE when UE roams to
another cell. UE migrates to cell-FACH state to complete the cell update. If there is
also no data to be transmitted or received, UE is back to CELL-PCH state after cell update.
If the cell update times in a fixed time reach a preset value, UTRAN will let UE migrate to
URA-PCH. URA is an area of several cells.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Connected Mode

It is the same as the CELL-PCH state. UE should migrate to CELL-

FACH state to complete the URA update.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE Working mode & State

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Content

1. UTRAN Network Overview

2. Basic Concept UTRAN
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Introduction of system
information

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential
Introduction of system
information

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Introduction of system
information

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Paging

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Paging Type

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Call process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RRC Connection Establish (CCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RRC Connection Establish (DCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Direct Transfer Message

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Call Setup Flow

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RAB Establish Flow

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RRC Connection Release Flow
(CCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RRC Connection Release Flow
(DCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

NAS Signaling

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE to UE CS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE to UE CS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE to UE CS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE to UE CS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UE to UE CS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

PS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

PS Call Process

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HANDOVER

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Soft Handover Flow

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Soft handover Flow (SNRC-DNRC)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Soft Handover Flow Signaling

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Soft handover Flow(add branch in AS)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Soft handover Flow(deleted branch in
AS)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Hard Handover

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

IRAT

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

CS Domain IRAT (UMTS GSM)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

CS Domain IRAT (CELL_FACH,
CELL_PCH or URA_PCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

CS Domain IRAT (CELL_DCH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

IRAT Handover Flow

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

IFHO

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Thanks

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA HSDPA
Principles

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

References

3GPP Release 6 Specification Refrences

1. TS 25.308 HSDPA overall description stage2
2. TS 25.211 Physical channel and mapping of transport channels onto physical channel (FDD)
3. TS 25.212 Multiplexing and channel coding (FDD)
4. TS 25.213 Spreading and modulation (FDD)
5. TS 25.214 Physical layer procedure (FDD)
6. TS 25.306 UE radio access capabilities
7. TS 25.321 Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol specification
8. TS 25.322 Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol specification
9. TS 25.331 Radio Resource Control (RRC) protocol specification

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

HSDPA Introduction
HSDPA Key Techniques
HSDPA Physical Layer Channel
HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Evolution

Downlink Peak Data Rate Downlink Peak Data Rate

(Typical Deployment) (Theoretical Maximum)

GSM 9.6kbps 9.6kbps

GPRS 40kbps 171kbps

EDGE 120kbps 473kbps

R99 WCDMA 384kbps 2.0Mbps

HSDPA 10.0Mbps 14.4Mbps

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

What are the benefits oh HSDPA

Higher Data Rates
- Peak data rate up to 14Mbps per user
Higher Capacity
- More subscribers and throughput
- Further reduces the cost per megabyte
Richer Application
- Low Latency improvement for streaming, interactive, background application

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Discontinuous downlink transmission with
Release 99 DCH.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Release 99 Packet Data

How is Packet Data handled in Release 99 (FDD)

DCH (Dedicated Channel)
Spreading codes assigned per user
Closed loop power control
Soft handover
FACH (Common Channel)
Common Spreading code
No closed loop power control
No soft handover

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Release 99 Downlink Limitation

Dedicated Channel Features (DCH)

Maximum implemented downlink of 384kbps
OVSF code limitation for high data rate user
Rate change according to burst throughput is slow
Outer loop power control responds slowly to cahnnel
Common Channel Features (FACH)
Good for burst data application
Only low data rates supported
Fixed transmit power

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

The differences between HSDPA and R99

Set of high data rate channel
Channels are shared by multiple user
Each user may be assigned all or part of the resource every 2ms

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential
High Speed Downlink Packet Access

How will HSDPA Figure out the limitations of R99

Adaptive modulation and coding
o Fast feedback of Channel condition
o QPSK and 16QAM
o Channel coding rate from 1/3 to 1
Multi-code operation
o Multiple code allocated per user
o Fixed spreading factor
NodeB fast Scheduling
o Physical Layer HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

Comparison Summary

Mode DCH FACH HSDPA

Channel Type Dedicated Shared Shared

Closed Inner Loop at

Power Control 1500Hz & Closed Outer No
Loop
Fixed Power with link adaptation
Soft Handover Supported Not Supported Not Supported
Suitability for Burst Poor Good Good
Data Rate Medium Low High

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

HSDPA Introduction
HSDPA Key Techniques
HSDPA Physical Layer Channel
HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Adaptive Modulation and Coding

AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) in accordance with CQI (Channel Quality Indicator)
Adjust data rate to compensation channel condition
o Good channel condition higher data rate
o Bad channel condition lower data rate
Adjust channel coding rate to compensation channel condition
o Good channel condition channel coding rate is higher e.g.
o Bad Channel condition channel coding rate is lower e.g. 1/3
Adjust the modulation scheme to compensation channel condition
o Good channel condition high order modulation scheme e.g. 16 QAM
o Bad channel condition low order modulation scheme e.g. QPSK

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Adaptive Modulation and Coding

AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) base on CQI (Channel Quality Indicator)
CQI (Channel quality indicator)
o UE measures the channel quality and reports to NodeB every 2ms or more cycle
o NodeB selects modulation scheme, data block size based on CQI

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

CQI mapping table for UE category 10

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSDPA UE Categories

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest

Conventional ARQ
o In a conventional ARQ scheme, received data blocks that can not be correctly decoded are discarded and
retransmitted data blocks are separately decoded
Hybrid ARQ (HARQ)
o In case of Hybrid ARQ with soft combining, received data blocks that can not be correctly decoded are not
discarded. Instead the corresponding recived signal is buffered and soft combined with later recived
retransmission of information bits. Decoding is then applied to the combined signal.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Hybrid Automatic Repeat reQuest

Example for HARQ

o The use of HARQ with soft combining increases the effective received
Eb/Io for each retransmission and thus increases the probability for correct
decoding of retransmissions, compare to conventional ARQ

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HARQ Combining

There are many different schemes for HARQ with soft combining
In case of Chase Combining (CC) each retransmission is an identical copy of the original transmission
In case of Incremental Redundancy (IR) each retransmission may add new redundancy

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HARQ Process

Each HSDPA assignment is handled by a HARQ process running in NodeB and UE

The UE HARQ process is responsible for:
Attempting to decode the data
Deciding whether to send ACK or NACK
Soft combining of retransmitted data
The NodeB HARQ process is is responsible for:
Selecting the corrected bits to send according to the selected retransmission scheme and UE capability

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Short TTI (2ms)

Shorter TTI (Transmission Time Interval) is to reduce RRT (Round Trip Time)
Shorter TTI is necessary to benefit from other functionalities such as AMC, scheduling algorithm
and HARQ

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Shared Channel Transmission

In HSDPA, a new DL transport channel is introduced call HS-DSCH

A part of the total downlink code resource is dynamically shared between HSDPA and Release 99

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSDPA New Physical Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

HSDPA Introduction
HSDPA Key Techniques
HSDPA Physical Layer Channel
HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

R99 Channel Mapping

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSDPA Physical Layer Channels

New HSDPA Channel

High Speed Downlink shared Channel (HS-DSCH)
Downlink Transport Channel
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH)
Downlink Physical Control Channel
High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH)
Downlink Physical Channel
High Speed Dedicated Physical Control Channel (HS-DPCCH)
Uplink Physical Control Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Primary Common Pilot Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Primary Common Control Physical Channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

SCCPCH (Secondary Common Control Physical Channel)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Theoretical HSDPA Maximum Data Rate
Theoretical HSDPA Maximum data rate is 14.4Mbps
How do we get to 14.4Mbps ?
- Multi-code transmission
- NodeB must allocate all 15 OVSF code (SF=16) to one UE
- Consecutive assignments using multiple HARQ process
- NodeB must allocate all time slots to one UE
- UE must decode all transmission correctly on the first transmission
- Low channel coding gain
- Effective code rate = 1
- Requires very good channel conditions to decode
- 16QAM
- Requires very good channel condition

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

More Data Rate Factors
More factors that affect HSDPA date rate
- Inter- TTI interval
- Retransmission
- ACK/NACK Repetition
Assuming
- 5 OVSF code for HS-PDSCH
- Consecutive assignment
- QPSK
- Turbo code rate = 1/3
- Retransmission
- 75% of data block decoded on first transmission
- 25% of data block decoded on second transmission

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

HSDPA Introduction
HSDPA Key Techniques
HSDPA Physical Layer Channel
HSDPA Layer2 Protocol

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UMTS Protocol Stack

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSDPA Protocol Stack

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

MAC-hs PDU

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Logical channel mapping with Release 5
HSDPA

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UTRAN MAC-hs Functions

Flow Control
- The flow control entity controls the HSDPA data flow between RNC and NodeB
- Purpose: to reduce the transmission time of HSDPA data on the UTRAN side and
to reduce the data discarded and retransmitted when the Iub interface or Uu
interface is congested
- The transmission capabilities of the Uu interface and Iub interface are taken into
account in dynamic manner in the flow control

Scheduling
The scheduling entity handles the priority of the queues and schedules the priority
queues or NACK HARQ processes of the HS-DSCH Ues in a cell to be transmitted
on the HS-DSCH related physical channels in each TTI
Purpose: to achieve considerable cell throughput capability and to satisfy user
experience

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UTRAN MAC-hs Functions

HARQ
- The HARQ entity handles the HARQ protocol for each HS-DSCH UE
- Each HS-DSCH UE has one HARQ entity on the MAC-hs of the UTRAN sideto handle the HARQ
functionality
- One HARQ entity can support multiple instances (i.e.HARQ processes) of stop and wait HARQ protocols
- Based on the status reports from HS-DPCCH, a new transmission or retansmission is determined

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

UTRAN MAC-hs Functions

TFRC selection
- The TFRC selection entity selects an appropriate transport format and resource for the data to be
transmitted on HS-DSCH
- The transport format includes the transport block size and modulation scheme. The resource includes the
power resource and code resource of HS-PDSCH
- Transport Format and Resource Combination (TFRC) for each UE is channel quality based, where AMC is
the key technique

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Thank you

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA HSUPA
Principles

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Foreword

HSUPA: High Speed Uplink Packet Access

HSUPA, as one of important feature from Huawei RAN6, has been taken as an important
enhancement to improve the network performance

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Objectives

Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:

1.Outline the protocol architecture of HSUPA
2.Know the key technologies of HSUPA

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

Introduction of HSUPA
HSUPA Concepts
Physical Layer Channel and Processing
MAC Protocols and Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

High Speed Uplink Packet Access

Driver force for HSUPA

- Data Rate demand for higher peak data rates in uplink
- Qos lower latency
- Capacity better uplink throughput
- Coverage better uplink coverage for higher data rate

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA Evolution

Downlink Peak Data

Mobile Network Upllink Peak Data Rate
Rate

GSM 9.6kbps 9.6kbps

GPRS 20kbps 40kbps
EDGE 60kbps 120kbps

WCDMA Release 99 384kbps 384kbps

HSDPA Release 5 384kbps 10Mbps

HSUPA Release 6 1.4Mbps/5.76Mbps 10Mbps

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSDPA, HSUPA and DCH comparison table

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Release 99 Uplink Packet Data

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Release 99 Uplink Limitation

Large scheduling delay

- Radio resource is controlled from RNC
- Uplink DCCC (Dynamic channel configuration control)
Large latency
- Transmission time interval duration of 10/20/40/80ms
- RNC based retransmission in case of errors (RLC layer)
Limited uplink data rate
- Deployed peak data rate is 384kbps with limited subscriber number

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Improved Characters by HSUPA

Higher peak data rate in uplink

Reduced latency
- Faster retransmission to improve throughput
Fast scheduling
- Optimize the resource allocation to maximize the total throughput
Quality of service support
- Improve QoS control and resource utilization

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

Introduction of HSUPA
HSUPA Concepts
Physical Layer Channel and Processing
MAC Protocols and Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA VS HSDPA

HSDPA HSUPA

Dedicated channel with enhanced

New high-speed shared channel capabilities
HARQ with fast retransmission at layer 1

Rate/modulation adaptation Single serving

cell Fast power control Soft handover

Fast NodeB scheduler Fast NodeB scheduler

Shared NodeB power and code Rise-over-Thermal (ROT)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Rise-over-Thermal Noise

In order to decode received data correctly, the uplink interference chall be controlled
Rise-over-Thermal is measure of the uplink load

NodeB monitor uplink interference and tells

UE how much power can be used to transmit
uplink data

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

DPDCH and E-DPDCH comparison table

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA Channel Operation

The UE sends a transmission request to the NodeB for getting resources

The NodeB responds to the UE with a grant assignment, allocation uplink band to the UE
The UE uses the grant to select the appropriate transport format for the Data transmission to the
NodeB
The NodeB attempts to decode the received data and send ACK/NACK to the UE. In case of
NACK, data may be retransmitted

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA scheduling-related information exchanged
over the air

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA scheduling in soft handover

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

Introduction of HSUPA
HSUPA Concepts
Physical Layer Channel and Processing
MAC Protocols and Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

New Channel for HSUPA

Uplink Transport Channel

E-DCH: Carries high speed uplink data
Uplink Physical Channels
E-DPDCH: Carries E-DCH
E-DPCCH: Carries control signal for E-DPDCH
Downlink Physical Channels
E-HICH : Carries HARQ ACK/NACK indicator for E-DCH
E-RGCH : Carries relative grant determined by the scheduler
E-AGCH : Carries absolute grant determined by the scheduler

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

New Channel is HSUPA Operation

The UE sends a request for resources. The request includes status of its data buffers and is sent
on E-DPDCH
Based on the request from the UE, the Node B allocates a resource grant to the UE. The grant is
sent on the E-AGCH channel
This grant can be modified by the Node B every TTI using the E-RGCH channel
The UE transmits data on E-DPDCH. Control information needed to decode the data is sent on E-
DPCCH.
The NodeB decodes the received packet and informs the UE whether it could decode the data
successfully or not on the E-HICH channel

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Transport channel processing details

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

E-AGCH

E-AGCH is common downlink channel

Fixed data rate : 30kbps
QPSK modulation
Spreading factor : 256
E-AGCH carries abdolute grant for E-DCH for all Ues in the cell
Transmission on E-AGCH can be 2ms or 10ms
2ms if E-DCH TTI is 2ms
10ms if E-DCH TTI is 10ms
UE listens to the E-AGCH from the serving cell only

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

E-AGCH coding chain

Absolute grant value is a 5-bit integer number ranging from 0 to 31 that has a specific mapping [3]
to the E-DPDCH/DPCCH power ratio the UE may use.
Absolute grant scope can be used to activate/de-activate a particular HARQ process (identified by
the E-AGCH timing) or all HARQ processes. The absolute grant scope can only be used with a 2-
ms E-DCH TTI.
Primary/Secondary UE-id or primary/secondary E-DCH radio network temporary identity (E-RNTI)
is used to mask the CRC of the E-AGCH. Each UE may have up to two UE-ids which it checks
fromeach E-AGCH and if it detects one or the other as matching the transmission it knows that
the E-AGCHtransmission was destined for it.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

E-AGCH coding chain

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

E-AGCH frame structure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

E-HICH

E-HICH is a dedicated downlink channel that carries HARQ ACK/NACK

QPSK modulation
Spreading factor is 128 and the channelization code for E-HICH is same with E-RGCH
Transmitted from all cells in the E-DCH active set
ACK/NACK is indicated using a binary indicator
ACK is +1
NACK from cell is serving E-DCH radio link set is -1
NACK from cells not in serving E-DCH radio link set is 0 (DTX)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Channel Configuration

E-DCH can be established in combilation with he following downlink configurations:

- Downlink DCH only
- HS-DSCH only
- Both DCH and HS-DSCH
The following uplink configuration are possible:
- Uplink DCH only
- E-DCH only
- Both uplink DCH and E-DCH
Downlink and uplink configurations can be combined independently

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Contents

Introduction of HSUPA
HSUPA Concepts
Physical Layer Channel and Processing
MAC Protocols and Procedure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA MAC-e PDU structure

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Hybrid ARQ (HARQ) Operation

N-channel Stop-and Wait (SAW) protocol, with 4 processes for 10 ms TTI and 8 processes for 2
ms TTI for continuous transmission
Synchronous retransmission, fixed timing relation means no need for process ID
Separate HARQ feedback is provided per radio link

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA HARQ process timing with a 10-ms TTI

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

HSUPA HARQ process timing with a 2-ms TTI

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Scheduled Transmission

In the downlink, the NodeB allocates scheduling grants to UE to tell UE the maximum amount of
uplink resource it can use.
- Scheduling grants indicates the maximum allowed E-DPDCH/DPCCH power ratio (T/P ratio)
- Scheduling grants are used by the UE to compute largest permitted transport block (E-TFC selection)
- There are two types of scheduling grants:
- The absolute grants provide an absolute limitation of the maximum amount of UL resources the UE may
use
- The relative grants increase or decrease the resource limitation compared to the previously used value

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Absolute Grant

Absolute grants are carried by the E-AGCH chanel of the serving E-DCH cell
The following information is carried by E-AGCH
- UE ID : E-RNTI specific CRC for addressing
- Grant : An index to one of 31 value for traffic-to-pilot- ratio
- HARQ process control : Deactivate/Active HARQ process
- Absolute grant with value 0 is used to deactivate HARQ process
- Scope: Indicates the grant affects one or all HARQ processes
- For 10ms E-DCH TTI, the scope is always set to all processes

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Rules for Updating Serving Grant

Serving E-RGCH commands are ignored for one HARQ RTT if E-AGCH is received
If a down command is received from the non-serving cell, the UE ensures forone HARQ RRT that
serving grant is not higher than the grant considered after reception of the non-serving E-RGCH

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Thank you

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

WCDMA RNO RF Optimization

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Course Contents

Chapter 1 Optimization Phases

Chapter 2 RF Optimization Summary
Chapter 3 RF Analysis Approaches
Chapter 4 Antenna Adjustment Example
Chapter 5 Drop Call Analysis Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Network Optimization Phases Flow Chart

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Network optimization phases step 1

Single site Verefication

to verify the functionality of every new site
Objectives
to ensure there are no faults related to
hardware installation or parameter settings.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Network optimization phases step 2

RF Optimization
Once most the sites in a given area are integreted and
verified, RF ( or cluster ) optimization could begin.
Objectives
To optimize coverage while in the same time
keeping interference and pilot pollution under
control over the terget area. This phase also
includes the verification and optimization of the 3g
neighbour lists.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Network Optimization Phases Step 3

Services Testing & Parameters Optimization

To be conducted in areas of good RF conditions in order
to exclude any coverage issues. Such testing does not
need to be performed for each cell but the drive
route must include different clutter types and
environments.
Objectives
To assess the performance and identify any need for
specific parameter optimization.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Network Optimization Phases Step 4

Regular Reference Route Testing & Stats Analysis

- Constant monitoring and evaluation of the network
performance can be based on drive test as well as traffic
statistic analysis.
- Results of the regular analysis may necessitate re-visits
to the RF optimization and/or parameters tuning.
Objectives
- identify any new issues that could arise, for example, as a
result of increase in traffic or changes in the environment.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Course Contents

Chapter 1 Optimization Phases

Chapter 2 RF Optimization Summary
Chapter 3 RF Analysis Approaches
Chapter 4 Antenna Adjustment Example
Chapter 5 Drop Call Analysis Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization -Preparation

Cluster
RF optimization should be carried out for groups or clusters of
sites rather than on single site basis, because the cells performance
(capacity, coverage and quality) will influence each other.

Cluster division in a project

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization -Preparation

Drive Routes
Clusterdrive surveys should include the coverage areas
of each cell and all the major roads and streets as well as
any other important locations.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization -Preparation

Tools
DTI, Anritsu or Agilent scanner
Huawei U626, Qualcomm UE, etc
Huawei Genex Assistant or Actix Analyzer
GPS

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization -Targets

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization Flow Chart

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Optimization -Solutions

Antenna down tilt

Antenna azimuth
Antenna location
Antenna height
Antenna type
Site location
New site

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Course Contents

Chapter 1 Optimization Phases

Chapter 2 RF Optimization Summary
Chapter 3 RF Analysis Approaches
Chapter 4 Antenna Adjustment Example
Chapter 5 Drop Call Analysis Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Cell Dominance

Cells with no dominance at all

A site was not radiating during the drive survey
Very poor dominance can also be caused by blocking of
the antenna. So a site visit must be made to verify the
antenna clearance.
Cells with either excessive or poor dominance
This could be due to a high site or non-optimum antenna
down tilts.
Cells with too large dominance will be causing
interference to adjacent cells resulting in poorer quality and
capacity.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Cell Dominance

Areas of non-dominance:
Areas where there is not a single clear dominant cell and
where the best server changes too frequently.
Result: Excessive number of soft hand off events reducing
the system efficiency and increasing the probability of call
drops.
UE vs. Scanner Best Serving Cells:
Comparison between the UE and scanner SC plots.
Significant differences between the plots may indicate a
missing neighbor or failed soft handoff problem.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Cell Dominance

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches CPICH Coverage

Check areas of poor coverage, suggestion value

as below:
Good: RSCP -85 dBm
Fair: -95 dBm RSCP < -85 dBm
Poor: RSCP < -95 dBm
Examine the RSCP coverage on per cell basis in
order to highlight any cells that have too large a
footprint.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches CPICH Coverage

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Interference

CPICH Ec/Io Plot

Good: Ec/Io -8 dB
Fair: -14 dB Ec/Io < -8 dB
Poor: Ec/Io < -14 dB

The -8 dB threshold takes into account the expected future interference

increase as a result of increased traffic

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Interference

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Interference

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Interference

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analiysis Approaches UL Coverage

Uplink Coverage ( UE Tx Power )

High UE Tx power means possible poor Uplink
coverage
Areas of high Tx power should be compared to the
CPICH pilots to verify if the problem only exists on the
uplink

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches UL Coverage

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Pilot Pollution

Pilot Pollution Point Define:

Within a certain margin (which is called ThRSCP_Relative)
to the best server
The pilot number (whose strength > best server strength
ThRSCP_Relative) > ThN (ThN means active set size,
normally 3)
Cells which are frequently seen as polluters (e.g.
>8% time) should be marked and investigated.
Pilot Pollution results should be used in
conjunction with the Estimated Active Set Size

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Pilot Pollution

ThRSCP_Relative was set 8 dB here

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Pilot Pollution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Pilot Pollution

Estimated Active Set Size

Another useful measure of pilot pollution is by
looking at the estimated active set based on the
scanner data. This plot is obtained by modeling the
network soft handoff parameters within Post
process tool.
In order to see areas of excessive SHO
candidates, the estimated active set size is allowed
to exceed maximum of 3.
This can be done in conjunction with the Pilot
pollution analysis.
www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential
RF Analysis Approaches Pilot Pollution

Estimated Active Set Size Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Neighbor List

Neighbor List Verification

The neighbor list could be verified and optimized using
the Neighbor List Verification tool within Actix.
Recommendations for Each Cell:
Retain: This indicates that those neighbors have been
confirmed from the drive survey data.
Add: Missing neighbors
Remove: These neighbors that were not measured but
are in the neighbor list.

Careful consideration is needed prior to removing neighbours

since the Actix results are drive route dependent.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Neighbor List

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches SHO

UE SHO Performance
The success rates for event 1a, 1b & 1c and can be obtained from Post
process tool

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Drop Call

Drop Call Analysis -RF related issues :

Poor coverage (RSCP & Ec/Io)
High interference and hence poor Ec/Io
Poor uplink coverage (insufficient UE Tx power)
Poor dominance (best cell changes too frequently
resulting in too many SHO events)
Pilot pollution (too many cells present)
Missing neighbors
Fast change of RF conditions (e.g. turning a corner)

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Drop Call

Drop Call Analysis Example 1

Call Drop

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Drop Call

Drop Call Analysis Example 2

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

RF Analysis Approaches Drop Call

Drop Call Analysis Example 3

Call Drop

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Course Contents

Chapter 1 Optimization Phases

Chapter 2 RF Optimization Summary
Chapter 3 RF Analysis Approaches
Chapter 4 Antenna Adjustment
Example
Chapter 5 Drop Call Analysis
Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Antenna Adjustment Example

RSCP Coverage before Adjustment

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Antenna Adjustment Example

RSCP Coverage after Adjustment

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Antenna Adjustment Example

RSCP Distribution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Antenna Adjustment Example

Down Tilt from 4 to 6 Result

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Antenna Adjustment Example

Down Tilt from 4 to 8 Result

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Course Contents

Chapter 1 Optimization Phases

Chapter 2 RF Optimization Summary

Chapter 3 RF Analysis Approaches

Chapter 4 Antenna Adjustment Example

Chapter 5 Drop Call Analysis Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop Call Analysis Example

Drop Call Distribution

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop Call Analysis Example

There are total 5 drop calls in the plot.

The example of drop call 1 is analyzed to
show the process of analysis in the following.
Drop call 1 occurred at an area of frequent
change of best server as shown by the
scanner scrambling code plot

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop Call Analysis Example

CPICH RSCP and Ec/Io before the Call Drop

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis example

compare Ec/Io from both scanner and UE at the

time of the drop as shown in figure . This clearly
shows the UE Ec/Io to drop to < -21 dB while the
scanner remained above -11 dB.

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis Example

Best Server before and after the call Drop

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis Example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis example

Conclusion
Examining the UE Active and Monitored set, Figure
does not
show SC018 to be measured by the UE prior to the
drop.
This scenario resembles a missing neighbor
problem

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis example

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Drop call analysis example

Solution:
Looking at drop call Figure clearly shows that at the
location of the drop, SC018 should not be the best server.
Cell SC018 clearly requires some down tilting to control its
interference into the area of Drop 1. To illustrate this,
RSCP coverage of SC018 shows clearly that the cells is
extending into a large area. E.g. around the location of
drop call, SC018 RSCP is > -75dBm.
Add the Missing Neighbors

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Thanks

www.DigiTrainee.com Company Confidential

Single Site Verification

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Foreword
Single site verification is the first step of optimization

Single site verification confirm the working state of each

site

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
Objectives
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Know the steps of single site verification

Know how to do single site verification

Know how to solve the ordinary problems in single site

verification

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page4
Contents
1. Preparation of Single Site Verification

2. Test Content of Single Site Verification

3. Typical Problems Analysis in Single Site Verification

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page5
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Site state check
Check the site state by RNC LMT or M2000

DSP CELL

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page6
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Site state check
Result

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page7
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Configuration data collection
RNC Configuration file collection

Without parameters, the file will be saved at FTP directory under

BAM main path and file name can be specified by user, default
CFGMML-YearMonthDateHourMinSec.txt.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page8
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Configuration data collection
RNC configuration parameter checking by GENEX Nastar
NODEBNAME

LOCELL ID

MAXTXPOWER

LAC

RAC

Scramble PSCRAMBCODE

Frequency UARFCNDOWNLINK

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page9
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Test location and route choose principle
The right test point meeting the following conditions:
Where the signals of target cell are strong

Where the signals of other cells are weak

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page10
Preparation of Single Site
Verification
Test location and route choose principle
For better performance, the following methods can be taken:

Disable power amplifiers of other cells except the cell to be measured

If cannot disable other cells, the testing point should be near the
center of the cell, with line-of-sight distance to the NodeB
For a macro cell, testing point should be 100 meters from NodeB in
the direction of major transmission of cell antenna, with line-of-sight
distance to NodeB.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
Contents
1. Preparation of Single Site Verification

2. Test Content of Single Site Verification

3. Typical Problems Analysis in Single Site Verification

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Idle Mode
Frequency Check
Downlink frequency point number = DL Frequency * 5

For example
UE shows the DL frequency is 2117.40

The DL frequency point number is 10587

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Idle Mode
Cell ID Check
Cell ID showed in test UE = configured RNCID * 65536 + configured
cell ID

For example
Configured RNC ID = 9

Configured Cell ID = 1210

Cell ID showed in test UE = 9 * 65536+1210 = 591034

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page14
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Idle Mode
Scrambling code Check
At the right place, UE will show
PSC in active set, including the signal level

PSC in monitor set, including the signal level

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page15
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Idle Mode
LAC/RAC Check
Check whether the LAC/RAC of the cell to be measured is consistent
with the planed one

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page16
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Idle Mode
CPICH_RSCP/CPICH_EcIo (Near Site) Test
Method
In the major transmission direction of antenna, fix a location with
line-of-sight distance from the antenna within 100 meters from the
NodeB

Test UE shows the signal level, including RSCP and Ec/Io

Bench Mark Value

For macro cells, CPICH RSCP > 75 dBm

For micro cells, CPICH RSCP > 60 dBm

For no-load cells, CPICH Ec/Io > 8 dB

For load-on cells, CPICH Ec/Io > 10 dB

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Connected Mode
Originating and Terminating Connection Test of Voice Service
Method
Use two handsets to call each other for five times.

Record the originating and terminating connection conditions

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page18
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Connected Mode
Originating and Terminating Connection Test of VP Service
Method
Use two handsets to call each other for five times.

Record the originating and terminating connection conditions

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page19
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Verification in Connected Mode
Connection Test of PS Services
Method
Originating function of PS services by handset online service

Pay attention to the throughput

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page20
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Drive Test for Coverage of the Site
Method
Prepare the NodeB location map

need to cover all major streets around the NodeB

Output area coverage map based on the pilot signals received by

scanner

Compare the CPICH RSCP and Ec/Io distribution of each cell

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page21
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
HSDPA Access Function Test
Preparation for HSDPA Test
Check defined downlink rate of the test USIM card

Check the related HSDPA parameters in RNC configuration file with

LST FRC and ensure USIM card subscribe rate is equal or greater
DlBeTraffDecThs

Prepare the DT software with HSDPA test function module

Prepare the terminal with HSDPA function and category

Huawei E870, category 8, 7.2Mbps

Huawei E620, category 12, 1.8Mbps

Huawei E220, category 6, 3.6Mbps

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
HSDPA Access Function Test
Method
Origination high speed downloading service, such FTP download

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page23
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Antenna Diversity Check
Objectivity
Check whether the antenna for receiving diversity signals is reversely
connected

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Antenna Diversity Check
Method 1
In the cell to be measured, set UE transmits signals with the fixed
maximum power

Check the RTWP of the cell to be measured and the neighbor cells
If the RTWP of the corresponding cell increases only and the RTWP
of neighbor sectors changes less, the diversity receiver antenna is
correctly connected

If the RTWP of corresponding cell and other sectors increases at the

same time, the diversity receiver antenna is improperly connected

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page25
Test Content of Single Site
Verification
Antenna Diversity Check
Method 2
Connect the Tx/Rx feeder to the Rx ports and the Rx feeder to the
Tx/Rx port.

Compare the CPICH RSCP before and after exchanging feeders.

If the difference of CPICH RSCP before and after exchanging
feeders is more than 20 dB, the diversity receiver antenna is
improperly connected

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page26
Contents
1. Preparation of Single Site Verification

2. Test Content of Single Site Verification

3. Typical Problems Analysis in Single Site Verification

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
Weak Coverage Problem
Analysis
Phenomenon
In single site verification drive test, the signal level is very bad
in 200m with line-of-sight

No blocking

Analysis
Check the alarm information (VSWR) no alarm

Check the feeder system

Downtilt angle OK

Azimuth OK

Connector OK

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page28
Weak Coverage Problem
Analysis
Analysis
Check configuration file
The parameters related to CPICH power OK
33dBm, and the maximum transmission power for the cell 20W.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page29
Weak Coverage Problem
Analysis
Analysis
Check the output power of the cell

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page30
Weak Coverage Problem
Analysis
Analysis
Check the output power of the cell

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
Weak Coverage Problem
Analysis
Analysis
Base on the output power examination, the problem is located
on the PA problem

Solution
Change the PA

Re-test
Signal level back to normal

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page32
Antenna Diversity Problem Analysis
In single site verification, antenna receiving diversity should
be checked

Phenomenon
Without subscriber, the RTWP test shows

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
Antenna Diversity Problem Analysis
Phenomenon
Set the UE with maximum transmission power in 10111, the
cell 10111 and 10112 RTWP increased at the same time

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page34
Antenna Diversity Problem Analysis
Phenomenon
Set the UE with maximum transmission power in 10112, same
problem happened

Result
The receiving diversity antenna of cell 10111 and 10112 are
connected crossly.

Adjustment
Exchange the receiving diversity antenna of these two cells

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page35
Antenna Diversity Problem Analysis
Re-test
Set the UE with the maximum transmission power in Cell 10111,
check the RTWP of 10111 and 10112

Test contents

Typical problems analysis

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page37
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA UTRAN
Optimization Flow

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Foreword
WCDMA optimization is a very important part in the
lifecycle of the network.

Mainly, the optimization includes the preparation, single

site verification, RF optimization and parameters
optimization.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page2
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The Preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The Preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page4
WCDMA Optimization Flow
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Final Documents:
SSV Reports
Optimization Report
Engineering Parameter Table
Cell Parameter Table

Process Documents:
Engineer Parameter Table
Cell Parameter Table
Parameter Changing Record

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page6
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page7
WCDMA Optimization Flow -
Preparation
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page8
The Preparation for Projection
The following work is required:
Understanding of the Existing Network

Cluster Division and Optimization Team Establishment

Optimization Tools and Software

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page9
The Preparation for Projection
Understanding of the Existing Network :
Radio Network Planning report

Latest engineering parameter table and cell parameter table

OMC statistic data

Subscriber complaints

Historical Optimization Reports

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page10
The Preparation for the
Optimization Projection
Cluster Division
One cluster should cover one continuous area, which is
convenient for one time drive test;
Cluster division should consider the terrain,
administration and main roads.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
The Preparation for the Optimization
Projection
Optimization Team Establishment
RNO manager

RNO leader-1 .................. RNO leader-n

Data Analyzer Data Analyzer

Drive Test Operator Drive Test Operator

Driver Driver

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
The Preparation for the Optimization
Projection
Optimization Tools

Hardware
Software:

UMTS Scanner
DT tools

UMTS Test UE
Post processing tools

GPS and data line
MapInfo

Laptop
Google earth

Digital camera

Spectrum analyzer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page14
WCDMA Optimization Flow Single Site
Verification
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page15
Single Site Verification
Purpose:
The single site verification test is a part of the WCDMA network
optimization to ensure that the basic functions of the cell are
normal, such as call access, call quality, handover and so on.
Single site verification involves the following aspects:
Parameter setting check in idle mode
Services call (AMR/VP/PS) function check in connected mode
HSDPA function check
CPICH RSCP & Ec/Io
Installation problems check

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page16
Single Site Verification
Single site verification includes :
preparations before test
single site test
solving problems

The single site verification is completed by:

On-site engineers
RNO engineers

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17
Single Site Verification - Tasks of the
on-site engineers

Preparations

Site Status Check

For each cell to be measured, check Status by LMT or M2000

Configuration Data Collection and Check

check whether the data configured is consistent with the planned
data

Testing Point Selection

Test UE Setup Application key

Set the UE to testing mode before test

Other Preparations

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page18
Single Site Verification - Tasks of the
on-site engineers
Verification in Idle Mode
Frequency Check
Check whether the frequency is consistent with the planned data
Scramble Check
Check whether the scramble is consistent with the planned data
LAC/RAC Check
Check whether the LAC/RAC is consistent with the planed data.
CPICH_RSCP / CPICH_Ec/Io (Near Site) Test
Check whether the CPICH RSCP and CPICH Ec/Io received by
UE are greater than the threshold

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page20
Single Site Verification - Tasks of the
on-site engineers
Verification in connected Mode
Originating and Terminating Call of Voice Service
Check whether the originating and terminating function of
voice service function normally by call quality test
Originating and Terminating Connection Test of VP Service
Check whether the originating and terminating function of
VP service function normally by call quality test
Access Test of PS Services
Check whether the PS services access are normal
Solving Problems

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page21
Single Site Verification Task of the
RNO engineers
Preparations
Cell Status Confirmation
Before checking site, you need to inquiry product support
engineers whether the cell is in normal status

Testing Route Selection

Before test, you must select a proper testing route according to
site distribution and local environment

Testing Tools
Hardware

Software

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22
Single Site Verification Task of the
RNO engineers
Coverage Check
Check whether CPICH RSCP and CPICH Ec/Io received by
scanner is normal

Inconsistency of antenna tile/direction angle from planned

one

Check whether the RX ports of different cell are reversely

connected
Fixed Maximum Transmit Power of UE, measure the RTWP of the
cells in OMC room

Checking Antennas by Exchanging Feeders, measure the RSCP

before and after.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page23
Single Site Verification Task of the
RNO engineers
Service Function Test
MOC and MTC of Voice call

MOC and MTC of VP

UL and DL R99 PS service

HSDPA access function and throughput test

HSUPA access function and throughput test

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
Single Site Verification Task of the
RNO engineers

Solving Problems
If RNO engineers find out some installation problem, ask
the installation team fix it and do retest to verify

If RNO engineers find problems about product function,

RNO engineers must ask RAN engineers help to solve
problems

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page25
Single Site Verification
Summarization:
In single site verification stage, engineers check whether
equipment functions are normal
Single site verification is a basis for the following RF
optimization and Parameter optimization
If all verifications about function are accepted, the single
site verification is completed

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page26
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
WCDMA Optimization Flow RF
Optimization
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page28
RF Optimization - Overview
Once all the sites on-air and verification is completed, RF
optimization starts
During the RF optimization stage, you willoptimize radio
frequency (RF) signals , so that the distribution of radio signal
is normal in next stage -- parameters optimization
RF optimization includes the following aspects:
Coverage optimization
Pilot pollution optimization
Handover optimization

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page30
RF Optimization - Preparation (1)
Define Optimization targets
Weak coverage
Pilot pollution
SHO Factor based on DT

Define Test Route

Cluster Division
Preparing Tools and Data
Preparing Software
Preparing Hardware
Engineering and cell Parameter table

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
RF Optimization - Preparation (2)
Index Reference Remarks

97% in urban area According to test result from the scanner, in

unloaded and outdoor conditions, in planning
CPICH Ec/Io 9dB
97% in suburban coverage areas, test in a grid-like route to cover all
area cells.

According to test result from the scanner, in

98% in urban area unloaded and outdoor conditions, in planning
CPICH RSCP coverage areas, test in a grid-like route to cover all
95dBm 95% in suburban cells. The coverage level request is basic. If
area operators have penetration loss request, add the
penetration loss to the coverage level.
The SHO Factor based on DT should be 5% to
SHO Factor based on 10% lower than the goal, because the following
30%40%
DT optimizations cause the soft handover factor to
increase
Pilot pollution ratio 5%

RF Optimization - Targets

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page32
RF Optimization - Preparation (3)
Dividing Clusters
RF optimization must be performed on a group of or a
cluster of NodeBs , and to ensure that interference from
intra-frequency neighbor cells are considered during
optimization.

Define Test Route

The test route should cover all sites, all main roads and VIP
area.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
RF Optimization - Preparing Tools and
Data:
Needed data
List of engineering
Device
parameters
Software Scanner
Genex Probe Map
Test terminal and
Genex Assistant data line KPI requirements
Mapinfo GPS and data line Network configuration
parameters
Google earth Laptop
Survey report
Vehicle mounted
inverter Single site verification
checklist
Floor plan of the target
buildings

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page34
RF Optimization - Data Collection
DT is a major test. Collect scanner and UE data of radio
signals by DT test

Usually the DT and indoor test during RF optimization

stage is based on VP service.

During RF optimization stage, collect neighbor cell data

of network optimization and other data configured in
RNC database

Antenna tilt
Antenna height
Antenna azimuth
Antenna type
Antenna location
TMA
Split sector
RRU
Remove sector
Site location
Combine sector
New site

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page37
RF Optimization
Some advices:
Before the RF adjusting, wed better survey the relative sites,
and give some applicable advice

If possible, do the RF adjustment and test the effect at the

same time

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page38
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
The coverage problems to be analyzed include:
Weak coverage

Overshoot coverage

Unbalance between uplink and downlink

No dominating cell

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page39
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Coverage Analysis Processes:
Downlink Coverage Analysis
Analyzing Pilot Strength
Analyzing Pilot quality
Analyzing Dominate Cell
Analyzing comparison of UE and Scanner Coverage

Uplink Coverage Analysis

Analyzing Uplink Interference
Analyzing distribution of UE Transmit Power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page40
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis Pilot Strength Analysis
Check areas of weak coverage, suggestion value as below:
Good: RSCP -85 dBm

Fair: -95 dBm RSCP < -85 dBm

Poor: RSCP < -95 dBm

Mark the areas with weak coverage for further analysis

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Pilot Strength Analysis

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page42
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Pilot quality Analysis
Ec/Io plot should also be analysed based on the thresholds :
Good: Ec/Io -8 dB

Fair: -14 dB Ec/Io < -8 dB

Poor: Ec/Io < - 14 dB

Areas of poor Ec/Io should be highlighted for further

investigation

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page43
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis Pilot quality Analysis:

-14 -60
-63

-15 -15.5 -65

-16 -70

-17 -75

-18 -80

-19 -85

-20 -90
Ec/Io RSCP

Whats the
problem?

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page44
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Pilot quality Analysis:

-14 -90
Whats the
-15 -15.5 -95 problem?
-16 -100
-104
-17 -105

-18 -110

-19 -115

-20 -120
Ec/Io RSCP

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page45
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Analyzing Dominating Cell:
Dominating cells analysis is analyzing cell scramble
information obtained in DT

The contents to be checked include :

Weak coverage cell

Cross-cell coverage cell

No dominating cell

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page46
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Analyzing Dominating Cell:

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page47
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Analyzing Dominating Cell:

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page48
RF Coverage Problem Analysis
Downlink coverage analysis - Analyzing comparison of UE and Scanner Coverage :

Inconsistent Best Service Cell between scanner and UE

Uplink coverage analysis:

Uplink coverage analysis is analyzing UE transmit power
obtained in DT

Assume the optimization indexes of UE transmit power as

below: The test result of voice service by
UE_Tx_Power 10 dBm >= 95% test handset. Assume the maximum
transmit power of UE is 21 dBm

The defined corresponding quality standards are:

Good: UE_Tx_Power 0 dBm

Fair: 0 dBm < UE_Tx_Power 10 dBm

Poor: UE_Tx_Power > 10 dBm

Uplink Uplink Coverage - Distribution of UE Transmit Power

The distribution of UE transmit power reflects the distribution
of uplink interference and uplink path loss

The distribution of UE transmit power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page51
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Pilot Pollution Point Definition:
The pilot pollution is that excessive strong pilots exist in a
point but no pilot is strong enough

Pilot pollution exists if all the following conditions are met:

The number of pilots that meet the following condition is more than
4 and CPICH_RSCP > -100dBm

(CPICH_RSCP1st - CPICH_RSCP 4th)< 5dB

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page52
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Influence of Pilot Pollution :
Pilot pollution causes the following network problems:

Ec/Io Deterioration

Call Drop Due to Handover

Capacity Decline

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page53
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Pilot Pollution Definition - Judgment Standards :
-60

-65 Margin
RSCP (dBm)

-70

-75
-62
-63
-64
-66 -67
-80

-85 -81

-90
SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4 SC5 SC6

Active Set Pilot Pollution Not

Pilot Pollution

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page54
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Pilot Pollution - Estimated Active Set Size:

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page55
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Pilot Pollution - Estimated Active Set Size
SC Count % in Pollution Set
8 206 12.9%
9 165 10.3%
10 157 9.8%
11 156 9.7% Should be investigated
12 148 9.2%
13 135 8.4%
16 95 5.9%
17 94 5.9%
18 76 4.7%
19 74 4.6%
20 73 4.6%
21 56 3.5%
32 54 3.4%
35 39 2.4%
37 33 2.1%
43 19 1.2%
48 8 0.5%
53 7 0.4%
67 3 0.2%
80 2 0.1%
130 2 0.1%
Pilot pollution results

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page56
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Causes of Pilot Pollution :
Improper Cell Distribution

Over High NodeB or Highly-mounted Antenna

Improper Antenna Azimuth

Improper Antenna Down Tilt

Improper CPICH Power

Ambient Factors

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page57
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Process for Analyzing Pilot Pollution
Analyze scanner-based RSCP for 1st Best Service Cell and
Ec/Io for 1st Best Service Cell

Analyze scanner-based Whole PP

Locate the cells that cause pilot pollution of the key areas.

Judge whether the pilot pollution is caused by existence of

multiple strong pilots or lack of a strong pilot

Confirm the cells that need eliminating the coverage of an

area and that need enhancing the coverage of an area

Retest after adjustment

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page58
Pilot Pollution Problem Analysis
Solutions of Pilot Pollution :
Antenna Adjustment

PCPICH Power Adjustment

Using RRU or Micro Cells

By adjusting RF parameters ,we can Control the size and

location of handover areas ,then we can eliminate handover
call drop due to sharp fluctuation and increase handover
success rate.

During RF optimization stage, the involved handover problem

include:
Neighbor cell optimization

Controlling SHO Factor based on DT

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
Handover Problem Analysis -
Neighbor cell optimization
The neighbor cell optimization includes adding and
removing neighbor cells.
Add: Missing neighbors
Remove: The neighbors are never measured but in the
neighbor list.
Neighbor cell optimization can be analyzed by :
Scanner Data
UE Data Analysis

Careful consideration is needed prior to removing neighbours

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page61
Handover Problem Analysis -
Neighbor cell optimization
By the scanner data, the Assistant can generate a neighbor cell
analysis report in the format of Excel

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page62
Handover Problem Analysis -
Neighbor cell optimization
We can also analyze a missing neighbor cell by UE DT
data

The daemon analysis tool can seldom analyze UE data

automatically and generate missing neighbor cells

but we can Compare the active set Ec/Io distribution

diagram measured by UE and that measured by scanner

The spots with missing neighbor cells has a poor Ec/Io

measured by UE and a strong Ec/Io scanned by scanner .

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page63
Handover Problem Analysis
Controlling SHO Factor based on DT:
According to the DT data from scanner, you can obtain the
SHO Factor based on DT, defined as below:

Number of scanner - collected points in DT that meet the handover conditions

Soft Handover Ratio
Number of total scanner - collected points in DT

The SHO Factor based on DT during RF optimization
stage must be 5%10% lower than the KPI target
value

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page64
Handover Problem Analysis
UE SHO Performance
The success rates for event 1a, 1b & 1c and can be obtained
from software Number of Active Set Updates
Event Count
Event 1a - 328
Event 1b - 306
Event 1c - 64

Number of Active Set Update Completes

Event Count
Event 1a - 326
Event 1b - 305
Event 1c - 62

Soft-Handover Success Rate

Event Rate
Event 1a - 99.4
Event 1b - 99.7
Event 1c - 96.9

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page65
RF Analysis Approaches Neighbor
List
Controlling SHO Factor based on DT
If the SHO Factor based on DT is over large, decrease or
change the handover areas by using the following methods
for shrinking coverage areas:
Increase the down tilt

Adjust azimuth

Decrease the antenna height

Decrease the PICH power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page66
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page67
WCDMA Optimization Flow
Parameter Optimization
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Purpose of parameters optimization

Decrease the access success ratio
Decrease the call drop ratio
Increase the quality of service

The tools data and tools for analysis:

Drive test data and analysis tools
Statistic data and analysis tools
RNC trace and logs data
MSC & SGSN record if necessary

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page69
Drive test
The contents of drive test
Idle mode test
The short call test for voice service
The continuous call test for voice service
The short call test for video phone service
The continuous call test for voice service
The access test for R99 PS service
The continuous call test for R99 PS service
HSDPA FTP download test

The test should be performed repeatedly to the position with

problems to make sure that the problem is repeatable

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page70
Drive Test Data Analysis
Drive Test Data Analysis
Analyzing and finding out the solution for access failure

Analyzing and finding out the solution for drop call

Analyzing and finding out the solution for service quality

Key hotels or entertainment location

Government location

Locations of large company or group subscribers

Locations tend to be cared , such as railway station or

airport

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page73
Contents
1. Introduction of Optimization Flow
2. The preparation for the Optimization Project
3. Single Site Verification
4. RF Optimization
5. Parameters Optimization
6. Optimization Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page74
WCDMA Optimization Flow
Optimization Report Output
Project Start
Network Information
Collection
Cluster Division and
Preparation and
Team Establishment Startup
Optimization Tools
Single Site
Verificaiton Preparation
Drive Test and RNC
Configuration Collection
RF Trouble shooting
Preparation Optimization Engineering Parameter
Data Collection Adjustment
DT and Statistic Parameter
Analysis
Parameter Adjustment
Optimization

Acceptance and
Report

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page75
Optimization Report
The optimization report should include:
Project background introduction
Existing network status
Acceptance criteria
Optimization process
Problem analysis and adjustment recommendation, and the
effect for the implemented part
Acceptance test and result
Leftover problems and suggestions from the optimization
point of view.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page76
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA UTRAN
Interface and Signaling
Procedure

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Objectives
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Understand UTRAN interface and structure

Understand the definitions about UTRAN network elements

Understand UTRAN signaling procedure

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

CN Core Network
CS PS CS PS
Iu-CS Iu-PS Iu-CS Iu-PS
RNS RNS
Iur
RNC RNC
UTRAN
Iub Iub Iub Iub

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Uu
UE
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page4
Uu Interface
GC Nt DC

Duplication avoidance
GC Nt DC
C-plane signaling UuS boundary
U-plane information

control
RRC L3
control

control

control
control

radio bearer

PDCP PDCP L2/PDCP

BMC L2/BMC

RLC RLC L2/RLC

RLC RLC
RLC RLC
RLC RLC
logical channel

MAC L2/MAC
transport channel
PHY L1

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page5
General Protocol Mode for UTRAN
Terrestrial Interface
The structure is based on the principle that the layers and
planes are logically independent of each other.

Radio Control Plane User Plane

Network
Layer Application Data
Protocol Stream(s)

Transport Transport Network Transport Network Transport Network

Network User Plane Control Plane User Plane
Layer ALCAP(s)

Signaling Signaling Data

Bearer(s) Bearer(s) Bearer(s)

Physical Layer

RRC RNSAP
UE RNC RNC
NBAP

NodeB

NBAP Node B Application Part

RANAP Radio Access Network Application Part
RNSAP Radio Network Subsystem Application Part
RRC Radio Resource Control

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page8
Iu-CS Interface (based on ATM)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
RANAP Iu UP
Layer

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page9
Iu-CS Interface (based on IP)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
RANAP Iu UP
Layer

DATA LINK DATA LINK

Physical Layer

Radio Control Plane User plane

Network
Layer RANAP Iu UP

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
Iu-PS Interface (based on IP)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
RANAP Iu UP
Layer

DATA LINK DATA LINK

Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
Iub Interface (based on ATM)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
Layer NBAP Iub FP

NCP CCP
Transport Network
Control Plane

Transport Transport Network

Network Transport Network ALCAP
User Plane User Plane
Layer

SAAL UNI SAAL UNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13
Iub Interface (based on IP)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
Layer NBAP Iub FP

NCP CCP

Transport Transport Network

Network Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Layer

SCTP UDP
IP IP

DATA LINK DATA LINK

Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page14
Iur Interface (based on ATM)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network Iur Data
RNSAP
Layer Stream

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page15
Iur Interface (based on IP)
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network Iur Data
RNSAP
Layer Stream

DATA LINK DATA LINK

Physical Layer

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

SRNC DRNC

Interface
Data

SRNC and DRNC are concepts for a connected UE.

The SRNC handles the connection to one UE, and may borrow radio
resources of a certain cell from the DRNC.
Drift RNCs support the Serving RNC by providing radio resources
A UE in connection state has at least one and only one SRNC, but can
has 0 or multiple DRNCs

RAB

RB
RNC CN
UE
RL
NodeB

UTRAN

Connected Mode
CELL_DCH

CELL_FACH

CELL_PCH

URA_PCH

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page20
Idle Mode
The UE has no relation to UTRAN, only to CN. For data
transfer, a signaling connection has to be established.

UE camps on a cell
It enables the UE to receive system information from the PLMN

UE can monitor PICH of a cell for paging

The idle mode tasks can be divided into three processes:

PLMN selection and reselection

Cell selection and reselection

Location registration

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page21
Connected Mode
When UE is in connected mode
The UE position can be known on different levels:
Cell level (CELL_DCH/CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH)

UTRAN Registration Area (URA) level (URA_PCH)

The UE can use different types of channels in connected

mode
Dedicated transport channels (CELL_DCH)

Common transport channels (CELL_FACH)

Communicating via its dedicated channels

UTRAN knows which cell UE stays in

Few data to be transmitted both in uplink and in downlink.

There is no need to allocate dedicated channel for this UE

Downlink uses FACH and uplink uses RACH

UE needs to monitor the FACH for its information

UTRAN knows which cell the UE stays in

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
Connected Mode
Cell-PCH
No data to be transmitted or received

Monitor PICH, to receive its paging

UTRAN knows which cell the UE stays in

UTRAN has to update cell information of UE when UE roams

to another cell

Lower the power consumption of UE

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page25
Connected Mode
URA-PCH
No data to be transmitted or received
Monitor PICH, to receive its paging
UTRAN only knows which URA (which consists of multiple
cells) that UE stays
UTRAN updates UE information only after UE has roamed to
other URA
A better way to reduce the resource occupancy and
signaling transmission

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page26
UE Working Modes and States
- Reduce activity further - Reduce activity, DRX,
- Avoid unnecessary RRC Connection and save power
signaling
URA_PCH CELL_PCH

CELL_DCH CELL_FACH
- Dedicated channel
- Common channel
- Common service,
- PS service with few
such as voice
data to transmit
IDLE
- Monitor paging channel
- Cell re-selection

- Scan networks (PLMN)

DEAD - Camp on a cell

2. Basic Concepts about UTRAN

3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page28
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

1. System Information Update

Request

2. System Information Update

Response

3. System Information

4. System Information

5. System Information

PLMN tag

Scheduling information for

SB (Scheduling Block)

Scheduling information for

SIB (System Information
Block)

SB1: scheduling information for

SIB

SB2: scheduling information for

SIB (extended)
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
Introduction of System Information
SIB1: System information for NAS and the timer/counter for UE
SIB2: URA information
SIB3: Parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection
SIB4: Parameters for cell selection and cell re-selection while
UE is in connected mode
SIB5: Parameters for the common physical channels of the cell
SIB6: Parameters for the common physical channels of the cell
while UE is in connected mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page32
Introduction of System Information
SIB7: uplink interference level and the refreshing timer
SIB8: the CPCH static information
SIB9: the CPCH dynamic information
SIB10: information to be used by UEs having their DCH
controlled by a DRAC procedure
SIB11: measurement controlling information
SIB12: measurement controlling information in connected
mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
Introduction of System Information
SIB13: ANSI-41 system information
SIB14: the information in TDD mode
SIB15: the position service information
SIB16: the needed pre-configuration information for handover
from other RAT to UTRAN
SIB17: the configuration information for TDD
SIB18: the PLMN identities of the neighboring cells to be used
in shared networks to help with the cell reselection process

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page34
System Information Block Type 1
System information type 1
The NAS system information
CS domain DRX: K=6, then DRX
period is 2^k= 2^6= 64TTI=640
ms
PS domain DRX: K=6, then DRX
period is 2^k=2^6=64TTI =640
ms

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page35
System Information Block Type 2
System info type 2
URA information

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page36
System Information Block Type 3
The references for cell selection
and re-selection
Qhyst2s
Sintrasearch
Sintersearch
Sinterratsearch
Qqualmin
Qrxlevmin
T reselection
Max Allowed UE TX power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page37
System Information Block Type 5
The configuration information
for the following physical
channels and the counterpart
transport channels
PCCPCH
SCCPCH
PICH
AICH
PRACH

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page38
System Information Block Type 7 and 11
System info type 7
Including the UL interference level which is used for open loop
power control
Including the Expiration Time Factor which is used for refreshing
the SIB7 periodically

System info type 11

The neighbor cell information for cell re-selection in IDLE mode

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page39
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page40
Paging Initiation
CN initiated paging
Establish a signaling connection

UTRAN initiated paging

Trigger the cell update procedure

Trigger reading of updated system information

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
Paging Type 1
If UE is in CELL_PCH,URA_PCH or IDLE statethe paging
message will be transmitted on PCCH with paging type 1
CN RNC1 RNC2 NODEB1.1 NODEB2.1 UE

PAGING
RANAP RANAP

RANAP PAGING RANAP

PCCH: PAGING TYPE 1

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page42
Paging Type 2
If UE is in CELL_DCH or CELL_FACH statethe paging
message will be transmitted on DCCH with paging type 2
CN SRNC UE

PAGING
RANAP RANAP

DCCH: PAGING TYPE 2

RRC RRC

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page43
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page44
Introduction of Call Process
In WCDMA system, a call process includes the following basic
signaling flows:
RRC connection flow
Direct transfer message flow
Authentication flow (optional)
Security flow (optional)
RAB establish flow
Call proceeding
NAS signaling before correlative bearer release
Correlative bearer release

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page45
RRC Connection Establishment Flow
(CCH)
UE NodeB SRNC

1. RRC Connection Request

2. RRC Connection Setup

3. RRC Connection Setup Complete

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page46
RRC Connection Establishment Flow
(DCH)
UE NodeB SRNC

1. RRC Connection Request

2. Radio Link Setup Request

3. Radio Link Setup Response

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport
Bearer Setup

5. RRC Connection Setup

6. RRC Connection Setup Complete

1. Initial Direct Transfer

2. Initial UE Message (CM

Service Request)

3. Common ID

In Iu interface, radio network layer reports the RANAP

information and NAS information. NAS information is
taken as directed message in RANAP information.

1. Direct Transfer (Authentication

Request)
2. Downlink Direct Transfer

3. Uplink Direct Transfer

4. Direct Transfer (Authentication
Response)
5. Security Mode Command

6. Security Mode Command

7. Security Mode Command

Complete
8. Security Mode Command
Complete

1. Uplink Direct Transfer

2. Direct Transfer (Setup)
3. Direct Transfer (Call Proceeding)
4. Downlink Direct Transfer

5. RAB Establishment

6. Direct Transfer (Alerting)

7. Downlink Direct Transfer
8. Direct Transfer (Connect)
9. Downlink Direct Transfer
10. Uplink Direct Transfer
11. Direct Transfer (Connect
Acknowledge)

1. RAB Assignment
Request

2. Iu-CS AAL2 Setup

3. Radio Link
Reconfiguration Prepare
4. Radio Link
Reconfiguration Ready
5. ALCAP Iub Data Transport
Bearer Setup
6. Radio Bearer Setup
7. Radio Link
Reconfiguration Commit
8. Radio Bearer Setup Complete
9. RAB Assignment
Response

UE NodeB SRNC

1. RRC Connection Release

2. RRC Connection Release Complete

1. RRC Connection Release

2. RRC Connection Release Complete

3. Radio Link Deletion

Request

4. Radio Link Deletion

Response

5. ALCAP Iub Data Transport

Bearer Release

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page58
NAS Signaling (CS)
UE MSC MSC UE
Paging
RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup
RRC and NAS signaling Connection Setup
CM Service Request
Paging Response
Authentication Request
Authentication Request
Authentication Response
Authentication Response
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command Complete Security Mode Command Complete
Setup Setup
Call Proceeding Call Confirmed
RAB Assignment RAB Assignment
Alerting Alerting
Connect Connect
Connect ACK Connect ACK
Disconnect Disconnect
Release Release
Release Complete Release Complete

UE Outgoing Call UE Terminating Call

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page59
UE to UE CS Call Process (1) UE1 NodeB1 RNC1 CN RNC2 NodeB2 UE2

RRC Connection Req

RL Setup Req
RL Setup Rsp
RRC Connection
ALCAP Iub Data
Setup
Transport Bearer Setup
RRC Connection Setup
RRC Connection Setup
Cmp
NAS Signaling Initial DT Initial UE
Setup Message (CM
Service Req)
DT
(Authentication
DL DT Req)
UL DT DT
(Authentication
Rsp)
Authentication
and Security Flow Common ID
Security Mode
Cmd
Security Mode Cmd
Security Mode Cmp
Security Mode
Cmp

UL DT
DT (Setup)
NAS Signaling
DT (Call
Proceeding)
DL DT
RAB Ass Req
Paging
Paging Type 1
Iu-CS AAL2 Setup
RRC Connection Req
RL Recfg Prep
RL Setup Req
RL Recfg
RL Setup Rsp
RAB Ready
Establishment ALCAP Iub Data ALCAP Iub Data
Transport Bearer Setup Transport Bearer Setup

RB Setup RRC Connection Setup

RL Recfg RRC Connection Setup Cmp
Commit
RB Setup Cmp
RAB Ass Rsp

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
UE to UE CS Call Process (2) UE1 NodeB1 RNC1 CN RNC2 NodeB2 UE2

Initial UE Initial DT
Message
(Paging Rsp)
DT
(Authentication
Req) DL DT
UL DT
DT
(Authentication
Rsp)
Common ID
Security Mode
Cmd
Security Mode Cmd
Security Mode Cmp
Security Mode
Cmp
DT (Setup)
DL DT
UL DT
DT (Call
Confirm)
RAB Ass Req
Iu-CS AAL2 Setup

RL Recfg Prep
RL Recfg
Ready
ALCAP Iub Data
Transport Bearer Setup
RB Setup
RL Recfg
Commit
RB Setup Cmp
RAB Ass Rsp
UL DT
DT (Alerting)
DT (Alerting)
UL DT
DL DT
DT (Connect)
NAS DT (Connect)
Signaling DL DT
UL DT
DT (Connect
Acknowlege) DT (Connect
Acknowledge)
DL DT

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page61
UE to UE CS Call Process (3)
UE1 NodeB1 RNC1 CN RNC2 NodeB2 UE2

UL DT
DT
(Disconnect)
NAS Signaling DT (Release)
(Call Release) DT
DL DT
(Disconnect)
UL DT DL DT
DT (Release
Cmp) UL DT
Iu Release DT (Release)
Cmd
DT (Release
Cmp)
Iu Release
Iu-CS AAL2 Release DL DT
Iu Release
Iu Release Cmd
Cmp
RRC Connection Rel Req Iu-CS AAL2 Release

Iu Release
RRC Connection Rel Cmp
Cmp
RRC Connection
RL Rel Req RRC Connection Rel Req
Release
RL Rel Rsp RRC Connection Rel Cmp

ALCAP Iub Data RL Rel Req

Transport Bearer
Release RL Rel Rsp

ALCAP Iub Data

Transport Bearer
Release

RRC Connection Request

Radio Link Setup Request
Radio Link Setup Response
RRC Connection
Setup ALCAP Iub Data Transport
Bearer Setup
RRC Connection Setup
RRC Connection Setup Complete
NAS Signaling Initial Direct Transfer
Initial UE Message
Setup
(Service Request)

DT (Authentication
Request)
DL DT
UL DT
DT (Authentication
Authentication Response)
and Security Flow Common ID
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Command
Security Mode Complete
Security Mode Complete

DT (Service Accept)
NAS Signaling DL DT
(Call Setup)
UL DT
DT (PDP Context
Request)

RAB Assignment
Request

Radio Link Reconfiguration

Prepare
Radio Link Reconfiguration
Ready
RAB ALCAP Iub Data Transport
Establishment Bearer Setup

Radio Bearer Setup

Radio Link Reconfiguration
Commit
Radio Bearer Setup Complete
RAB Assignment
Response

DT (PDP Context
NAS Signaling Accept)
(Call Setup) DL DT

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page63
Contents
3. UTRAN Signaling Procedure
3.1 System Information Broadcast

3.2 Paging

3.3 Call Process

3.4 Handover

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page64
Concepts about Soft Handover
Soft handover: the signals from different NodeBs are
merged in RNC

Softer handover: the signals from different cells, but from

the same NodeB are merged in NodeB

CN CN CN

SRNC SRNC SRNC

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Before Handover During Handover After Handover

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in NodeB

Core Network

RNC (SRNC)

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in RNC

Core Network

Serving RNC

Drift RNC

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Merged in SRNC

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page70
Soft Handover Flow (SRNC
Relocation)
Core Network

RNC

Serving RNC

Node B
AirBridge

AirBridge

Soft handover is triggered by 1A/1B/1C or 1D event

UE RNC
RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control

Measurement Report (1A/1B/1C or 1D)

Active Set Update

Active Set Update Complete

Measurement Control

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page72
Soft Handover Flow (Add Branch in AS)
UE NodeB(new) RNC

Measurement Report
Decision to
setup new RL
RL Setup Req.
RL Setup Rsp.
DL Synchronization
DL Synchronization

Active Set Update

Active Set Update Complete

UE NodeB (old) RNC

Measurement Report
Decision to
delete a RL
Active Set Update

Active Set Update Complete

RL Deletion Req.

RL Deletion Rsp.

CN CN

SRNC SRNC

NodeB NodeB NodeB NodeB

Before Handover After Handover

Radio Link can not exist simultaneously

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page75
Intra-Frequency Hard Handover
Intra-Frequency hard handover is triggered by 1D event
UE RNC

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Report (1D)

Decision to
setup new RL

Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Intra-Freq)

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Control (2D & 2F)

Measurement Report(2D)
Decision to enter
compress mode
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Inter-Freq)

Measurement Report
Decision to
setup new RL
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page77
CS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow
(UMTS->GSM)
UE RNC 3G MSC 2G MSC BSC

RRC Connection Setup Procedure

Measurement Control (Intra-freq)

Measurement Control (2D & 2F)

Measurement Report(2D)
Decision to enter
compress mode
Physical Channel Reconfiguration

Physical Channel Reconfiguration Complete

Measurement Control (Inter-RAT)

Measurement Report (GSM)

Decision to
handover to GSM
Relocation Required
Prepare Handover
Handover Request

Handover Request ACK

Prepare Handover
Response
Relocation Command
Inter-System Handover Command
Handover Complete

Handover Compltet
Send END
Signal Request
Iu Release Command
Iu Release Complete

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page78
PS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow (UMTS-
>GSM & UE in CELL_FACH, CELL_PCH or
URA_PCH)
UE SRNC SGSN

1. UE triggers
inter-RAT cell
reselection

2. SRNS context transfer

3. Iu Release Command

4. Iu Release Complete

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page80
PS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow
(UMTS->GSM & UE in CELL_DCH)
UE NodeB SRNC SGSN

1. Measurement Report (2D event)

2. Compressed Mode Triggered

3. Measurement Control(Inter-RAT)
4. Measurement Report
Handover Desicion
5. Cell Change Order
6. Radio Link Failure
7. SRNS Context Transfer

8. Iu Release Command

9. Iu Release Complete
10. Radio Link Deletion
Request
11. Radio Link Deletion
Response

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page81
Inter-RAT Handover Flow (GSM->UMTS)
UE NodeB RNC 3G MSC 2G MSC BSS

Handover Request
Prepare Handover
Relocation Requeset
RL setup requeset
RL setup response
Relocation Requeset
ACK
Prepare Handover RSP
Handover Command
Inter-System to UTRAN Handover Command
RL Restore Indicaton
Handover Complete
Relocation Complete
Send End Signal
UTRAN Capacity Info Request
Clear command
UE Capacity Info Enquiry
Clear complete

UTRAN Capacity Info Confirm Send end signal

UE Capacity Info response
UE Capacity Info Confirm

www.huawei.com

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Objectives
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Describe the development of 3G

Outline the advantage of CDMA principle

Characterize code sequence

Outline the fundamentals of RAN

Describe feature of wireless propagation

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page2
Different Service, Different
Technology
1G 1980s 2G 1990s 3G
Analog Digital IMT-2000

AMPS GSM
UMTS
CDMA WCDMA
TACS Technologies IS-95 Demands
drive drive cdma
NMT TDMA 2000
IS-136
Others TD-SCDMA
PDC

3G provides compositive services for both operators and subscribers

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
3G Evolution
Proposal of 3G
IMT-2000: the general name of third generation mobile
communication system

The third generation mobile communication was first

proposed in 1985and was renamed as IMT-2000 in the
year of 1996
Commercialization: around the year of 2000

Work band : around 2000MHz

The highest service rate :up to 2000Kbps

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page6
Bands WCDMA Used
Main bands
1920 ~ 1980MHz / 2110 ~ 2170MHz
Supplementary bands: different country maybe different
1850 ~ 1910 MHz / 1930 MHz ~ 1990 MHz (USA)
1710 ~ 1785MHz / 1805 ~ 1880MHz (Japan)
890 ~ 915MHz / 935 ~ 960MHz (Australia)
...
Frequency channel numbercentral frequency5, for
main band:
UL frequency channel number 96129888
DL frequency channel number : 1056210838

conversational

streaming

interactive

background

Time Delay

WCDMA
CN: based on MAP and GPRS
RTT: WCDMA

cdma2000 TD-SCDMA
CN: based on ANSI 41 and CDMA CN: based on MAP and GPRS
MIP RTT: TD-SCDMA
RTT: cdma2000

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page10
Multiple Access and Duplex
Technology
Multiple Access Technology
Frequency division multiple access (FDMA)

Time division multiple access (TDMA)

Code division multiple access (CDMA)

FDMA TDMA

Power

CDMA

Power

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
Multiple Access and Duplex
Technology
Duplex Technology
Frequency division duplex (FDD)

Time division duplex (TDD)

Power Time

USER 2

FDD USER 1
UL DL
Frequency

Power
Time
DL
USER 2
UL
DL
TDD DL
USER 1

Frequency

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

CN Core Network
CS PS CS PS
Iu-CS Iu-PS Iu-CS Iu-PS
RNS RNS
Iur
RNC RNC
UTRAN
Iub Iub Iub Iub

Node B Node B Node B Node B

Uu
UE
Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page16
WCDMA Network Version Evolution

MBMS
HSUPA
IMS
CS domain change to HSDPA 3GPP Rel6
GSM/GPRS CN NGN
WCDMA RTT WCDMA RTT 3GPP Rel5
3GPP Rel4
3GPP Rel99

2000 2001 2002 2005

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17
WCDMA Network Version Evolution
Features of R6
MBMS is introduced
HSUPA is introduced to achieve the service rate up to 5.76Mbps

Features of R7
HSPA+ is introduced, which adopts higher order modulation and MIMO
Max DL rate: 28Mbps, Max UL rate:11Mbps

Features of R8
HSPA+ PhaseII is introduced, which adopts 64QAM+MIMO or 64QAM+DC
in downlink (Defined by 3GPP 25.XXX)
LTE is introduced which adopts OFDMA instead of CDMA (Defined by 3GPP
36.XXX)
Max DL rate: 100Mbps, Max UL rate: 50Mbps (with 20MHz bandwidth)

Duplication avoidance
GC Nt DC
C-plane signaling UuS boundary
U-plane information

control
RRC L3
control

control

control
control

PDCP PDCP L2/PDCP

BMC L2/BMC

RLC RLC L2/RLC

RLC RLC
RLC RLC
RLC RLC

MAC L2/MAC

PHY L1

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page19
General Protocol Mode for UTRAN
Terrestrial Interface
The structure is based on the principle that the layers and
planes are logically independent of each other.

Radio Control Plane User Plane

Network
Layer Application Data
Protocol Stream(s)

Transport Transport Network Transport Network Transport Network

Network User Plane Control Plane User Plane
Layer ALCAP(s)

Signaling Signaling Data

Bearer(s) Bearer(s) Bearer(s)

Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page20
Iu-CS Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
RANAP Iu UP
Layer

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

Radio Control Plane User plane

Network
Layer RANAP Iu UP

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page23
Iub Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network
Layer NBAP Iub FP

NCP CCP
Transport Network
Control Plane

Transport Transport Network

Network Transport Network ALCAP
User Plane User Plane
Layer

SAAL UNI SAAL UNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
Iur Interface
Radio Control Plane User plane
Network Iur Data
RNSAP
Layer Stream

Transport Network
Transport Network Control Plane Transport Network
User Plane User Plane
Transport
Network ALCAP
Layer SCCP
A B
MTP3-B MTP3-B

SAAL NNI SAAL NNI AAL2 PATH

ATM
Physical Layer

2. CDMA Principle

3. WCDMA Network Architecture and protocol structure

4. WCDMA Wireless Fundamental

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

modulated
bit symbol chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Despreading Demodulation
Signal Decoding & Deinterleaving

Receiver

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
WCDMA Source Coding
AMR (Adaptive Multi-Rate)
CODEC Bit Rate (kbps)
Speech
AMR_12.20 12.2 (GSM EFR)
A integrated speech codec with 8
AMR_10.20 10.2
source rates
AMR_7.95 7.95
The AMR bit rates can be controlled
AMR_7.40 7.4 (TDMA EFR)
by the RAN depending on the
system load and quality of the AMR_6.70 6.7 (PDC EFR)

speech connections AMR_5.90 5.9

Video Phone Service AMR_5.15 5.15

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

modulated
bit symbol chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Despreading Demodulation
Signal Decoding & Deinterleaving

Receiver

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page29
WCDMA Block Coding - CRC
Block coding is used to detect if there are any
uncorrected errors left after error correction.

The cyclic redundancy check (CRC) is a common method

of block coding.

Adding the CRC bits is done before the channel encoding

and they are checked after the channel decoding.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page30
WCDMA Channel Coding
Effect
Enhance the correlation among symbols so as to recover the signal when
interference occurs
Provides better error correction at receiver, but brings increment of the
delay

Types
No Coding
Convolutional Coding (1/2, 1/3)
No Coding Uncoded N bits
Turbo Coding (1/3)
1/2 Convolutional
Coded 2N+16 bits
Coding
Code Block
of N Bits 1/3 Convolutional Coded 3N+24 bits
Coding

1/3 Turbo Coding Coded 3N+12 bits

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
WCDMA Interleaving
Effect
Interleaving is used to reduce the probability of consecutive bits
error
Longer interleaving
Input bits periods have better data protection with more
delay 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 ... 10111

0 0 1 0
0 0 0 ... Interleaving periods:

... ... ... ... 20, 40, or 80 ms

... ... ... 1
0 1 1 1

0 0 1 0
0 000101001011 Output bits
0 0 ...
Inter-column
permutation ... ... ... ...

... ... ... 1
0 1 1 1

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

modulated
bit symbol chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Despreading Demodulation
Signal Decoding & Deinterleaving

Receiver

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
Correlation
Correlation measures similarity between any two arbitrary
signals.

Identical
+1
and Orthogonal signals:
C1 -1 1 -1 1
-1

+1 Correlation = 1
C2 -1 1 -1 1
Identical signals
-1
+1 1 1 1 1

+1
C1 -1 1 -1 1
-1 Correlation = 0
+1 1 1 1 1
C2 Orthogonal signals
+1
-1 1 -1 1
-1

UE1: 1 1

UE2: 1 1

C1 : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C2 : 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

UE1c1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
UE2c2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

UE1c1 UE2c2 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0

UE1C1 UE2C2: 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0

UE1 Dispreading by c1: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Dispreading result: 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0
Integral judgment: 4 (means1) 4 (means1)

UE2 Dispreading by c2: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Dispreading result: 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0

Integral judgment: 4 (means1) 4 (means1)

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page36
Spectrum Analysis of Spreading &
Dispreading
P(f) Spreading code

P(f)

f f
P(f)
Narrowband signal Broadband signal

Noise & Other Signal

Recovered signal Noise+Broadband signal

Signal
P(f) Combination P(f)

f Spreading code f

Eb / No = Ec / No PG

Power

Ebit
Eb/No
Requirement
Max allowed interference

Processing Gain Max interference caused by

UE and others

Interference from
other UE
Echip

chip rate
Pr ocess Gain 10 log( )
bit rate

Process gain differs for each service.

If the service bit rate is greater, the process gain is smaller,
UE needs more power for this service, then the coverage of
this service will be smaller, vice versa.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page39
Spreading Technology
Spreading consists of 2 steps:
Channelization operation, which transforms data symbols into
chips

Scrambling operation is applied to the spreading signal

Data Chips after

symbol spreading

channelization scrambling

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page40
WCDMA Channelization Code
OVSF Code (Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor) is used as
channelization code

Cch,8,0 = (1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1)
Cch,4,0 = (1,1,1,1)
Cch,8,1 = (1,1,1,1,-1,-1,-1,-1)
Cch,2,0 = (1,1)
Cch,8,2 = (1,1,-1,-1,1,1,-1,-1)
Cch,4,1 = (1,1,-1,-1)

Cch,1,0 = (1) Cch,8,3 = (1,1,-1,-1,-1,-1,1,1)

Cch,8,4 = (1,-1,1,-1,1,-1,1,-1)
Cch,4,2 = (1,-1,1,-1)

Cch,2,1 = (1, -1) Cch,8,5 = (1,-1,1,-1,-1,1,-1,1)

Cch,4,3 = (1,-1,-1,1) Cch,8,6 = (1,-1,-1,1,1,-1,-1,1)

Cch,8,7 = (1,-1,-1,1,-1,1,1,-1)
SF = 1 SF = 2 SF = 4 SF = 8

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
WCDMA Channelization Code
SF = chip rate / symbol rate
High data rates low SF code

Low data rates high SF code

Radio bearer SF Radio bearer SF

Speech 12.2 UL 64 Speech 12.2 DL 128

Data 64 kbps UL 16 Data 64 kbps DL 32

Data 128 kbps UL 8 Data 128 kbps DL 16

Data 144 kbps UL 8 Data 144 kbps DL 16

Data 384 kbps UL 4 Data 384 kbps DL 8

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page42
Purpose of Channelization Code
Channelization code is used to distinguish different
physical channels of one transmitter
For downlink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to
separate different physical channels of one cell

For uplink, channelization code ( OVSF code ) is used to

separate different physical channels of one UE

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page43
Purpose of Scrambling Code
Scrambling code is used to distinguish different
transmitters
For downlink, scrambling code is used to separate different
cells in one carrier

For uplink, scrambling code is used to separate different

UEs in one carrier

There are 224 long uplink scrambling codes which are used for
scrambling of the uplink signals. Uplink scrambling codes are
assigned by RNC.

For downlink, 512 primary scrambling codes are used.

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page45
Primary Scrambling Code Group
Primary scrambling
code 0

Group 0 Primary scrambling

code 1

Primary
scrambling Group 1
codes for
downlink Primary scrambling
physical code 7
channels
Primary
scrambling code
Group 63 8*63

Primary
scrambling code
64 primary 8*63 +7
512 primary
scrambling scrambling code Each group consists of 8
codes groups primary scrambling codes

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page46
Code Multiplexing
Downlink Transmission on a Cell Level

Scrambling code

Channelization code 1 NodeB

User 1 signal

Channelization code 2

User 2 signal

Channelization code 3

User 3 signal

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page47
Code Multiplexing
Uplink Transmission on a Cell Level
Scrambling code 1
Channelization code
User 1 signal

Scrambling code 2
Channelization code
User 2 signal NodeB

Scrambling code 3
Channelization code
User 3 signal

Service Source Channel Coding

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding & Interleaving

modulated
bit symbol chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Decoding Reception

Despreading Demodulation
Signal Decoding & Deinterleaving

Receiver

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page49
Modulation Overview
Data to be transmitted:
Digital Input 1 0 1 0
time
Basic steady radio
wave:
carrier = A.cos(2pFt+f)

Amplitude Shift
Keying:
A.cos(2pFt+f)

Frequency Shift
Keying:
A.cos(2pFt+f)

Phase Shift Keying:

A.cos(2pFt+f)

1 0 1
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Information t
signal
NRZ coding
Digital Input
1

t
-1

High Frequency
Carrier
fo
Carrier

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Modulated
f=0 f=p f=0 BPSK
BPSK Waveform BPSK
signal

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page51
Modulation Overview
Digital Modulation - QPSK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NRZ Input 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1

I di-Bit Stream 1 -1 -1 1 -1

Q di-Bit Stream 1 1 1 -1 -1

I
Component

Q
Component

QPSK Waveform

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

NRZ I(t)
coding

fo
QPSK
o
90

NRZ Q(t)
coding
A Acos(ot + p/2)

QPSK : A 2 cos(ot f )
f
1 1 p/4
1 -1 7p/4
-1 1 3p/4
-1 -1 5p/4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

QPSK Waveform

1,1 -1,1 -1,1

1,-1 -1,-1

NRZ Output 1 1 -1 1 -1 1 1 -1 -1 -1

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page54
WCDMA Modulation
Different modulation methods corresponding to different
transmitting abilities in air interface

R99/R4: QPSK HSDPA: QPSK or 16QAM

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page55
Processing Procedure of WCDMA System
Transmitter

Service Source Channel

Spreading Modulation Transmission
Signal Coding Coding

modulated
bit symbol chip Radio
signal
Channel

Service Source Channel Reception

Despreading Demodulation
Signal Decoding Decoding

Receiver

Transmission Loss:
Amplitude
Path Loss + Multi-path Fading

Received
Signal

Time

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page57
Propagation of Radio Signal
Signal at Transmitter
2
0
15
10
5
dBm

0
-5
-10
-15
-20

Signal at Receiver
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
dB

-25
-30
-35 Fading
-40

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page58
Fading Categories
Fading Categories
Slow Fading
Fast Fading

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page59
Diversity Technique
Diversity technique is used to obtain uncorrelated signals
for combining
Reduce the effects of fading
Fast fading caused by multi-path
Slow fading caused by shadowing
Improve the reliability of communication
Increase the coverage and capacity

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
Diversity
Time diversity
Channel coding, Block interleaving

Frequency diversity
The user signal is distributed on the whole bandwidth
frequency spectrum

Space diversity

Polarization diversity

Correlator 1

The combined
Correlator 2 Combiner signal
Receive set
Correlator 3

Searcher correlator Calculate the

time delay and
signal strength
s(t) s(t)

t t

RAKE receiver help to overcome on the multi-path fading and enhance the receive
performance of the system

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page62
Summary
In this course, we have discussed basic concepts of WCDMA:
Spreading / Despreading principle

UTRAN Voice Coding

UTRAN Channel Coding

UTRAN Spreading Code

UTRAN Scrambling Code

UTRAN Modulation

UTRAN Transmission/Receiving

Copyright 2008 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page63
Thank you
www.huawei.com
WCDMA Power
Control Algorithm
and Parameters
www.huawei.com

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.

Foreword
Power control types:
Open loop power control

Closed loop power control

Inner loop power control

Outer loop power control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page2
References
3GPP TS 25.211
Physical Channels and Mapping of Transport Channels onto Physical
Channels (FDD)

3GPP TS 25.214
Physical Layer Procedures (FDD)

3GPP TS 25.331
RRC Protocol Specification

3GPP TS 25.433
UTRAN Iub Interface NodeB Application Part (NBAP) Signaling

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page3
Objectives
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Describe the purpose and function of power control

Perform parameters modification of open loop power

control

Perform parameters modification of inner loop power

control

Perform parameters modification of outer loop power

control

2. Open Loop Power Control

3. Closed Loop Power Control

Uplink transmission character Uplink power control function

Self-interference system Ensure uplink quality with minimum

Uplink capacity is limited by transmission power
interference level Decrease interference to other UE,
Near-far effect and increase capacity
Fading Solve the near-far effect
Save UE transmission power

Downlink transmission character Downlink power control function

Interference among different Ensure downlink quality with

subscribers minimum transmission power
Interference from other adjacent Decrease interference to other
cells cells, and increase capacity
Downlink capacity is limited by Save NodeB transmission power
NodeB transmission power
Fading

Channel Fading
15
Transmitting power
Receiving power
10
Relative power (dB)

-5

-10

-15

-20
0 200 400 600 800
Time (ms)

Open Loop Power

Control Closed Loop
Power Control

Uplink/Downlink open Uplink/Downlink inner

loop power control loop power control

Uplink/Downlink outer
loop power control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page9
Power Control for Physical Channels
Power control methods are adopted for these physical
channels:
" : can be applied; : can not be applied
Open Loop Closed Loop Power Control
Physical
Power Inner Loop Power Outer Loop
Channel
Control Control Power Control
DPDCH
DPCCH
SCH
PCCPCH
SCCPCH
PRACH
AICH
PICH

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page10
Common Physical Channel Power
Parameters
MaxTxPower
Parameter name: Max transmit power of cell [0.1dBm]

Recommended value: 430, namely 43dBm

PCPICHPower
Parameter name: PCPICH transmit power [0.1dBm]

Recommended value: 330, namely 33dBm

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
Common Physical Channel Power
Parameters (Cont.)
PSCHPower and SSCHPower
Parameter name: PSCH / SSCH transmit power [0.1dB]

Recommended value: -50, namely -5dB

BCHPower
Parameter name: BCH transmit power [0.1dB]

Recommended value: -20, namely -2dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page12
Common Physical Channel Power
Parameters (Cont.)
MaxFachPower
Parameter name: Max transmit power of FACH [0.1dB]

Recommended value: 10, namely 1dB

PCHPower
Parameter name: PCH transmit power [0.1dB]

Recommended value: -20, namely -2dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page13
Common Physical Channel Power
Parameters (Cont.)
AICHPowerOffset
Parameter name: AICH power offset

Recommended value: -6, namely -6dB

PICHPowerOffset
Parameter name: PICH power offset

Recommended value: -7, namely -7dB

2. Open Loop Power Control

3. Closed Loop Power Control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page15
Contents
2. Open Loop Power Control
2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview

2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control

2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

Purpose Principle Application

Calculate the initial Estimates the Open loop power

transmission power downlink signal control is applied only
of uplink/downlink power loss on at the beginning of
channels propagation path connection setup to set
Path loss of the the initial power value
uplink channel is
related to the
downlink channel

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page17
Contents
2. Open Loop Power Control
2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview

2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control

2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC RRC

Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
Open loop power parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
control of PRACH NBAP NBAP

Start RX
description
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP NBAP

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

5. Downlink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP
6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP

Start TX
description

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup

RRC RRC
8. Radio Link Restore Indication
NBAP NBAP

9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete

RRC RRC

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page19
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Power ramping for preamble retransmission:

Power Ramp Step

Power Offset Pp-m

Pre-
amblen
Pre-
amble3
Preamble_Initial
Pre-
amble2
Message
Pre-
_Power 10ms or20ms
amble1

PRACH
t p-p t p-m
Timing offset AI

AICH
t p-a

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page20
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
When UE needs to set up a RRC connection, the initial
power of uplink PRACH preamble can be calculated
according to the following formula:

Preamble_Initial_Power = PCPICHPower - CPICH_RSCP +

UL interference + Constantvalue

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page21
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters
Constantvalue
Parameter name: Constant value for calculating initial TX
power

Recommended value: -20, namely -20dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
AICHTxTiming
Parameter name: AICH transmission timing

Content:
When AICHTXTIMING = 0,

tp-p,min = 15360 chips, tp-a = 7680 chips, tp-m = 15360 chips

When AICHTXTIMING = 1,

tp-p,min = 20480 chips, tp-a = 12800 chips, tp-m = 20480 chips

Recommended value: 1

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page23
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
PowerRampStep
Parameter name: Power increase step

Recommended value: 2, namely 2dB

PreambleRetransMax
Parameter name: Max preamble retransmission

Recommended value: 20

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page25
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
Mmax
Parameter name: Max preamble loop

Recommended value: 8

NB01min / NB01max
Parameter name: Random back-off lower / upper limit

Recommended value: 0 for both NB01min / NB01max

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page26
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
PowerOffsetPpm
Parameter name: Power offset

Recommended value:

Message Data Part PowerOffsetPpm GainFactorBetaC GainFactorBetaD

Signaling -3 13 15

Service -2 10 15

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
Parameters diagrammatic presentation
Power Ramp Step Message Power Offset

Message
Initial
Power

Preamble Ramping Cycle

Preamble Ramping Procedure

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page28
PRACH Open Loop Power Control
Parameters (Cont.)
The transmit power on the PRACH cannot be greater
than the maximum allowed uplink transmit power:

MaxAllowedUlTxPower
Parameter name: Max allowed UE UL TX power

Recommended value: 24, namely 24dBm

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page29
Contents
2. Open Loop Power Control
2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview

2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control

2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC RRC

Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP NBAP

Start RX
description
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP NBAP

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

DL DPCH open loop DCH - FP

5. Downlink Synchronization
DCH - FP
power control 6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP

Start TX
description

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup

RRC RRC
8. Radio Link Restore Indication
NBAP NBAP

9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete

RRC RRC

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page31
DL DPDCH Open Loop Power Control
When a dedicated channel is set up, the initial power of
downlink DPDCH can be calculated according to the
following formula:

R Eb PCPICH
Pinit ( ) DL PTotal
W No ( Ec / No)CPICH

1 timeslot

Downlink
Transmit
Power PO2
PO1
PO3

Data1 TPC TFCI Data2 Pilot

DPDCH DPCCH DPDCH DPCCH

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page33
Downlink Power Control Restriction
The power of downlink dedicated channel is limited by
an upper and lower limit for each radio link

RlMaxDlPwr/RlMinDlPwr
Parameter name: RL Max/Min DL TX power

Recommended value is shown in the next page

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page34
Downlink Power Restriction Parameters
Recommended configurations for typical services:
RL Min Downlink
RL Max Downlink
Service Transmit Power Downlink SF
Transmit Power (dB)
(dB)
CS Domain
12.2 kbps AMR -3 -18 128
28 kbps -2 -17 64
32 kbps -2 -17 64
56 kbps 0 -15 32
64 kbps 0 -15 32
PS Domain
8 kbps -8 -23 128
32 kbps -4 -19 64
64 kbps -2 -17 32
144 kbps 0 -15 16
256 kbps 2 -13 8
384 kbps 4 -11 8

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page35
Contents
2. Open Loop Power Control
2.1 Open Loop Power Control Overview

2.2 PRACH Open Loop Power Control

2.3 Downlink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

2.4 Uplink Dedicated Channel Open Loop Power Control

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request

RRC RRC

Allocate RNTI
Select L1 and L2
parameters
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP NBAP

Start RX
description
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP NBAP

4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup

5. Downlink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP
6. Uplink Synchronization
DCH - FP DCH - FP

Start TX
description

7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup

RRC RRC
UL DPCH open loop NBAP
8. Radio Link Restore Indication
NBAP
power control
9. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete
RRC RRC

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page37
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power Control
The initial power of the uplink DPCCH can be calculated
according to the following formula:

DPCCH_Initial_Power = DPCCH_Power_Offset - CPICH_RSCP

Where:

DPCCH_Power_Offset is provided by the RNC to the UE via RRC

signaling

CPICH_RSCP is the received signal code power of the PCPICH

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page38
UL DPCCH Open Loop Power
Control Parameter
DefaultConstantValue
Parameter name: Constant value configured by default

Recommended value: -22, namely -22dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page39
Uplink Power Control Restriction
There are four parameters which correspond to the
maximum allowed transmit power of four classes of
services:
MaxUlTxPowerforConv
MaxUlTxPowerforStr
MaxUlTxPowerforInt
MaxUlTxPowerforBac
Parameter name: Max UL TX power of
conversational/streaming/interactive/background service

Recommended value: 24, namely 24dBm

2. Open Loop Power Control

3. Closed Loop Power Control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page41
Contents
3. Closed Loop Power Control
3.1 Closed Loop Power Control Overview

3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control

3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control

3.4 Outer Loop Power Control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page42
Closed Loop Power Control Overview
Why closed loop power control is needed?
Open loop power control is not accurate enough, it can only
estimate the initial transmission power
Closed loop power control can guarantee the QoS with
minimum power. By decreasing the interference, the system
capacity will be increased

Outer Loop Inner Loop

BLERmea>BLERtarSIRtar SIRmea>SIRtar TPC=0
SIRtar TPC
BLERtar BLERmea<BLERtarSIRtar SIRmeaSIRtar TPC=1 TPC=1 Power
TPC=0 Power
Until Until
BLERmea=BLERtar SIRmea=SIRtar

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page43
Contents
3. Closed Loop Power Control
3.1 Closed Loop Power Control Overview

3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control

3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control

3.4 Outer Loop Power Control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page44
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control
NodeB compares the measured SIR to the target SIR,
then derives TPC and sends the TPC Decision to UE

TPC Decision
Compare SIRmea with SIRtar ( 0, 1 )
SIRmea SIRtar TPC = 0 Single RL / Soft HO
SIRmea SIRtar TPC = 1 PCA1 / PCA2

Inner Loop Generate TPC_cmd

( -1, 0, 1 )

Set SIRtar Adjust DPCCH Tx

Transmit TPC DPCCH =TPCTPC_cmd
NodeB UE

Adjust DPDCH Tx
( c , d )

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page45
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with
Single Radio Link
For single radio link and PCA1, UE derives one TPC_cmd
in each time slot as follows:

TPC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

TPC_cmd -1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1 1 1 -1

This control is performed in each time slot, so

the power control frequency is 1500Hz

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page46
Uplink Inner Loop PCA2 with
Single Radio Link
For single radio link and PCA2, UE derives one TPC_cmd
in each 5-slot group as follows:
10ms radio frame

TPC Group 1 Group 2 Group 3

TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

TPC_cmd

This control is performed in each 5-slot group,

so the power control frequency is 300Hz

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page47
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control with Soft
Handover
When UE enters soft handover state, on the NodeB side,
there are two phases :
Uplink synchronization phase

Multi-radio link phase

On UE side, UE will receive different TPCs from different

RLS in one time slot. Therefore, the UE should combine
all the TPCs to get a unique TPC_CMD

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page48
Uplink Inner Loop PCA1 with Soft Handover
CELL1 CELL2
For each slot, combine TPC from
the same RLS, then get Wi RL1-1 RL1-2

RLS1

Get TPC_cmd based on RLS2 RLS3

TPC_cmd = (W1, W2, WN)
CELL3 CELL4

RLS1-TPC (W1) 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0

RLS2-TPC (W2) 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

RLS3-TPC (W3) 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

TPC_cmd -1 -1 1 -1 -1 1 -1 -1 -1 -1

Combine TPC from same RLS

in each time slot
CELL1 CELL2

RL1-1 RL1-2
Calculate TPC_tempi for each RLSi RLS1

Calculate TPC_cmd RLS2 RLS3

If any TPC_tempi = -1, TPC_cmd = -1
N CELL3 CELL4
1
If
N
TPC _ temp
i 1
i 0.5 , TPC_cmd = 1

Otherwise, TPC_cmd = 0

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page50
Uplink Inner Loop PCA2 with Soft
Handover (Cont.)
10ms/frame
Group 1 Group 2 Group 3
TPC
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14

RLS1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

RLS2 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

RLS3 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1

TPC_tempi
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14

RLS1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0

RLS2 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0

RLS3 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 1

TPC_cmd
TS0 TS1 TS2 TS3 TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7 TS8 TS9 TS10 TS11 TS12 TS13 TS14

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 -1 0 0 0 0 0

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page51
Uplink Inner Loop Power Control
Parameters
PwrCtrlAlg
Parameter name: Power control algorithm selection

Recommended value: ALGORITHM1

UlTpcStepSize
Parameter name: UL closed loop power control step size

Recommended value: 1, namely 1dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page52
Contents
3. Closed Loop Power Control
3.1 Closed Loop Power Control Overview

3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control

3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control

3.4 Outer Loop Power Control

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page53
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
UE L1 compares the measured SIR to the target SIR, then
derives TPC and sends the TPC Decision to NodeB

Derive TPCest(k)
L3 set SIRtar
(0, 1)
DPC_MODE

Inner Loop
Generate PTPC(k)
L1 compare
SIRmea with
SIRtar
Calculate P(k)
Derive and transmit
NodeB TPC based on UE
DPC_MODE

Adjust DPCH Tx Power

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page54
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control Mode
Two DPC_MODE (Downlink Power Control Mode) could
be used:
If DPC_MODE = 0, UE sends a unique TPC in each slot,
UTRAN shall derive TPCest to be 0 or 1, and update the
power every slot

If DPC_MODE = 1, UE repeats the same TPC over 3 slots,

UTRAN shall derive TPCest over three slots to be 0 or 1, and
update the power every three slots

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page55
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
Mode Parameters
DpcMode
Parameter name: Downlink power control mode

Recommended value: SINGLE_TPC, namely DPC_MODE = 0

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page56
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
(Cont.)
After estimating the TPC, NodeB shall set the new downlink
power P(k) according to the following formula:

P( k ) P( k 1 ) PTPC ( k ) Pbal( k )

Where:
P(k-1) is (k-1):th downlink transmission power

PTPC(k) is the power adjustment due to TPCest(k)

Pbal (k) is correction value according to the downlink power balance

procedure. For a single radio link, Pbal (k) equals 0

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page57
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
(Cont.)
PTPC(k) is calculated according to the following:
If the value of Limited Power Increase Used parameter is
Not Used, then:

TPC if TPCest ( k ) 1
PTPC ( k )
TPC if TPCest ( k ) 0

Where:
TPCest (k) is the estimated TPC

TPC is downlink power adjustment step size, its determined by

the parameter FddTpcDlStepSize

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page58
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
(Cont.)
If the value of Limited Power Increase Used parameter is
Used, then:

TPC if TPCest ( k ) 1 and sum( k ) TPC Power _ Raise _ Limit

PTPC ( k ) 0 if TPCest ( k ) 1 and sum( k ) TPC Power _ Raise _ Limit
if TPCest ( k ) 0
TPC

Where: k 1
sum( k ) P TPC ( i )
i k DL _ Power _ Average_ Window_ Size

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page59
Downlink Inner Loop Power Control
Parameters
PC_INNER_LOOP_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control switch)
parameter

Recommended value: 0, namely OFF

FddTpcDlStepSize
Parameter name: FDD DL power control step size

Recommended value: STEPSIZE_1DB, namely 1dB

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
Downlink Power Balance
Purpose
Monitor the
The purpose of this procedure is to Tx power of
NodeBs and
reduce power drift between radio start the DPB
links in macro diversity system process

The start and stop of DPB when the

DPB switch is on
For the UEs in softer handover, the
NodeB
RNC evaluate the power difference NodeB

of the radio links and decide whether

to start or stop DPB
For the UEs in soft handover, DPB is DPB process
always active

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page61
Downlink Power Balance Parameters
PC_DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH
This is one switch in PcSwitch (Power control switch)
parameter

Recommended value: 1, namely ON

3.2 Uplink Inner Loop Power Control

3.3 Downlink Inner Loop Power Control

3.4 Outer Loop Power Control

Different curves
correspond to
different multi-path
environment
BLER

SIR

Measure BLER of received Measure SIR and

data and compare with the compare with SIRtar
BLERtar
Out loop Inner loop

Set BLERtar
Set SIRtar Transmit TPC
RNC NodeB UE

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page65
Initial SIR Setting
The initial SIR target value (Init_SIR_target) is service-
dependent and is provided by the RNC to the NodeB

For the SRB and TRB, the values of SIR target,

Max_SIR_target, and Min_SIR_target must fulfill the
following requirement: Min_SIR_target SIR target
Max_SIR_target

BLERmeas,i ( n 1 ) BLERtar ,i
SIRtar ( n ) MAX SIRtar ( n 1 ) Stepi Factor
BLERtar ,i

Where:
i is the ith transport channel

n is the nth adjustment period

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page67
SIR Target Adjustment Limitation
The parameters Max_SIR_increase_step and
Max_SIR_decrease_step limit the adjustment range of the
SIRtar, and the algorithm is:
If SIRtar 0 and SIRtar Max_SIR_increase_step,
then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) + Max_SIR_increase_step
If SIRtar 0 and ABS (SIRtar) Max_SIR_decrease_step,
then SIRtar (n+1) = SIRtar (n) - Max_SIR_decrease_step

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page68
Parameters Example of BLER-based
Uplink Outer Loop Power Control
BLER Init_SIR Max_SIR Min_SIR OLPC SIR_adjust Max_SIR_inc Max_SIR_dec
Service
target _target _target _target period ment_step rease_step rease_step
SRB 3.4K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 40 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB
SRB 13.6K 0.01 4 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.01 dB 0.5 dB 0.2 dB
AMR 12.2K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.005 dB 0.5 dB 0.2 dB
CSD 64K 0.002 4 dB 7 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.002 dB 1 dB 0.1 dB
PS I/B 8K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 40 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB
PS I/B 16K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB
PS I/B 32K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB
PS I/B 64K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB

PS I/B 128K 0.01 2 dB 5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB

PS I/B 144K 0.01 2.5 dB 5.5 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB

PS I/B 256K 0.01 4 dB 7 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB

PS I/B 384K 0.01 6 dB 9 dB 2 dB 20 ms 0.004 dB 0.4 dB 0.2 dB

Recommended value: 1, namely ON

Copyright 2010 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page70
Uplink Outer-Loop Power Control
Based on BER
The OLPC based on the BER is similar to the OLPC based
on the BLER, but the BER is used as the control object.

When the UE is in discontinuous transmission (DTX) mode,

the RNC cannot receive data or update the BLER.
Therefore, the BER is used to solve this problem.

Measure BLER of
L3 received data and
compare with the
BLERtar

Outer loop
Set
Inner loop SIRtar

L1 Measure SIR and

compare with SIRtar

Transmit TPC
NodeB UE

Foreword
The WCDMA system is a self-interfering system, so the
capacity, coverage, and QoS are mutually affected

The target of load control is to maximize the system

capacity while ensuring coverage and QoS, and provide
differentiated services for users

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page2
References
3GPP TS 25.133: Requirements for Support of Radio Resource
Management (FDD)
3GPP TS 25.215: Physical Layer - Measurements (FDD)
3GPP TS 25.304: UE Procedures in Idle Mode and Procedures
for Cell Reselection in Connected Mode
3GPP TS 25.321: Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol
Specification
3GPP TS 25.331: Radio Resource Control (RRC)
3GPP TS 25.413: UTRAN Iu Interface RANAP Signaling

Describe the realization method of load control

Perform the parameter adjustment of load control

2. Load Control Algorithms

1.2 Load Measurement

1.3 Priorities Involved in Load Control

Two kinds of capacity in WCDMA system:

Hard capacity:
Cell DL OVSF code

Iub transport resource

NodeB processing capability (NodeB credit)

Soft capacity:
Cell power (UL and DL)

PUC: Potential User Control CAC: Call Admission Control

IAC: Intelligent Access Control LDB : Intra-frequency Load Balancing
LDR: Load Reshuffling OLC: Overload Control

Resources
Load Control Algorithm
Power Code NodeB Credits Iub Bandwidth
PUC - - -
IAC
CAC
LDB - - -
LDR
OLC - -
: not considered; : considered

1.2 Load Measurement

1.3 Priorities Involved in Load Control

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page11
Load Measurement Quantities
The major load-related measurement quantities are as follows:
Uplink Received Total Wideband Power (RTWP)
Downlink Transmitted Carrier Power (TCP)
Non-HSPA power: TCP excluding the power used for transmission
on HSPA channels
Provided Bit Rate (PBR) on HS-DSCH
PBR on E-DCH
Power Requirement for GBR (GBP) on HS-DSCH: minimum power
required to ensure the GBR on HS-DSCH
Received Scheduled E-DCH Power Share (RSEPS): power of the E-
DCH scheduling service

The reporting periodReporting

Measurement parameters for Parameter
Period setting different measurement
RTWP
quantities: ChoiceRprtUnitForUlBasicMeas
TenMsecForUlBasicMeas
RSEPS
MinForUlBasicMeas
TCP ChoiceRprtUnitForDlBasicMeas
Non-HSDPA power TenMsecForDlBasicMeas
MinForDlBasicMeas
GBP ChoiceRprtUnitForHsdpaPwrMeas
TenMsecForHsdpaPwrMeas
MinForHsdpaPwrMeas
HS-DSCH PBR ChoiceRprtUnitForHsdpaRateMeas
TenMsecForHsdpaPrvidRateMeas
MinForHsdpaPrvidRateMeas
E-DCH PBR ChoiceRprtUnitForHsupaRateMeas
TenMsecForHsupaPrvidRateMeas
MinForHsupaPrvidRateMeas

1.2 Load Measurement

1.3 Priorities Involved in Load Control

Three kinds of priorities involved in load control:

User priority

RAB integrated priority

User integrated priority

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page15
User Priority
There are three levels of user priority:
gold (high priority), silver (middle priority) and copper (low
priority) users

User priority Gold Silver Copper gold

user
Uplink 384kbps 128kbps 64kbps

Downlink 384kbps 128kbps 64kbps

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page16
User Priority (Cont.)
The mapping relation between user priority and ARP is
configured in RNC by SET UUSERPRIORITY
Typical relation between user priority and ARP:

ARP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

User
Gold Silver Copper
Priority

RAB integrated priority are set according to :

ARP

Traffic Class

Traffic Handling Priority (THP, only for interactive services)

Carrier types: HSPA or DCH

Service Bear
ARP Traffic Class
ID type

Services attribution in the cell B 1 Interactive HSDPA

A 1 Interactive DCH
Service Bear
ARP Traffic Class C 2 Conversational DCH
ID type
A 1 Interactive DCH D 2 Background DCH

B 1 Interactive HSDPA Based on Traffic Class, HSPA priority is higher

C 2 Conversational DCH
Service Bear
D 2 Background DCH Traffic Class ARP
ID type
C Conversational 2 DCH
B Interactive 1 HSDPA
A Interactive 1 DCH
D Background 2 DCH

For multiple-RAB user, the user integrated priority is

based on the highest priority of RAB

Recommended value: ARP

CarrierTypePriorInd
Parameter name: Indicator of Carrier Type Priority

Recommended value: NONE

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page22
PUC Principle
The Potential User Control (PUC) algorithm only controls
the Inter-frequency cell reselection of the potential UE,
and prevents UE from camping on a heavily loaded cell

The PUC is valid only for inter-frequency cells, and it

takes effect only in the downlink

Potential UE:
UE in idle mode

UE in Cell-FACH, Cell-PCH and URA-PCH

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page24
PUC Load Judgment
For a cell not supporting DC-HSDPA, the RNC periodically
monitors the downlink load of the cell.
If the cell load is higher than the upper threshold
(SpucHeavy) plus the load level division hysteresis
(SpucHyst), the cell load is considered heavy.

If the cell load is lower than the lower threshold (SpucLight)

minus SpucHyst, the cell load is considered light.

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page25
PUC Load Judgment
For a cell supporting DC-HSDPA, the RNC concurrently
monitors the load state of each single cell and load state of the
cell group.
The determination of load state of a single cell is the same as that
of a cell not supporting DC-HSDPA
The determination of load state of the cell group is as follows:
If the load of the two cells is higher than their upper thresholds
(SpucHeavy) plus their load level division hystereses (SpucHyst), the load
of the cell group is considered heavy.
If the load of the two cells is lower than their lower thresholds (SpucLight)
minus their load level division hystereses (SpucHyst), the load of the cell
group is considered light.

Threshold

Cell TCP
Heavy?
Light?
Normal? System
cell reselection information
parameters
RNC NodeB UE

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page27
PUC Procedure (Cont.)
Light load Normal load
Freq1 Modify 1. Sintersearch Stay
2. Qoffset
System Info System Info
SIB3,11 SIB3,11

Heavy load

Freq2 1. Modify
Sintersearch
System Info
2. Qoffset SIB3,11
Idle state CCH state

SpucHeavy
Parameter name: Load level division threshold 1
Recommended value: 70, namely 70%

SpucLight
Parameter name: Load level division threshold 2
Recommended value: 45, namely 45%

Recommended value: 5, namely 5%

PucPeriodTimerLen
Parameter name: PUC period timer length

Recommended value: 1800, namely 1800s

Recommended value: -2, namely -4dB

OffSinterHeavy
Parameter name: Sintersearch offset 2

Recommended value: 2, namely 4dB

Recommended value: -4, namely -4dB

OffQoffset1Heavy (for RSCP)

Parameter name: Qoffset1 offset 2

Recommended value: 4, namely 4dB

Recommended value: -4, namely -4dB

OffQoffset2Heavy (for Ec/No)

Parameter name: Qoffset2 offset 2

Recommended value: 4 namely 4dB

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

LDB affect UEs in all states

Recommended value: OFF

IntraFreqLdbPeriodTimerLen
Parameter name: Intra-frequency LDB period timer length

Recommended value: 1800, namely 1800s

CellUnderrunThd
Parameter name: Cell underload threshold
Recommended value: 30, namely 30%

PCPICHPowerPace
Parameter name: Pilot power adjustment step
Recommended value: 2, namely 0.2dB

MaxPCPICHPower
Parameter name: Max transmit power of PCPICH
Recommended value: 346, namely 34.6dBm

MinPCPICHPower
Parameter name: Min transmit power of PCPICH
Recommended value: 313, namely 31.3dBm

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

If a cell is high loaded, a new service will affect the QoS

of ongoing user, even result in call drop

CAC is used to determine whether the system resources

are sufficient to accept a new user's access request or
not

NodeB credit CAC

CAC algorithm switch: ON
Cell CAC algorithm switch-CRD_ADCTRL: ON

HSDPA user number CAC

Cell CAC algorithm switch-HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL: OFF

HSUPA user number CAC

Cell CAC algorithm switch-HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL: OFF

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

Handover

R99 services setup

RRC connection setup and handover have higher priority

Recommended value: SF32

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

Handover

Services setup

RRC connection setup and handover have higher priority

Uplink call
admission decision

No
Admitted?

Yes

Downlink call
admission desicion

No
Admitted?

Yes

Request accepted Request rejected

Algorithm 2: based on Equivalent Number of User (ENU)

Algorithm 3: loose call admission control algorithm

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page53
Power CAC for RRC Connection Setup
For the RRC Connection Setup Request for the reason of
emergency call, detach, or registration: Direct Admission
For the RRC connection setup request for other reasons:
When power-based admission is based on power (algorithm 1 and
algorithm 3), the UL or DL OLC trigger threshold (UlOlcTrigThd or
DlOlcTrigThd) is used for admission.
When power-based admission is based on the ENU (algorithm 2),
the admission decision is made as follows:
When UL_UU_OLC or DL_UU_OLC is set to 1, RRC connection setup
request is rejected when the cell is in the overload state. If the cell is not in
the overload state, the UL or DL OLC trigger threshold is used for power-
based admission.
When UL_UU_OLC or DL_UU_OLC is set to 0, the UL or DL OLC trigger
threshold is used for power-based admission.
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page54
Power-Based Admission Algorithm 1
for RAB Setup
Power-based admission decision based on algorithm 1
consists of uplink power-based admission decision and
downlink power-based admission decision procedures:
Uplink admission decision:
R99 cell

HSPA cell

Downlink admission decision:

R99 cell

HSPA cell

Recommended value: 0, namely 0%

UlNonCtrlThdForHo/UlNonCtrlThdForAMR/UlNonCtrlThdF
orNonAMR/UlNonCtrlThdForOther
Parameter name: UL threshold of handover/Conv AMR/Conv
non_AMR/other service

Recommended value: 80%, 75%, 75%, 60%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page57
Algorithm 1 - Uplink for HSPA Cell
1. The RNC obtains the uplink RTWP of the cell and
calculates the current uplink load factor.
After the Received Scheduled E-DCH Power Share (RSEPS)
measurement is introduced, the UL RTWP is divided into
two parts:
Controllable part

Uncontrollable part

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page58
Algorithm 1 - Uplink for HSPA Cell
2. The RNC calculates the uplink load increment UL
based on the service request using Ec/N0 of the GBR of
the service, neighboring interference factor, and AF of
the service

1).

2).

3).

4).

5).

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page60
Algorithm 1 - Uplink for HSPA Cell
3. The RNC determines whether to grant the UE admission:
The RNC admits the HSUPA scheduling services in either of the
following cases:
Formula 1, 2, or 3 is fulfilled.
Formula 4 is fulfilled.

The RNC admits the HSUPA non-scheduling services in either of the

following cases:
Formula 1, 2, or 3 is fulfilled.
Formulas 4 and 5 are fulfilled.

The RNC admits the DCH services when formulas 4 and 5 are
fulfilled
If the access request is rejected, the RNC performs the next step

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page61
Algorithm 1 - Uplink for HSPA Cell
4. The RNC checks whether the Control RTWP Anti-
interference function switch (RsvdBit1 subparameter of
the RsvdPara1 parameter) is enabled. If it is enabled, the
RNC checks whether the uplink equivalent user load
proportion of the cell is lower than 40%. If it is lower
than 40%, the RNC accepts the access request.
Otherwise, the RNC rejects the access request.

Recommended value: 0, namely 0%

UlCellTotalThd
Parameter name: UL total power threshold

Recommended value: 83, namely 83%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page63
Parameters of Power CAC (Cont.)
HsupaLowPriorityUserPBRThd
HsupaEqualPriorityUserPBRThd
HsupaHighPriorityUserPBRThd
Parameter name: Low/Equal/High priority HSUPA user PBR
threshold

Recommended value: 100%, 100%, 100%

Recommended value: 0, namely 0%

DlHOThd/DlConvAMRThd/DlConvNonAMRThd/DlOtherTh
d
Parameter name: DL threshold of handover/Conv AMR/Conv
non_AMR/other service

Recommended value: 85%, 80%, 80%, 75%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page66
Algorithm 1 - Downlink for HSPA Cell
1. The RNC calculates the downlink power increment
PDL for new service request
The power increment estimation for the DCH RAB in the
HSPA cell is similar to the DCH RAB in the R99 cell

The power increment estimation for HSDPA RAB PDL is

made on the basis of GBR, Ec/N0, non-orthogonal factor,
and so on

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page67
Algorithm 1 - Downlink for HSPA Cell
2. The RNC determines whether to grant the UE
admission:
Admission Decision for DCH RAB in the Downlink:
1).

2).

3).

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page68
Algorithm 1 - Downlink for HSPA Cell
2. The RNC determines whether to grant the UE
admission:
Admission Decision for DCH RAB in the Downlink:
If the current cell does not support DC-HSDPA, the RNC admits
the DCH RAB when either of the following conditions is met:
Condition A: Formulas 1 and 2 are fulfilled

Condition B: Formulas 1 and 3 are fulfilled

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page69
Algorithm 1 - Downlink for HSPA Cell
2. The RNC determines whether to grant the UE
admission:
Admission Decision for HSDPA RAB in the Downlink:
1).

2).

3).

4).

5).

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page70
Algorithm 1 - Downlink for HSPA Cell
2. The RNC determines whether to grant the UE
admission:
Admission Decision for HSDPA RAB in the Downlink:
If the current cell does not support DC-HSDPA, the RNC admits
the HSDPA RAB when any of the following conditions is met:
Condition C: Formula 1 (for streaming service) is fulfilled or Formula 2
(for BE service) is fulfilled

Condition D: Formulas 3 and 4 are fulfilled

Condition E: Formulas 3 and 5 are fulfilled

Recommended value: 90, namely 90%

DlHSUPARsvdFactor
Parameter name: DL HSUPA reserved factor

Recommended value: 0, namely 0%

Recommended value: 70, namely 70%

HsdpaBePBRThd
Parameter name: HSDPA best effort PBR threshold

Recommended value: 30, namely 30%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page73
Power-Based Admission Algorithm 2
for RAB Setup
When the CAC function uses algorithm 2, the admission
of uplink/downlink power resources uses the algorithm
depending on the Equivalent Number of Users (ENU)

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page74
Equivalent Number of Users
The 12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic is defined as one ENU. Thus,
the 12.2 kbit/s AMR traffic can be used to calculate the
ENU of all other services. The calculation is related to the
following factors:
Cell type, such as urban or suburban

Traffic domain, CS or PS

Coding type, turbo code or 1/2, 1/3 convolutional code

Traffic QoS, that is, Block Error Rate (BLER)

N
Get current total ENU ENU total ( N ) ENU i
i 1

Get the traffic characteristic, and

ENU new
estimate the increment of ENU

Calculate the predicted ENU ENU total ( N 1) ENU total ( N ) ENU new

Y
Smaller than
N
ENULoad ENU total ( N 1) / ENU max
the threshold?

admitted rejected

End of UL/DL CAC

Recommended value: 80

DlTotalEqUserNum
Parameter name: DL total equivalent user number

Recommended value: 80

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page77
Power-Based Admission Algorithm 3
for RAB Setup
Algorithm 3 is similar to algorithm 1. The difference is
that the estimated load increment in algorithm 3 is
always set to 0

In accordance with the current cell load (uplink load

factor and downlink TCP), the RNC determines whether
the cell load will exceed the threshold, with the
estimated load increment set to 0. If yes, the RNC rejects
the request. If not, the RNC accepts the request

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page79
NodeB Credit
CE is used to measure the channel demodulation
capability of the NodeBs. On the RNC side, it is referred
to the NodeB credit. On the NodeB side, it is the Channel
Element (CE)
The resource of one equivalent 12.2 kbit/s AMR voice
service, including 3.4 kbit/s signaling on DCCH, is defined
as one CE
There are two kinds of CE, that is, uplink CE supporting
uplink services and downlink CE supporting downlink
services. Therefore, one 12.2 kbit/s AMR voice service
consumes one uplink CE and one downlink CE
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page80
NodeB Credit CAC
NodeB credit CAC is involved in:
RRC connection setup

Handover

Services setup

RRC connection setup and handover have higher priority

DlHoCeCodeResvSf
Parameter name: DL handover credit and code reserved SF
Recommended value: SF32

HsupaCeConsumeSelection
Parameter name: HSUPA Credit Consume Type
Recommended value: MBR

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page85
Iub Resource CAC
Iub overbooking
The Iub overbooking feature considers the statistic
multiplexing of service activities and multiple users

Through the admission of more users, Iub overbooking

increases the resource utilization on the Iub interface

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page86
Iub Resource CAC (Cont.)
Activity factor
RT services, including conversational and streaming services,
are admitted at the Maximum Bit Rate (MBR):
Admission bandwidth = MBR x activity factor

NRT services, including interactive and background services,

are admitted at the GBR:
Admission bandwidth = GBR x activity factor

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page87
Iub Resource CAC Procedure
For handover of a user, the following requirements apply:
Load of the path + Bandwidth required by the user < Total
configured bandwidth of the path

For a new user, the following requirements apply:

Load of the path + Bandwidth required by the user < Total
configured bandwidth of the path - Bandwidth reserved for
handover

For rate upsizing of a user, the following requirements

apply:
Load of the path + Bandwidth required by the user < Total
configured bandwidth of the path - Congestion threshold
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page88
Parameters of Iub Resource CAC
FWDHORSVBW/BWDHORSVBW
Parameter name: Forward/Backward handover reserved bandwidth
Recommended value: 0, namely 0Kbit/s

FWDCONGBW/BWDCONGBW
Parameter name: Forward/Backward congestion threshold
Recommended value: 0, namely 0Kbit/s

FWDCONGCLRBW/BWDCONGCLRBW
Parameter name: Forward/Backward congestion clear threshold
Recommended value: 0, namely 0Kbit/s

2.3.2 CAC Based on Code Resource

2.3.3 CAC Based on Power Resource

2.3.4 CAC Based on NodeB Credit Resource

2.3.5 CAC Based on Iub Resource

2.3.6 CAC Based on the Number of HSPA Users

NodeB level
Maximum number of HSPA users in all the cells configured in one
NodeB

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page92
CAC of HSDPA Users
When HSDPA_UU_ADCTRL is set to 1, the HSDPA services have
to undergo admission decision based on the number of HSDPA
users.
When a new HSDPA service attempts to access the network,
the algorithm admits the service if the following conditions are
met:
The number of HSDPA users in the cell does not exceed the
maximum value specified by MaxHsdpaUserNum.
The number of HSDPA users in the NodeB does not exceed the
maximum value specified by NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum.
Otherwise, the HSDPA service is degraded to R99 service to
retry admission.

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page93
CAC of HSUPA Users
When HSUPA_UU_ADCTRL is set to 1, the HSUPA services have to
undergo admission decision based on the number of HSUPA users
When a new HSUPA service attempts to access the network, the
algorithm admits the service if the following conditions are met:
The number of the HSUPA users in the cell does not exceed the maximum
value specified by MaxHsupaUserNum.
The number of the HSUPA users in the NodeB does not exceed the
maximum value specified by NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum.

Otherwise, the HSUPA service is degraded to R99 service to retry

admission

Recommended value: 64

NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum
Parameter name: NodeB Max HSDPA User Number

Recommended value: 3840

Recommended value: 20

NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum
Parameter name: NodeB Max HSUPA User Number

Recommended value: 3840

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

No consideration about the priority of different users

No consideration about Directed Retry after CAC rejection

Intelligent means the algorithm can increase admission

successful rate

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

RNC estimates the distance between the UE and the cell

center by considering the propagation delay

RNC determines whether to perform RRC redirection

based on the estimation result

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page104
RRC Redirection for Service Steering
Purpose: Enable the successful RRC connection setup by
selecting an appropriate cell for the UE based on the requested
service.
During the RRC connection setup, the RNC implements service
steering between inter-frequency or inter-RAT cells according
to the cause of RRC connection setup. In addition, the RNC
considers the load of the cell for access and the redirection
factors to control the degree of load balancing
Algorithm switch: DrSwitch-DR_ RRC_DRD_SWITCH
Triggering factor: RedirFactorOfNorm or RedirFactorOfLDR
Target cell: RedirSwitch

RedirSwitch
Parameter name: Redirection Switch
Recommended value: OFF

RedirFactorOfNorm/RedirFactorOfLDR
Parameter name: Redirection Factor Of Normal/LDR
Recommended value: 0, 100

Algorithm switch: DrSwitch-DR_ RRC_DRD_SWITCH

Target cell: same-coverage inter-frequency neighboring

cells, which quality is large than threshold:

Recommended value: -18, namely -18dB

Target cell: inter-frequency neighboring cells or inter-RAT

neighboring cells

Recommended value: Only_To_Inter_Frequency

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page111
IAC - RAB DRD
Purpose
Select a suitable cell for a UE to access according to the HSPA+
technological satisfaction, service priority, and cell load
Scenario
RAB setup
RAB modification
DCCC channel reconfiguration
Non-periodic DRD:
Inter-frequency DRD
Inter-RAT DRD.

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

PS GBR negotiation

Initial rate negotiation

Target rate negotiation

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page114
PS MBR Negotiation
If the IE "Alternative RAB Parameter Values" is present in
the RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST or the
RELOCATION REQUEST message when a PS service is set
up, reconfigured, or handed over, then the RNC and the
CN negotiate the rate according to the UE capability to
obtain the MBR while ensuring a proper QoS

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page115
Parameters of PS MBR
Negotiation
PsSwitch-PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
Parameter name: PS rate negotiation switch for Streaming service

Recommended value: OFF

PsSwitch-PS_ BE_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
Parameter name: PS rate negotiation switch for BE service

Recommended value: OFF

PsSwitch-PS_BE_STRICT_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH
Parameter name: PS rate negotiation switch for strict BE service

Recommended value: OFF

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page116
PS GBR Negotiation
During the setup, reconfiguration, or handover of a real-
time PS service, if the RAB assignment message carries
multiple alternative GBRs and
PS_STREAM_IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH subparameter of the
PsSwitch parameter is set to 1, the RNC selects the
maximum rate as the GBR of this RAB and sends it to the
CN

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page117
Initial Rate Negotiation
For a BE service in the PS domain, the RNC selects an initial rate to
allocate bandwidth for the service before the admission request based
on cell resources in the following cases:
A service is set up
The UE state changes from CELL_FACH to CELL_DCH

Purpose: Enable UE admission at an appropriate rate based on the

service requested by the UE and the signal quality of the cell
The negotiation is based on the cell load information, which includes:
Uplink and downlink radio bearer status of the cell
Minimum spreading factor (SF) supported
HSPA capability

DCCC PS BE Initial Rate Dynamic

Actual Initial Rate
Switch Configuration Switch
In the uplink, the initial rate is the smaller one
of the MBR and 384 kbit/s.
ON ON
In the downlink, the initial rate is dynamically
set on the basis of Ec/N0.
In the uplink, the initial rate is the smaller one
of the MBR and the initial rate of the uplink BE
service (UlBeTraffInitBitrate).
ON OFF
In the downlink, the initial rate is the smaller
one of the MBR and the initial rate of the
downlink BE service (DlBeTraffInitBitrate)
OFF - MBR

Recommended value: ON

PsSwitch-PS_BE_INIT_RATE_DYNAMIC_CFG_SWITCH
Parameter name: PS rate negotiation switch for initial rate
reconfiguration

Recommended value: OFF

Recommended value: 30000, namely 30000ms

EcN0Ths
Parameter name: Ec/N0 threshold

Recommended value: 41, namely -4dB

DlBeTraffInitBitrate
Parameter name: DL BE traffic Initial bit rate

Recommended value: D64, namely 64kbit/s

Initial rate definition for HSPA services:

If the DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH subparameter of the
DraSwitch parameter is set to 1, the actual initial rate is the
initial rate of the HSUPA BE service (HsupaInitialRate).

If the DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH subparameter of the

DraSwitch parameter is set to 0, the actual initial rate is the
MBR.

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page122
Parameters of Initial Rate Negotiation
DraSwitch-DRA_HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH
Parameter name: Dynamic resource allocation switch for
HSUPA DCCC

Recommended value: ON

HsupaInitialRate
Parameter name: Initial rate of HSUPA BE traffic

Recommended value: D256, namely 256kbit/s

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page123
Target Rate Negotiation
For a BE service in the PS domain, if the cell resource-
based admission at the initial rate fails, the RNC selects a
target rate to allocate bandwidth for the service based
on cell resource in following cases:
Service setup

Soft handover

DCCC rate upsizing

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

The admission decision performed by CAC is based on

resources, such as code resources, power resources,
NodeB credits, and Iub resources

If the admission is successful, UE access is granted.

Otherwise, the RNC performs the next step

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page127
IAC - Preemption
By forcibly releasing the resources of lower-priority users,
the preemption function increases the access success rate
of higher-priority users
Precondition of preemption and queuing:
According to RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message,
preemption and queuing are supported

The preemption algorithm switch (PreemptAlgoSwitch) is

set to ON

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page128
Preemption Procedure
1. The RNC selects the target cell for preemption
For non-DC-HSDPA services: the RNC selects a suitable cell
according to the settings of the DRD functions

For DC-HSDPA services: the RNC selects the two cells in the
DC-HSDPA cell group as the target cell

3. The preemption algorithm determines the radio link

sets to be preempted
a. Selects SRNC users first. If no user under the SRNC is
available, the algorithm selects users under the DRNC.

b. Sorts the preemptable users by user integrated priority,

or sorts the preemptable RABs by RAB integrated priority.

c. Determines candidate users or RABs

Recommended value: OFF

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page132
IAC - Queuing
For PS services, after preemption fails, the RNC performs
queuing if the following conditions are met:
The RNC receives a RAB ASSIGNMENT REQUEST message
indicating that queuing is supported
The queuing algorithm switch (QueueAlgoSwitch) is set to
ON

The queuing function is triggered by the heartbeat timer

that is set by the PollTimerLen parameter. Each time the
timer expires, the RNC selects the service that meets the
requirement to make an admission attempt

Recommended value: OFF

MaxQueueTimeLen
Parameter name: Max queuing time length

Recommended value: 5, namely 5s

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page136
IAC - Low-Rate Access of the PS BE
Service
Low-rate access means access from the DCH at 0 kbit/s,
FACH, or enhanced FACH (E-FACH)

Low-rate access is used in the following scenarios:

RAB setup

Hard handover or SRNS relocation

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page137
Parameters of Low-Rate Access of the
PS BE Service
PsSwitch-PS_BE_EXTRA_LOW_RATE_ACCESS_SWITCH
Parameter name: PS rate negotiation switch for low rate
access

Recommended value: OFF

ZeroRateUpFailToRelTimerLen
Parameter name: Release 0 kbit/s Timer length for failed to
rate up

Recommended value: 180, namely 180s

2.4.1 IAC During RRC Connection Setup

2.4.2 Directed Retry Decision During RAB Procedure

2.4.3 Rate Negotiation at Admission Control

2.4.4 Admission Decision

2.4.5 Preemption

2.4.6 Queuing

2.4.7 Low-Rate Access of the PS BE Service

2.4.8 IAC for Emergency Calls

Admission is successful if the current remaining hard

resources are sufficient

If the hard resource admission fails preemption is

performed regardless of the preemption switch

RRC connection Admission Fails Fails Fails
Preemption DRD Redirection
setup request algorithm

Succeeds Succeeds Succeeds

RAB process

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page141
IAC for Emergency Calls (Cont.)
RAB Admission of Emergency Calls :
For power resource admission:
When EMC_UU_ADCTRL is on, power admission fails if the
system is in overload. Otherwise, the admission succeeds

If the CAC algorithm switch is off, the emergency calls are directly
admitted

Admission is successful if the current remaining hard

resources are sufficient

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page142
IAC for Emergency Calls (Cont.)
Preemption of Emergency Calls
If cell resource-based admission fails, preemption is
performed regardless of whether the preempt function is
enabled or not.

If EmcPreeRefVulnSwitch is set to ON, all non-emergency

users that have accessed the network can be preempted,
regardless of the preemption-prohibited attribute of the
users.

If EmcPreeRefVulnSwitch is set to OFF, only the non-

emergency users with preemption-allowed attribute can be
preempted.
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page143
Parameters of IAC for Emergency Calls
EmcPreeRefVulnSwitch
Parameter name: Preemptvulnerability for Emergency call
switch

Recommended value: ON

NBMCacAlgoSwitch-EMC_UU_ADCTRL
Parameter name: Cell CAC algorithm switch for UU resource
of emergency call

Recommended value: ON

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

2.5.1 Basic Congestion Triggering

2.5.2 LDR Procedure

2.5.3 LDR Actions

100%
section A Overload state: OLC
THOLC

section B
THLDR Basic congestion state: LDR

section C
Normal state

Purpose:
Optimizing cell resource distribution

Decreasing load level, increasing admission successful rate

Triggering:
Power, code, Iub or NodeB credit

Cell in the basic congestion Basic congestion

state relieved

LDR trigger
threshold

LDR release
threshold

Time

RNC periodic check

Hysteresis time: 1000ms

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page149
Parameters of LDR
NBMLdcAlgoSwitch-UL_UU_LDR/DL_UU_LDR
Parameter name: Cell LDC algorithm switch for LDR
Recommended value: OFF, OFF

UlLdrTrigThd/DlLdrTrigThd
Parameter name: UL/DL LDR trigger threshold
Recommended value: 55%, 70%

UlLdrRelThd/DlLdrRelThd
Parameter name: UL/DL LDR release threshold
Recommended value: 45%, 60%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page151
LDR Triggering - Code Resource
Congestion control based on code resource can be
enabled through the CELL_CODE_LDR subparameter of
the NBMLdcAlgoSwitch parameter

If the SF corresponding to the current remaining code of

the cell is larger than the value of CellLdrSfResThd, code
congestion is triggered and the related load reshuffling
actions are taken

Recommended value: OFF

CellLdrSfResThd
Parameter name: Cell LDR SF reserved threshold

Recommended value: SF8

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page153
LDR Triggering - Iub Resource
Congestion control based on Iub resource can be enabled
through the IUB_LDR subparameter of the
NodeBLdcAlgoSwitch parameter
Iub congestion control in both the uplink and downlink is
NodeB-oriented. So for the basic congestion caused by
Iub resource, all UEs under the NodeB are the objects of
related LDR actions

Recommended value: OFF

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page155
LDR Triggering NodeB Credit
Resource
The basic congestion caused by NodeB credit resource is
of the following types:
Type A: Basic congestion at local cell level

Type B: Basic congestion at local cell group level (if any)

Type C: Basic congestion at NodeB level

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page156
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
Parameter Parameter name Recommended value
Type A:
Cell LDC algorithm switch for LDR OFF
CELL_CREDIT_LDR
Type A:
UL LDR credit SF reserved threshold SF8
UlLdrCreditSfResThd
Type A:
DL LDR credit SF reserved threshold SF8
DlLdrCreditSfResThd

Type B: NodeB LDC algorithm switch for

OFF
LCG_CREDIT_LDR LDR

Type C: NodeB LDC algorithm switch for

OFF
NODEB_CREDIT_LDR LDR
Type B/C:
UL LDR credit SF reserved threshold SF8
UlLdrCreditSfResThd
Type B/C:
DL LDR credit SF reserved threshold SF8
DlLdrCreditSfResThd
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page157
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
If the congestion of all resources is triggered in a cell, the
congestion is relieved in order of resource priority for load
reshuffling as configured through the SET ULDCALGOPARA
command
Recommended setting is as follows:
The first priority for load reshuffling (LdrFirstPri) is set to IUBLDR
The second priority for load reshuffling (LdrSecondPri) is set to
CREDITLDR
The third priority for load reshuffling (LdrThirdPri) is set to
CODELDR
The fourth priority for load reshuffling (LdrFourthPri) is set to
UULDR

2.5.1 Basic Congestion Triggering

2.5.2 LDR Procedure

2.5.3 LDR Actions

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page159
LDR Procedure
The RNC periodically takes actions if the basic congestion
is detected:
Inter-frequency load handover
Code reshuffling
BE service rate reduction
AMR rate reduction
Inter-RAT load handover in the CS domain
Inter-RAT load handover in the PS domain
QoS Renegotiation for Uncontrollable Real-Time Services

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page161
LDR Actions Intended for Different
Resources
When the basic congestion is triggered by different
resources, the congestion can be relieved in a order set
by running the SET ULDCALGOPARA command

LDR actions intended for different resource table (See the

notes)

Recommended value: 10, namely 10s

GoldUserLoadControlSwitch
Parameter name: Gold user load control switch

Recommended value: OFF

Recommended value: CodeAdj, InterFreqLDHO, BERateRed

UlLdrFirstAction to UlLdrEighthAction
Parameter name: UL LDR first action to UL LDR eighth
action

Recommended value: InterFreqLDHO, BERateRed

2.5.1 Basic Congestion Triggering

2.5.2 LDR Procedure

2.5.3 LDR Actions

Based on Measurement

InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection
Parameter name: InterFreq Load Handover Method
Selection

Recommended value: BLINDHO

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page166
LDR Actions - Inter-Frequency Load
Handover
Inter-Frequency Load Handover Based on Blind Handover
1. Check whether cells for inter-frequency blind handover are
available. If available, go to the next step. Otherwise, the action
fails

2. The algorithm selects the target cell according to the type of

resource that causes the basic congestion:
the basic congestion is caused by power resource

the basic congestion is caused by code resource

3. The algorithm selects the UEs to be handed over according to

the setting of InterFreqLdHoForbidenTC and NbmLdcUeSelSwitch

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page167
LDR Actions - Inter-Frequency Load
Handover
Inter-Frequency Load Handover Based on Measurement: Only for
power congestion
1. The RNC selects the UE whose service types are not forbidden for LDR
handover by parameter InterFreqLdHoForbidenTC
2. The RNC selects the candidate cells
3. The RNC issues a measurement control message to the UE, requesting
the UE to measure the signal quality of all candidate cells
4. The UE measures the RSCP and Ec/No of the candidate cells and
periodically reports the measurement results to the RNC
5. Based on the received measurement results, the RNC selects the
candidate target cells
6. The RNC selects the cell with the highest priority from the candidate
target cells to perform inter-frequency hard handover

Recommended value: None

NbmLdcUeSelSwitch
Parameter name: Inter-freq Handover Select User algorithm
switch

Recommended value: NBM_LDC_MATCH_UE_ONLY

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page170
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd/DlInterFreqHoCellLoadS
paceThd
Parameter name: UL/DL HO load space threshold

Recommended value: 20%, 20%

LdrCodeUsedSpaceThd
Parameter name: InterFreq HO code used ratio space
threshold

Recommended value: 13, namely 13%

Recommended value: 200000bit/s, 200000bit/s

The current rate is higher than GBR

Number:
UlLdrBERateReductionRabNum/DlLdrBERateReductionRabNum

The RNC sends a RADIO BEARER RECONFIGURATION

message to the UE

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page173
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
UlLdrBERateReductionRabNum/DlLdrBERateReductionRa
bNum
Parameter name: UL/DL LDR-BE rate reduction RAB number

Recommended value: 1, 1

Target RAB:
The RAB with the lowest integrated priority

Number:
UlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum/DlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum

The RNC sends a RAB MODIFY REQUEST message to the

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page175
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
DraSwitch-DRA_IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH
Parameter name: Dynamic resource allocation switch for IU
QoS RENEQ

Recommended value: OFF

UlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNum/DlLdrPsRTQosRenegRabNu
m
Parameter name: UL/DL LDR un-ctrl RT Qos re-nego RAB
num

Recommended value: 1, 1

Service handover indicator:

HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM

HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM

GSM cell

WCDMA cell

Recommended
Parameter Parameter name
value
UlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum UL CS should be HO user number 3
DlCSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum DL CS should be HO user number 3
UL CS should not be HO user
UlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum 3
number
DL CS should not be HO user
DlCSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum 3
number

UlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum UL PS should be HO user number 1

DlPSInterRatShouldBeHOUeNum DL PS should be HO user number 1
UL PS should not be HO user
UlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum 1
number
DL PS should not be HO user
DlPSInterRatShouldNotHOUeNum 1
number

Number:
UlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum/DlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum

In downlink:
The RNC sends the Rate Control Request message through the Iu
interface to the CN

In uplink:
The RNC sends the TFC CONTROL command to the UE

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page179
Parameters of LDR (Cont.)
UlLdrAMRRateReductionRabNum/DlLdrAMRRateReductio
nRabNum
Parameter name: UL/DL LDR-AMR rate reduction RAB
number

Recommended value: 1, 1

MaxUserNumCodeAdj
Parameter name: Max user number of code adjust
Recommended value: 1

LdrCodePriUseInd
Parameter name: LDR code priority indicator
Recommended value: FALSE

2.2 LDB (Intra-Frequency Load Balancing)

2.3 CAC (Call Admission Control)

2.4 IAC (Intelligent Access Control)

2.5 LDR (Load Reshuffling)

2.6 OLC (Overload Control)

2.6.1 Overload Triggering

2.6.2 General OLC Procedure

2.6.3 OLC Actions

Purpose:
Ensuring the system stability and making the system back to
the normal state as soon as possible

Triggering:
Power resource and interference

Overload released
Cell in overload

OLC trigger
threshold

OLC release
threshold

time

RNC periodic check

State transition hysteresis threshold

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page186
Parameters of OLC
NBMLdcAlgoSwitch-UL_UU_OLC/DL_UU_OLC
Parameter name: Cell LDC algorithm switch for OLC
Recommended value: OFF, OFF

UlOlcTrigThd/DlOlcTrigThd
Parameter name: UL/DL OLC trigger threshold
Recommended value: 95%, 95%

UlOlcRelThd/DlOlcRelThd
Parameter name: UL/DL OLC release threshold
Recommended value: 85%, 85%

2.6.1 Overload Triggering

2.6.2 General OLC Procedure

2.6.3 OLC Actions

Recommended value: 3000, namely 3000ms

2.6.1 Overload Triggering

2.6.2 General OLC Procedure

2.6.3 OLC Actions

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page191
OLC Actions - Performing TF Control of
BE Services
OLC algorithm for TF control in the downlink:
Select RABs with the lowest integrated priority
The RNC sends the TF control indication message to the MAC
The MAC restricts the TFC selection: TFmax(N+1) = TFmax(N) x
Ratelimitcoeff
OLC algorithm for TF control in the uplink:
Select RABs with the lowest integrated priority
the RNC sends a TRANSPORT FORMAT COMBINATION CONTROL
message to the UE
The UE restricts the TFC selection

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page194
Parameters of OLC (Cont.)
DlDcccRateThd
Parameter name: Downlink Bit Rate Threshold For DCCC
Recommended value: D64, namely 64Kbit/s

DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
Parameter name: DL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number
Recommended value: 3

DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Parameter name: DL OLC fast TF restrict times
Recommended value: 3, namely 3 times

Recommended value: 3000ms, 5000ms

RateRstrctCoef/RecoverCoef
Parameter name: DL TF rate restrict/recover coefficient

Recommended value: 68%, 130%

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page196
Parameters of OLC (Cont.)
UlDcccRateThd
Parameter name: Uplink Bit Rate Threshold For DCCC
Recommended value: D64, namely 64Kbit/s

UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum
Parameter name: UL OLC fast TF restrict RAB number
Recommended value: 3

UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes
Parameter name: UL OLC fast TF restrict times
Recommended value: 3, namely 3 times

The users with the DCH or HSPA BE services in PS domain

Execution:
The RNC sends RB Reconfiguration message to UE

The UE makes a response by RB Reconfiguration Complete

Recommended value: 1

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page199
OLC Actions - Adjusting the Maximum
FACH TX Power
Target FACH channel:
During an OLC period, the OLC can adjust the power of only
one FACH. If multiple FACHs meet the conditions, the OLC
adjusts them one by one in different OLC periods

Execution:
The cell adjusts the maximum FACH TX power:

Pt arg et Pmax Delta

Recommended value: 10, namely 1dB

FACHPwrReduceValue
Parameter name: FACH power reduce value

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

Select RABs with high bit rate, when the integrated priority
of some RABs are identical

Execution:
The RNC sends IU RELEASE REQUEST or RAB RELEASE
REQUEST message to CN, and sample call drop counter

Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page202
Parameters of OLC (Cont.)
UlOlcTraffRelRabNum/DlOlcTraffRelRabNum
Parameter name: UL OLC traff release RAB number
Recommended value: 0, 0

Revision Record Dont Print This Page

Course Code Product Product Version Course Version ISSUE

WRAN RAN12 Version 1.01

Developer/Modifier Time Approver New/Update

Leong kwong Onn 2011-08 Update

76320

WCDMA Handover
Algorithm and
Parameters
www.huawei.com

Generated by Foxit PDF Creator Foxit Software
http://www.foxitsoftware.com For evaluation only.

Foreword
Why mobile system need handover?
The mobility of UE

Load Balance

Any others?

References
3GPP TS 23.122: Non Access Stratum functions related to Mobile
Station (MS) in idle mode
3GPP TS 24.008: Mobile radio interface layer 3 specification; Core
Network Protocols - Stage 3
3GPP TS 25.304: UE Procedures in Idle Mode and Procedures for Cell
Reselection in Connected Mode
3GPP TS 25.331: RRC Protocol Specification
3GPP TS 23.060: General Packet Radio Service (GPRS); Service
description
3GPP TS 25.931: UTRAN Functions, Examples on Signalling
Procedures

Objectives
Upon completion of this course, you will be able to:
Explain the features of each handover

Describe the procedures of each handover

Perform the parameters setting of each handover

The Basic Concepts of Handover

Active set Maximum ratio

Monitored set combination

Detected set Selective combination

Radio link (RL) Soft handover gain

Radio link set (RLS) PCPICH

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover

2. Inter-Frequency Handover

3. Inter-RAT Handover

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Intra-Frequency Handover Types

The carrier frequencies of the current cell and target cell are
the same:
Intra-frequency soft handover

Intra-frequency hard handover

Intra-Frequency Handover Types

(Cont.)
Comparison between soft handover and hard handover:

Item Soft Handover Hard Handover

The number of RLs in
active set during Several One
handover

Interruption during
No Yes
handover

Only happened Can be happened in Intra-

The frequencies of cells between Intra- frequency cells or Inter-
frequency cells frequency cells

Intra-Frequency Soft Handover

The types of intra-frequency soft handover are as follows:
Intra-NodeB soft handover (also known as softer handover)

Intra-RNC inter-NodeB soft handover

Inter-RNC soft handover

Intra-Frequency Soft Handover (cont.)

Comparison between soft handover and softer handover:

Item Softer Handover Soft Handover

When the UE is in the overlapped When the UE is in the
coverage area of two overlapped coverage area of
Scenario
neighboring cells of a NodeB two neighboring cells of
with combined RLs different NodeBs

Using maximum-ratio
Uplink signal Using selection combination
combination

Downlink Using maximum-ratio Using maximum-ratio

signal combination combination

Resource use Occupying less Iub bandwidth Occupying more Iub bandwidth

Intra-Frequency Hard Handover

Intra-frequency hard handover:
No Iur interface

Iur interface is congested

Soft handover fails

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Intra-Frequency Handover Procedure

Measurement Decision

Execution

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

1. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Quantities

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Events

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Neighboring Cell Combination

Algorithm

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement
Measurement control:

UE UTRAN

MEASUREMENT CONTROL

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement (Cont.)
Measurement report:

UE UTRAN

MEASUREMENT REPORT

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Quantities
Measurement model in the WCDMA system:

L3 filtering formula:

Fn (1 ) Fn 1 M n

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Measurement
IntraFreqMeasQuantity
Parameter name: Intra-freq Measure Quantity

Recommended value: CPICH_EC/NO

FilterCoef
Parameter name: Intra-freq meas L3 filter coeff

Recommended value: D3, namely K=3

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

1. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Quantities

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Events

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Neighboring Cell Combination

Algorithm

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events
Event Description

A primary CPICH enters the reporting range. This indicates that the quality
1A of a cell is close to the quality of the best cell in the active set. A relatively
high combined gain can be achieved when the cell is added to the active set.

A primary CPICH leaves the reporting range. This indicates that a cell has a
1B lower quality than the best cell in the active set. The cell has to be deleted
from the active set.

A non-active primary CPICH becomes better than an active primary CPICH.

This indicates that the quality of a cell is better than the quality of the
1C
worst cell in the active set. The RNC replaces a cell in the active set with a
cell in the monitored set.

1D The best cell changes.

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1A event
Event 1A is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

NA
M New CIONew W ( M i ) (1 W ) M Best ( R1a H1a / 2)
i 1

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)

A: signal quality curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal quality curve of a cell in the monitored set

C: curve of Th1A

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
CIO
Parameter name: Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

CIOOffset
Parameter name: Neighboring cell oriented CIO

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
IntraRelThdFor1ACSNVP
Parameter name: CS non VP service 1A event relative THD
Recommended value: 6, namely 3dB

IntraRelThdFor1ACSVP
Parameter name: VP service 1A event relative THD
Recommended value: 6, namely 3dB

IntraRelThdFor1APS
Parameter name: PS service 1A event relative threshold
Recommended value: 6, namely 3dB

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
Hystfor1A
Parameter name: 1A hysteresis
Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

TrigTime1A
Parameter name: 1A event trigger delay time
Recommended value: D320, namely 320ms

Weight
Parameter name: Weighted factor
Recommended value: 0

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1A event report mode:
Event trigger report
Event to periodical report

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
ReportIntervalfor1A
Parameter name: 1A event to periodical rpt period

Recommended value: D4000, namely 4000ms

PeriodMRReportNumfor1A
Parameter name: 1A event to periodical rpt number

Recommended value: D16

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1B event
Event 1B is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

NA
M Old CIOOld W ( M i ) (1 W ) M Best ( R1b H1b / 2)
i 1

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)

A: signal quality curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal quality curve of the worst cell in the active set

C: curve of Th1B

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
IntraRelThdFor1BCSNVP
Parameter name: CS non VP service 1B event relative THD
Recommended value: 12, namely 6dB

IntraRelThdFor1BCSVP
Parameter name: VP service 1B event relative THD
Recommended value: 12, namely 6dB

IntraRelThdFor1BPS
Parameter name: PS service 1B event relative threshold
Recommended value: 12, namely 6dB

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
Hystfor1B
Parameter name: 1B hysteresis

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

TrigTime1B
Parameter name: 1B event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D640, namely 640ms

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1C event
Event 1C is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

M New CIONew M InAS CIOInAS H1c / 2

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)

A: signal quality curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal quality curve of a cell in the active set
C: signal quality curve of the worst cell in the active set
D: signal quality curve of a cell in the monitored set
E: curve of Th1C

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
Hystfor1C
Parameter name: 1C hysteresis

Recommended value: 8, namely 4dB

TrigTime1C
Parameter name: 1C event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D640, namely 640ms

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1C event report mode:
Event trigger report
Event to periodical report

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
ReportIntervalfor1C
Parameter name: 1C event to periodical rpt period

Recommended value: D4000, namely 4000ms

PeriodMRReportNumfor1C
Parameter name: 1C event to periodical rpt number

Recommended value: D16

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)
1D event
Event 1D is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

M NotBest CIONotBest M Best CIOBest H1d / 2

Intra-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events (Cont.)

A: signal quality curve of the best cell in the active set

B: signal quality curve of a cell in the active set or the monitored set

C: curve of Th1D

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
Hystfor1D
Parameter name: 1D hysteresis

Recommended value: 8, namely 4dB

TrigTime1D
Parameter name: 1D event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D640, namely 640ms

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

1. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Quantities

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement Events

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Neighboring Cell Combination

Algorithm

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Neighboring Cell Combination

Algorithm
Cell A Cell B Cell C

Cell A, Cell B and Cell C

are in active set. Cell A is
the best cell. Cell B
Ec/No is greater than
Cell C.

Cell A Cell B Cell C A B C

Secondly, the After that, the Finally, the

Firstly, the cells in
neighboring cells neighboring cells neighboring cells
the active set are
of cell A are of cell B are of cell C are
added.
added. added. added.

Parameters of Neighboring Cell

Combination Algorithm
HO_MC_NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH
Parameter name: Neighboring Cell Combination Switch
Recommended value: ON

NprioFlag
Parameter name: The flag of the priority
Recommended value: FALSE

Nprio
Parameter name: the priority of the neighboring cell
Recommended value: None

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Intra-Frequency Handover Decision

and Execution
The intra-frequency handover decision and execution
procedure depends on the different measurement events
that the RNC receives:
1A Event
1B Event
1C Event
1D Event

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
MaxCellInActiveSet
Parameter name: Max number of cell in active set

Recommended value: 3

SHOQualmin
Parameter name: Min quality THD for SHO

Recommended value: -24, namely -24dB

Rate Reduction After an SHO Failure

If the radio link addition for a soft handover fails, the rate
reduction is triggered for R99 NRT (Non Real Time) services to
increase the probability of a successful soft handover

1A,1C,1D is received by RNC

Execute admission control in target cell

No
Admission succeed? Estimation

Yes Rate Reduction

Execution
Execute Handover

Estimation Procedure for Rate

Reduction

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
RelThdForDwnGrd
Parameter name: Relative threshold of SHO failure
Recommended value: 2, namely 1dB

ShoFailPeriod
Parameter name: Max evaluation period of SHO failure
Recommended value: 60, namely 60s

ShoFailNumForDwnGrd
Parameter name: Threshold number of SHO failure
Recommended value: 3

Procedure of Rate Reduction Execution

Parameters of Intra-Frequency
Handover (Cont.)
DcccShoPenaltyTime
Parameter name: Period of penalty timer for SHO failure
after down rate

Recommended value: 30, namely 30s

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover
1. Intra-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Intra-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Intra-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Intra-Frequency Handover

Typical Soft Handover Flow (L3 Signaling)

Soft handover is triggered by 1A/1B/1C or 1D event

Intra-Frequency Hard Handover

Intra-Frequency hard handover is triggered by 1D event

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover

2. Inter-Frequency Handover

3. Inter-RAT Handover

Contents
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover Types

The carrier frequency of the current cell and target cell
are different

Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-

frequency handover can be categorized into four types:
Coverage-based inter-frequency handover

QoS-based inter-frequency handover

Load-based inter-frequency handover

Contents
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement Switches
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement Report Modes
3. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement Events
4. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement Quantity
5. Inter-Frequency Handover Compressed Mode

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement
In the measurement phase of inter-frequency handover,
the UE takes measurement according to the
MEASUREMENT CONTROL message received from the
RNC. When the measurement report conditions are met,
the UE sends measurement reports to the RNC according
to the rules defined in the MEASUREMENT CONTROL
message.

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Switches
Switches related to inter-frequency handover:
HO_MC_SIGNAL_SWITCH: The switch decides when the RNC
performs the active set signal quality measurement.

HO_INTER_FREQ_HARD_HO_SWITCH: The switch decides

whether to enable the inter-frequency handover
measurement

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Report Modes
Event-triggered measurement report mode
UE test the Inter-frequency neighbor RSCP and Ec/No

Periodical measurement report mode

UE test the Inter-frequency neighbor RSCP and Ec/No, and
current cell Ec/No or RSCP

InterFreqReportMode
Parameter name: Inter-frequency measure report mode

Recommended value: Periodical reporting

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Report Modes
PrdReportInterval
Parameter name: Inter-frequency measure periodical rpt
period

Recommended value: D500, namely 500ms

InterFreqMeasTime
Parameter name: Inter-freq measure timer length

Recommended value: 60, namely 60s

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events
Measurement events involved in inter-frequency
handover
Event Description

2D The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is

below a certain threshold.
2F The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
above a certain threshold.
2B The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of a
non-used frequency is above a certain threshold.

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events - 2D
2D event:
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
below a certain threshold.

Event 2D is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QUsed TUsed2d - H2d/2

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -2D
Recommended values of TUsed2d :

Parameter Recommended Value

InterFreqCSThd2DEcN0 -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqR99PsThd2DEc -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqHThd2DEcN0 -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP -95, namely -95dBm

InterFreqR99PsThd2DRS -95, namely -95dBm

InterFreqHThd2DRSCP -95, namely -95dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -2D
Recommended values of TUsed2d :

Parameter Recommended Value

InterFreqCSThd2DEcN0 -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqR99PsThd2DEc -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqHThd2DEcN0 -14, namely -14dB

InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP -95, namely -95dBm

InterFreqR99PsThd2DRS -95, namely -95dBm

InterFreqHThd2DRSCP -95, namely -95dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2D (Cont.)
HystFor2D
Parameter name: 2D hysteresis

Recommended value: 4, namely 2dB

TimeToTrig2D
Parameter name: 2D event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D320, namely 320ms

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events - 2F
2F event
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
above a certain threshold.

Event 2F is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QUsed TUsed2f + H2f/2

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -2F
Recommended values of TUsed2f :

Parameter Recommended Value

InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcN -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqHThd2FEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSC -92, namely -92dBm

InterFreqHThd2FRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -2F
Recommended values of TUsed2f :

Parameter Recommended Value

InterFreqCSThd2FEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqR99PsThd2FEcN -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqHThd2FEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

InterFreqR99PsThd2FRSC -92, namely -92dBm

InterFreqHThd2FRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2F (Cont.)
HystFor2F
Parameter name: 2F hysteresis

Recommended value: 4, namely 2dB

TimeToTrig2F
Parameter name: 2F event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D1280, namely 1280ms

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Events - 2B
2B event:
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
below a certain threshold and the estimated quality of a
non-used frequency is above a certain threshold

Event 2B is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QNoused TNoused2b + H2b/2

QUsed TUsed2b - H2b/2

Event 2B is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QNoused TNoused2b + H2b/2

QUsed TUsed2b - H2b/2

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2B
Recommended values of TNoused2b :

Parameter Recommended Value

TargetFreqCsThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqR99PsThdEcN -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqHThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqCsThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

TargetFreqR99PsThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

TargetFreqHThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2B
Recommended values of TNoused2b :

Parameter Recommended Value

TargetFreqCsThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqR99PsThdEcN -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqHThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

TargetFreqCsThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

TargetFreqR99PsThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

TargetFreqHThdRscp -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2B (conj.)
Recommended values of TUsed2b :

Parameter Recommended Value

UsedFreqCSThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqHThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqCSThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

UsedFreqHThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - 2B (conj.)
Recommended values of TUsed2b :

Parameter Recommended Value

UsedFreqCSThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqHThdEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

UsedFreqCSThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

UsedFreqHThdRSCP -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -2B (Cont.)
HystFor2B
Parameter name: 2B hysteresis

Recommended value: 4, namely 2dB

TimeToTrig2B
Parameter name: 2B event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D0, namely 0ms

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - Common
CIO
Parameter name: Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

CIOOffset
Parameter name: Neighboring cell oriented CIO

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - Common (Cont.)
HystForPrdInterFreq
Parameter name: HHO hysteresis

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

TimeToTrigForPrdInterFreq
Parameter name: HHO period trigger delay time

Recommended value: 0, namely 0ms

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover
Measurement Quantity
Measurement quantities vary according to the types of inter-frequency
handover
In inter-frequency handover based on coverage, event (2B/2D/2F) or
periodical measurement takes both CPICH Ec/No and RSCP as measurement
quantities
In inter-frequency handover based on QoS, event (2B) or periodical
measurement takes both CPICH Ec/No and RSCP as measurement quantities.
In load-based inter-frequency blind handover, CPICH RSCP of the used
frequency is measured.
In load- and measure-based inter-frequency handover, both CPICH_RSCP and
CPICH_Ec/No of the target frequency are measured

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-Frequency Handover
Compressed Mode
Compressed Mode control is a mechanism whereby
certain idle periods are created in radio frames during
which the UE can perform measurements on other
frequencies.

If the UE needs to measure the pilot signal strength of an

inter-frequency 3G or 2G cell and has a single-frequency
receiver only, the UE must use the compressed mode.

Inter-Frequency Handover
Compressed Mode
The parameter DlSFLimitCMInd decides whether to start the DL
compressed mode according to the parameter LimitCMDlSFThd
If DlSFLimitCMInd = True
When the downlink spreading factor is smaller than or equal to the
parameter LimitCMDlSFThd, the compressed mode is disabled

When the downlink spreading factor is greater than the parameter

LimitCMDlSFThd, the compressed mode is enabled

If DlSFLimitCMInd = False and the compressed mode is not limited

Inter-Frequency Handover
Compressed Mode
DlSFLimitCMInd
Parameter name: Dl SF limit CM ind

Recommended value: FALSE

LimitCMDlSFThd
Parameter name: Dl SF threshold to limit CM

Recommended value: D8 , namely SF8

Inter-Frequency Handover
Compressed Mode
Categories
Downlink compressed mode
Uplink compressed mode
Realization Methods
Spreading factor reduction (SF/2)
Higher layer scheduling

Inter-Frequency Handover
Compressed Mode
DlSFTurnPoint
Parameter name: Dl SF threshold

Recommended value: D64

UlSFTurnPoint
Parameter name: Ul SF threshold

Recommended value: D64

Contents

2. Inter-Frequency Handover
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement
3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution
1. Coverage- and QoS-based Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and
Execution
2. Load-based Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Coverage- and QoS-based Inter-

Frequency Handover Procedure

Reporting Mode
The coverage- and QoS-based inter-frequency handovers
are categorized into two types according to the following
two measurement report modes:
Periodical measurement report mode

Event-triggered measurement report mode.

Each mode corresponds to a different decision and

execution procedure.

Periodical Measurement Report Mode

After receiving the periodical measurement report of the
inter-frequency cell, the RNC starts the following
decision procedures:
Decide whether both the CPICH Ec/No value and CPICH RSCP
value of the pilot signal of the target cell meet the requirement of
inter-frequency handover. The evaluation formula is : Mother_Freq +
CIOother_Freq Tother_Freq + H/2
Start the hard handover time-to-trigger timer, which is configured
through the parameter TimeToTrigForPrdInterFreq
If Mother_Freq + CIOother_Freq < Tother_Freq - H/2, stop the
timer
Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low
quality ones, to initiate inter-frequency handover

Periodical Measurement Report Mode

Periodical measurement report mode:

Event-Triggered Measurement Report

Mode
After receiving the event 2B measurement reports of
CPICH RSCP and CPICH Ec/No of the inter-frequency cell,
the RNC starts the following procedure:
Add all the pilot cells that trigger event 2B to a cell set and
arrange the cells according to the measurement quality of
CPICH_Ec/No in descending order

Select the cells in turn from the cell set to perform inter-
frequency handover

Contents
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview
2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement
3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution
1. Coverage- and QoS-based Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and
Execution
2. Load-based Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Load-based Inter-Frequency Handover

The LDR algorithm may trigger an inter-frequency
handover.

The inter-frequency LDR handover can be performed

based on blind handover or measurement that can be
decided by the parameter
InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection

InterFreqLDHOMethodSelection
Parameter name: InterFreq Load Handover Method
Selection
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page102
Recommended value: BLINDHO
Generated by Foxit PDF Creator Foxit Software
http://www.foxitsoftware.com For evaluation only.

Load-based Inter-Frequency Blind

Handover

Load-based Inter-Frequency Blind

Handover Decision
The LDR algorithm learns that a cell is in basic congestion
and provides target cells and the UE with low priority for
handover.

The RNC determines to trigger an inter-frequency blind

handover.

Load-based Inter-Frequency Blind

Handover Decision
If the UE is not in soft handover state, the RNC directly
performs load-based inter-frequency blind handover.
If the UE is in soft handover state, the RNC operates based on
the following conditions:
If the HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH is set to ON, the RNC
determines whether the cell that triggers LDR is the best cell:
If this cell is the best cell, the RNC initiates an intra-frequency
measurement for load-based inter-frequency blind handover. If this cell is
not the best cell, the RNC does not initiate a load-based inter-frequency
blind handover.

If the HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH is set to OFF, the RNC

does not initiate a load-based inter-frequency blind handover.

Load-based Inter-Frequency Blind

Handover Execution
1. The RNC initializes the timer of intra-frequency measurement for
blind handover.
2. The RNC initiates a periodical intra-frequency measurement.
3. After receiving from the UE the intra-frequency measurement
reports for conditional blind handover, the RNC checks whether the
following condition is met:
CPICH RSCP of the cell in the measurement report >=
BlindHOQualityCondition
If the condition is met, the RNC increments the counter of the number of
intra-frequency measurement reports for blind handover by 1.
If the condition is not met, the RNC does not perform a blind handover to
the cell that triggers LDR and stops intra-frequency measurement for blind
handover.

Load-based Inter-Frequency Blind

Handover Execution
4. When the counter reaches the value of
BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount, the RNC initiates a blind
handover to the target cell.

5. If the timer of intra-frequency measurement for blind

handover expires, the RNC does not perform a blind
handover to the target cell and stops intra-frequency
handover measurement for blind handover.

Parameters of Load-based Inter-

Frequency Blind Handover
BlindHOFlag
Parameter name: Blind handover flag

Recommended value: False

HO_ALGO_LDR_ALLOW_SHO_SWITCH
Parameter name: HandOver switch

Recommended value: ON

Parameters of Load-based Inter-

Frequency Blind Handover (Cont.)
BlindHOIntrafreqMRInterval
Parameter name: Intrafrequency measurement report
interval of blind HO

Recommended value: D250, namely 250ms

BlindHOQualityCondition
Parameter name: Blind handover condition

Recommended value: -92, namely -92dBm

Parameters of Load-based Inter-

Frequency Blind Handover (Cont.)
BlindHOIntrafreqMRAmount
Parameter name: Intrafrequency measurement report
amount of blind handover

Recommended value: D2, namely 2 times

Load-based Inter-Frequency Measure-

based Handover

Load-based Inter-Frequency Measure-

based Handover Decision and
Execution
The LDR algorithm learns that a cell is in basic congestion
and provides target cells and the UE with low priority for
handover.

The RNC selects the target cell based on the

measurement results. The report period is specified by
the parameter PrdReportInterval.

Load-based Inter-Frequency Measure-

based Handover Decision and
Execution
The target cell must meet the following conditions:
The CPICH RSCP value of the target cell is larger than
TargetFreqThdRscp.

The CPICH Ec/No value of the target cell is larger than

TargetFreqThdEcN0

The target cell is not in the basic congestion state.

The RNC performs an inter-frequency hard handover to

the target cell directly.

Parameters of Load-based Inter-

Frequency Measure-based Handover
DrdOrLdrFlag
Parameter name: DrdOrLdrFlag

Recommended value: FALSE(Do not send)

PRDREPORTINTERVAL
Parameter name: Inter-freq Measure Periodical Report Period

Recommended value: D3000, namely 3000ms

TARGETFREQTHDRSCP
Parameter name: Inter-freq Target Frequency Trigger RSCP THD

Recommended value: -92, namely -92dBm

TARGETFREQTHDECN0
Parameter name: Inter-freq Target Frequency Trigger Ec/No THD

Recommended value: -12, namely -12dB

Contents
2. Inter-Frequency Handover
1. Inter-Frequency Handover Overview

2. Inter-Frequency Handover Measurement

3. Inter-Frequency Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-Frequency Handover

Inter-frequency Handover

Contents
1. Intra-Frequency Handover

2. Inter-Frequency Handover

3. Inter-RAT Handover

Contents
3. Inter-RAT Handover
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview

2. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

Inter-RAT Handover Scenarios

Inter-RAT Handover Types

Based on the triggering causes of handover, inter-
frequency handover can be categorized into five types:
Coverage-based 3G to 2G handover

QoS-based 3G to 2G handover

Load-based 3G to 2G handover

Service-based 3G to 2G handover

3G-to-2G Handover Preconditions

Before handover, the RNC checks whether all the preconditions
for the 3G-to-2G handover are met:
Service handover indicators
Service requirements
Handover rules
Before deciding the 3G-to-2G handover, the RNC checks
whether all the preconditions are met :
2G cell capability
Service capability
UE capability

Service Handover Indicator

The IE Service Handover Indicator indicates the CN policy
for the service handover to the 2G network. It is
indicated in the RAB assignment signaling assigned by
the CN, or provided by the RNC

The algorithm switch HoSwitch:

HO_INTER_RAT_RNC_SERVICE_HO_SWITCH decides
whether the service attribute of inter-RAT handover is
based on the RNC or the CN

Service Handover Indicator

Through the SHIND parameter, the service handover indicators
are set in RNC as follows:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover to
the 2G network is performed when 2G signals are available.
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the
handover to the 2G network is performed when 3G signals are
weak but 2G signals are strong.
HO_TO_GSM_SHALL_NOT_BE_PERFORM: means that the handover
to the 2G network is not performed even when 3G signals are
weak but 2G signals are strong.

Rules for Enabling 3G-to-2G Handover

Rules for enabling Coverage- and QoS-based 3G-to-2G
handover:
Service Handover Indicator:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM

HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM

Impacts of different types of capability on handover

decision:
Refer to the following table

Rules for Enabling 3G-to-2G Handover

Rules for enabling Load-based 3G-to-2G handover: :
Service Handover Indicator:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM

HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_NOT_BE_PERFORM

Impacts of different types of capability on handover

decision:
Refer to the following table

Rules for Enabling 3G-to-2G Handover

Rules for enabling Service-based 3G-to-2G handover: :
Service Handover Indicator:
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM

Impacts of different types of capability on handover

decision:
Refer to the following table

Switches for Service-based 3G-to-2G Handover

2G Cell Capability
2G cell capability is configured through the parameter
RATCELLTYPE. This parameter indicates whether the cell
supports the GSM, GPRS, or EDGE.

RATCELLTYPE
Parameter name: Inter-RAT cell type

Recommended value: None

Service Capability
The Required 2G Capability (Req2GCap) specifies the
capability of 2G cells required by inter-RAT handover.
This indicates whether the service is supported by the
GSM, GPRS, or EDGE

Req2GCap
Parameter name: Required 2G Capability

Recommended value: None

UE Capability
Upon the reception of the UE capability information
message, the RNC decides whether to start the inter-RAT
measurement. The information indicates whether the UE
supports the GSM, GPRS, or EDGE.

Inter-RAT Handover Rules (Cont.)

Rules for service-based 3G to 2G Handover
Service Handover Indicator
HO_TO_GSM_SHOULD_BE_PERFORM

Three types of capability:

Refer to the table of load-based handover

Service switch

Contents
3. Inter-RAT Handover
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview
2. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement
1. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement Switches
2. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement Report Modes
3. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement Events
4. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement Quantity
5. 3G-to-2G Handover Compressed Mode

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Switches
The 3G-to-2G handover measurement switches are specified by
the sub-parameters of HoSwitch:
HO_MC_SIGNAL_SWITCH: The switch decides whether the quality
measurement on the active set is delivered after signaling setup
but before service setup.
HO_INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH: The switch decides whether the
RNC will initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger inter-RAT
handover of the PS domain from the UTRAN.
HO_INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH: The switch decides whether the
RNC will initiate inter-RAT measurement to trigger inter-RAT
handover of the CS domain from the UTRAN.

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Report Modes
Event-triggered measurement report mode
UE test the 2G neighbor RSSI

Periodical measurement report mode

UE test the 2G neighbor RSSI, and current cell Ec/No or
RSCP

InterRatReportMode
Parameter name: Inter-RAT report mode

Recommended value: PERIODICAL_REPORTING

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Report Modes
InterRATPeriodReportInterval
Parameter name: Inter-RAT period report interval [ms]

Recommended value: D1000 , namely 1000ms

InterRATMeasTime
Parameter name: Inter-RAT measure timer length [s]

Recommended value: 60, namely 60s

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Events
Measurement events involved in 3G-to-2G Handover

Event Description

Event 2D The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is

below a certain threshold.

Event 2F The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is

above a certain threshold.
Event 3A The estimated quality of the currently used UTRAN
frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated
quality of the other system is above a certain threshold.
Event 3C The estimated quality of other system is above a certain
threshold.

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Events - 2D
2D event:
The estimated quality of the currently used frequency is
below a certain threshold.

Event 2D is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QUsed TUsed2d - H2d/2

Parameters of 3G-to-2G Handover - 2D

Recommended values of TUsed2d :
Parameter Recommended Value

InterRATCSThd2DEcN0 -14, namely -14dB

InterRATR99PsThd2DEcN0 -15, namely -15dB

InterRATHThd2DEcN0 -15, namely-15dB

InterRATCSThd2DRSCP -100, namely -100dBm

InterRATR99PsThd2DRSCP -110, namely -110dBm

InterRATHThd2DRSCP -110, namely -110dBm

HystFor2D 4, namely 2dB

TimeToTrig2D D320, namely 320ms

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Events 2F
2F event:
Event 2F is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QUsed TUsed2f + H2f/2

Parameters of 3G-to-2G Handover - 2F

Recommended values of 2F event:
Parameter Recommended Value

InterRATCSThd2FEcN0 -12, namely -12dB

InterRATR99PsThd2FEcN0 -13, namely -13dB

InterRATHThd2FEcN0 -13, namely-13dB

InterRATCSThd2FRSCP -97, namely -97dBm

InterRATR99PsThd2FRSCP -107, namely -107dBm

InterRATHThd2FRSCP -107, namely -107dBm

HystFor2F 4, namely 2dB

TimeToTrig2F D1280, namely 1280ms

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Events - 3A
3A event:
The estimated quality of the currently used UTRAN
frequency is below a certain threshold and the estimated
quality of the other system is above a certain threshold

Event 3A is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

QOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT TOtherRAT + H3a/2

QUsed TUsed - H3a/2

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -3A
Recommended values of TUsed :
Parameter Recommended Value

UsedFreqCSThdEcN0 -12, namely -13dB

UsedFreqR99PsThdEcN0 -13, namely -13dB

UsedFreqHThdEcN0 -13, namely -13dB

UsedFreqCSThdRSCP -97, namely -97dBm

UsedFreqR99PsThdRSCP -107, namely -107dBm

UsedFreqHThdRSCP -107, namely -107dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -3A (Cont.)
Recommended values of TOtherRAT:

Parameter Recommended Value

TargetRatCsThd 16, namely -95dBm

TargetRatR99PsThd 16, namely -95dBm

TargetRatHThd 16, namely -95dBm

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -3A (Cont.)
Hystfor3A
Parameter name: 3A hysteresis

Recommended value: 4, namely 2dB

TrigTime3A
Parameter name: 3A event trigger delay time

Recommended value: D0, namely 0ms

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Events 3C
3C event:
The estimated quality of other system is above a certain
threshold

Event 3C is triggered on the basis of the following formula:

MOtherRAT + CIOOtherRAT TOtherRAT + H3c/2

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover -3C
Recommended values of 3C :
Parameter Recommended Value

InterRATNCovHOCSThd 21, namely -90dBm

InterRATNCovHOPSThd 21, namely -90dBm

Hystfor3C 0, namely 0dB

TrigTime3C D640, namely 640ms

Parameters of Inter-Frequency
Handover - Common
CIO
Parameter name: Cell oriented Cell Individual Offset

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

CIOOffset
Parameter name: Neighboring cell oriented CIO

Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Quantity
In coverage-based UMTS-to-GSM handover,
Event 2D/2F or periodical measurement takes both CPICH Ec/No and
RSCP as measurement quantities

In coverage-based inter-RAT handover, the system delivers both

CPICH Ec/N0 and CPICH RSCP for 2D/2F measurement

The event 3A measurement quantity is set through the parameter

MeasQuantityOf3A

In QoS-based 3G-to-2G handover, the event 3A measurement

quantity is set through the parameter
UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A

3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

Quantity
MeasQuantityOf3A
Parameter name: 3A Measure Quantity

Recommended value: Auto, namely based on the 2D

UsedFreqMeasQuantityForQos3A
Parameter name: 3A Used-Freq Measure Quantity for Qos

Recommended value: CPICH_RSCP

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

3G-to-2G Handover Compressed Mode

The 3G-to-2G handover compressed mode is the same
with inter-frequency handover compressed mode.

Interoperability between Inter-RAT and

Inter-Frequency Handover
Inter-frequency measurement:
2D, 2F event

Inter-frequency neighboring cell Measure

inter-frequency
neighbor?
Inter-RAT measurement:
2D, 2F event

Inter-RAT neighboring cell

Measure inter-
RAT neighbor?

Parameters of Inter-RAT Handover

InterFreqRATSwitch
Parameter name: Inter-freq and Inter-RAT coexist switch

Recommended value: SIMINTERFREQRAT

CoexistMeasThdChoice
Parameter name: InterFreq and InterRat coexist measure
threshold choice

Recommended value:
COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ

Contents
3. Inter-RAT Handover
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview
2. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement
3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution
1. Coverage and QoS-based UMTS-to-GSM Handover Decision and
Execution
2. Load- and Service-based 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

Coverage and QoS-based UMTS-to-

GSM Handover Procedure

Reporting Mode
The coverage-based and QoS-based 3G-to-2G handover is
categorized into two types according to the following
two measurement report modes:
Periodical measurement report mode

Event-triggered measurement report mode

Each mode corresponds to a different decision and

execution procedure.

Periodical Measurement Report Mode

After receiving the periodical measurement report of GSM
cells, the RNC performs the following decision and execution
procedures:
Decide whether the quality of 2G cells meets the conditions of
inter-RAT handover. The evaluation formula is:
Mother_RAT + CIOother_RAT Tother_RAT + H/2

Start the evaluation of the cells that meet the quality requirement
and start the time-to-trigger timer. If the measurement report
meet the following formula and time-to-trigger timer does not
expire, stop the time-to-trigger timer
Mother_RAT + CIOother_RAT < Tother_RAT - H/2

Select the cells in sequence, that is, from high quality cells to low
quality ones, to initiate 3G-to-2G handover
Copyright 2009 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Page159
Generated by Foxit PDF Creator Foxit Software
http://www.foxitsoftware.com For evaluation only.

Parameters of Inter-RAT Handover

(Cont.)
HystforInterRAT
Parameter name: Inter-RAT hysteresis
Recommended value: 0, namely 0dB

TimeToTrigForVerify
Parameter name: Time to trigger for verified GSM cell
Recommended value: 0, namely 0ms

TimeToTrigForNonVerify
Parameter name: Time to trigger for non-verified GSM cell
Recommended value: 0, namely 0ms

Event-Triggered Measurement Report

Mode
After receiving the event 3A measurement report of 2G
cells, the RNC performs the following decision and
execution procedures:
Put all the 2G cells that trigger event 3A into a cell set and
arrange the cells according to the measurement quality in
descending order

Select the cells in sequence from the cell set to perform

inter-RAT handover

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

Load-based Inter-RAT Handover

Service-based Inter-RAT Handover

Load- and Service-based 3G-to-2G

Handover
The load status between the source cell and the target
cell can be acquired by interchanging load information
between a 3G cell and a 2G cell during the load-based
and service-based 3G-to-2G handover.

Thus, whether to further conduct the handover can be

determined to avoid the 2G cell overload and possible
handover to the congested cell.

Decision and Execution Procedure

After receiving the event 3C measurement report of 2G
cells, the RNC performs the following handover decision
and execution procedure:
Put all the 2G cells that trigger event 3C into a cell set and
arrange the cells according to the measurement quality in
descending order
Select the cells in sequence from the cell set

InterRATHOAttempts
Parameter name: Inter-RAT handover max attempt times
Recommended value: 16

Interchanging Load Information

Procedure
1. When the RNC sends a RELOCATION REQUIRED
message to the 3G CN,
If the switch SndLdInfo2GsmInd is set to ON, the
RELOCATION REQUIRED message includes the Old BSS To
New BSS Information IE that includes the load information
of the 3G source cell.

If the switch SndLdInfo2GsmInd is set to OFF, then the

RELOCATION REQUIRED message does not include the Old
BSS To New BSS Information IE.

Interchanging Load Information

Procedure
2. When the RNC receives the RELOCATION COMMAND message from
the 2G CN:
If the switch NcovHoOn2GldInd is set to ON, the RNC obtains the load
information of the 2G target cell:
If the 2G load is lower than CSHOOut2GloadThd or PSHOOut2GloadThd, the RNC
continues the inter-RAT handover procedure; otherwise, the RNC returns the
Relocation Cancel message to the CN to cancel this inter-RAT handover and makes
another handover attempt to the next candidate cell generated in the cell list based on
inter-RAT measurement.
If the Inter-System Information Transparent Container IE, is not included in the
RELOCATION COMMAND message, the load information of the 2G target cell is not
considered and this inter-RAT handover is continued

If the switch NcovHoOn2GldInd is set to OFF, the RNC continues the inter-
RAT handover procedure without considering the thresholds

Parameters of Interchanging Load

Information
SndLdInfo2GsmInd
Parameter name: Send Load Info to GSM Ind

Recommended value: ON

NcovHoOn2GldInd
Parameter name: NCOV Reloc Ind based on GSM cell load

Recommended value: ON

Parameters of Interchanging Load

Information
CSHOOut2GloadThd
Parameter name: CS domain Reloc GSM load THD

Recommended value: 80, namely 80%

PSHOOut2GloadThd
Parameter name: PS domain Reloc GSM load THD

Recommended value: 60, namely 60%

Parameters of Service-based Inter-RAT

Handover
CSServiceHOSwitch
Parameter name: Inter-RAT CS handover switch

Recommended value: OFF

PSServiceHOSwitch
Parameter name: Inter-RAT PS handover switch

Recommended value: OFF

Contents
3. Inter-RAT Handover
1. Inter-RAT Handover Overview

2. 3G-to-2G Handover Measurement

3. 3G-to-2G Handover Decision and Execution

4. Signaling Procedures for Inter-RAT Handover

CS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow

(UMTS->GSM)

CS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow

(UMTS->GSM)

PS Domain Inter-RAT Handover Flow

(UMTS->GSM & UE in CELL_DCH)

Thank you
www.huawei.com

SR@N12.0 GUL - Interoperability - Guide
No ratings yet
SR@N12.0 GUL - Interoperability - Guide
598 pages
The Reactive Extrusion of Thermoplastic Polyurethane
No ratings yet
The Reactive Extrusion of Thermoplastic Polyurethane
158 pages
Hgmaker 1911 PDF
50% (4)
Hgmaker 1911 PDF
5 pages
Thyssenkrupp Elevator (India) : Schematics - 1 Electrical Details
No ratings yet
Thyssenkrupp Elevator (India) : Schematics - 1 Electrical Details
6 pages
3G Tutorial
100% (1)
3G Tutorial
126 pages
Soft Handover For 3G WCMDA Networks
100% (2)
Soft Handover For 3G WCMDA Networks
53 pages
5G NR Frequency Bands
No ratings yet
5G NR Frequency Bands
5 pages
Drive Test Methodology: Voice Testing Scenario
No ratings yet
Drive Test Methodology: Voice Testing Scenario
3 pages
Rab Parking Feature
No ratings yet
Rab Parking Feature
37 pages
Handover Algorithm and Parameters
No ratings yet
Handover Algorithm and Parameters
59 pages
2.0MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTS Mode
No ratings yet
2.0MHz Central Frequency Point Separation Between GSM and UMTS Mode
14 pages
LTE Basics
100% (1)
LTE Basics
70 pages
MU-MIMO in LTE
No ratings yet
MU-MIMO in LTE
13 pages
Hand Over-Parameter-Optimize
No ratings yet
Hand Over-Parameter-Optimize
39 pages
Interoperability Between UMTS and LTE (RAN15.0 - 11) PDF
No ratings yet
Interoperability Between UMTS and LTE (RAN15.0 - 11) PDF
735 pages
MO Parameter ID Parameter Name NE MML Command
No ratings yet
MO Parameter ID Parameter Name NE MML Command
24 pages
How To Analyze Crossed Feeder Issue by DT: Security Level
No ratings yet
How To Analyze Crossed Feeder Issue by DT: Security Level
13 pages
Interference Based Channel Allocation: Security Level
No ratings yet
Interference Based Channel Allocation: Security Level
23 pages
TEMS Discovery 21.2.0 Release Note
No ratings yet
TEMS Discovery 21.2.0 Release Note
33 pages
MagicRadio - NEDMM v1 1
No ratings yet
MagicRadio - NEDMM v1 1
14 pages
GUL_Interoperability_Strategy_V1.3_20211213-
No ratings yet
GUL_Interoperability_Strategy_V1.3_20211213-
21 pages
GBSS Feature Documentation GBSS22.1 - 03 20201020143553
No ratings yet
GBSS Feature Documentation GBSS22.1 - 03 20201020143553
94 pages
Simple Case Study Sharing: Compiled by Adriansyah Putra Taufik Senior RNPO Engineer Huawei Indonesia NIS
No ratings yet
Simple Case Study Sharing: Compiled by Adriansyah Putra Taufik Senior RNPO Engineer Huawei Indonesia NIS
76 pages
PRS Client O&m
No ratings yet
PRS Client O&m
157 pages
GSM Frequency Planning
67% (3)
GSM Frequency Planning
54 pages
1 LTE eRAN6.0 Handover Fault Diagnosis
No ratings yet
1 LTE eRAN6.0 Handover Fault Diagnosis
48 pages
RSRQ 4T4R
No ratings yet
RSRQ 4T4R
7 pages
Analysis of Handover Problems On GSM Networks
No ratings yet
Analysis of Handover Problems On GSM Networks
48 pages
Sina Institute of Networks & Aesthetics: 4G Lte Credit Hours: 48 Content Details
No ratings yet
Sina Institute of Networks & Aesthetics: 4G Lte Credit Hours: 48 Content Details
1 page
RRC Connection
No ratings yet
RRC Connection
57 pages
4T4R UPW Trial Report
No ratings yet
4T4R UPW Trial Report
22 pages
TTI Bundling
100% (1)
TTI Bundling
5 pages
FDD Lte S1-Flex Feature Guide
No ratings yet
FDD Lte S1-Flex Feature Guide
10 pages
Interference Between 2G and 3G Network
100% (1)
Interference Between 2G and 3G Network
3 pages
GENEX U-NET Tools Basic Tutorial
No ratings yet
GENEX U-NET Tools Basic Tutorial
24 pages
GB - BT01 - E1 - 0 GSM Basics: Course Objectives
No ratings yet
GB - BT01 - E1 - 0 GSM Basics: Course Objectives
35 pages
ERAN Feature Documentation ERAN13.1 - 01 20190521103202
No ratings yet
ERAN Feature Documentation ERAN13.1 - 01 20190521103202
47 pages
HSPA+ Introduction - Hsupa: Huawei Technologies Co., LTD
100% (1)
HSPA+ Introduction - Hsupa: Huawei Technologies Co., LTD
41 pages
Nokia
No ratings yet
Nokia
41 pages
TS-3GBTS-SW-0120 Feature RAN1849 BTS Licensing - Logical Target ID For Flexi BTS
No ratings yet
TS-3GBTS-SW-0120 Feature RAN1849 BTS Licensing - Logical Target ID For Flexi BTS
7 pages
Ultima Forte Required Data Inputs For Ericsson Markets 2g-3g Infrastructure PDF
No ratings yet
Ultima Forte Required Data Inputs For Ericsson Markets 2g-3g Infrastructure PDF
28 pages
12 Wcdma Hsdpa RRM and Parameters
No ratings yet
12 Wcdma Hsdpa RRM and Parameters
67 pages
3g & UMTS Networks
No ratings yet
3g & UMTS Networks
48 pages
2G 3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization (GBSS18.1 - 01)
No ratings yet
2G 3G Neighboring Cell Automatic Optimization (GBSS18.1 - 01)
25 pages
Drive testing The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
From Everand
Drive testing The Ultimate Step-By-Step Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
Diameter Protocol A Complete Guide
From Everand
Diameter Protocol A Complete Guide
Gerardus Blokdyk
No ratings yet
WCDMA RAN Planning and Optimization (Book1 WRNPO Basics)
100% (1)
WCDMA RAN Planning and Optimization (Book1 WRNPO Basics)
283 pages
Chapter 1 WCDMA System Overview
No ratings yet
Chapter 1 WCDMA System Overview
12 pages
Huawei WCDMA System Overview Course
No ratings yet
Huawei WCDMA System Overview Course
245 pages
Basic Principles of WCDMA System(v1.1)
No ratings yet
Basic Principles of WCDMA System(v1.1)
250 pages
Chapter 2
No ratings yet
Chapter 2
12 pages
Modern Wireless Communication Systems: 2.1 1G: First Generation Networks
No ratings yet
Modern Wireless Communication Systems: 2.1 1G: First Generation Networks
12 pages
Third Generation (3G) Mobile Technology: CSCI 6404
No ratings yet
Third Generation (3G) Mobile Technology: CSCI 6404
68 pages
3G Tutorial
No ratings yet
3G Tutorial
126 pages
1.CB BT001 E03 0 CDMA Technology Overview 45
No ratings yet
1.CB BT001 E03 0 CDMA Technology Overview 45
45 pages
1.CB - BT001 - E03 - 0 CDMA Technology Overview - 45 PDF
No ratings yet
1.CB - BT001 - E03 - 0 CDMA Technology Overview - 45 PDF
45 pages
Huawei WCDMA RAN Overview
100% (1)
Huawei WCDMA RAN Overview
67 pages
Wireless Technology: Submitted By:-Sumitted To: 1. Khemesh Kumar 1. Kulshrestha
No ratings yet
Wireless Technology: Submitted By:-Sumitted To: 1. Khemesh Kumar 1. Kulshrestha
25 pages
3g Mobile Technologies
No ratings yet
3g Mobile Technologies
6 pages
3g Tutorial Brough Turner
No ratings yet
3g Tutorial Brough Turner
126 pages
4G and Its Evolution
No ratings yet
4G and Its Evolution
11 pages
Wireless Vision
No ratings yet
Wireless Vision
48 pages
5G Mobile Communication Technology: Huajun Chen and Lina Yuan
No ratings yet
5G Mobile Communication Technology: Huajun Chen and Lina Yuan
5 pages
08 01 14 Verizon Response-20140804-153609979
No ratings yet
08 01 14 Verizon Response-20140804-153609979
5 pages
Inert Filler or Extender
No ratings yet
Inert Filler or Extender
6 pages
Full Download Civil Engineering Materials: From Theory To Practice 1st Edition Qiang Yuan - Ebook PDF
100% (3)
Full Download Civil Engineering Materials: From Theory To Practice 1st Edition Qiang Yuan - Ebook PDF
41 pages
IRSE News 288 May 2022
No ratings yet
IRSE News 288 May 2022
44 pages
Handrail Ramp
No ratings yet
Handrail Ramp
5 pages
Water Apportionment Accord 1991
No ratings yet
Water Apportionment Accord 1991
3 pages
3G and UMTS Frequently Asked Questions
No ratings yet
3G and UMTS Frequently Asked Questions
16 pages
A Citizens Guide To Maintaining Storm Water Best Management Practices
No ratings yet
A Citizens Guide To Maintaining Storm Water Best Management Practices
20 pages
5 The Design of A Water Retaining Culverts To BS 8007
100% (3)
5 The Design of A Water Retaining Culverts To BS 8007
26 pages
Drawing Sprocket
No ratings yet
Drawing Sprocket
1 page
Class12 ProggAssign Answers Notes
No ratings yet
Class12 ProggAssign Answers Notes
66 pages
New Product Development - The SNTF Corp - Jaipur
No ratings yet
New Product Development - The SNTF Corp - Jaipur
4 pages
Manual Sky Hoot
No ratings yet
Manual Sky Hoot
164 pages
Tunnel Modelling Features in PLAXIS 3D
No ratings yet
Tunnel Modelling Features in PLAXIS 3D
44 pages
Creep of Plain and Reinforced Concrete Neville
50% (2)
Creep of Plain and Reinforced Concrete Neville
370 pages
Easa Pocket Book PDF
0% (1)
Easa Pocket Book PDF
116 pages
Science PKSR 2 (Year 5)
No ratings yet
Science PKSR 2 (Year 5)
16 pages
Topic 7 - Framed Building Construction - BSR552
No ratings yet
Topic 7 - Framed Building Construction - BSR552
34 pages
Performance of A Solar Dryer With Limited Sun Tracking Capability
No ratings yet
Performance of A Solar Dryer With Limited Sun Tracking Capability
6 pages
VDHS 5 6 Steady State Handling Rollover
No ratings yet
VDHS 5 6 Steady State Handling Rollover
129 pages
Bimala Acharya Stuctural Report
No ratings yet
Bimala Acharya Stuctural Report
42 pages
PL_ALAT_DAPUR final (1)
No ratings yet
PL_ALAT_DAPUR final (1)
7 pages
NARI
No ratings yet
NARI
42 pages
ka8100
No ratings yet
ka8100
20 pages
IJCSEIERDFEB20174
No ratings yet
IJCSEIERDFEB20174
10 pages
Urgent and Imporant
No ratings yet
Urgent and Imporant
6 pages
UGRPIINotice
No ratings yet
UGRPIINotice
7 pages

Note: This service is not intended for secure transactions such as banking, social media, email, or purchasing. Use at your own risk. We assume no liability whatsoever for broken pages.